JP5440103B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. .

Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) .

JP 2007-7465 A

Here, there are memory having a high transfer speed and a memory having a low transfer speed , and there is still room for improvement in order to suitably perform image processing.

The above problem is circumstance occurs similarly in the processing by the memory which stores data different from the image data.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and provides a gaming machine that can be suitably processed using storage means that stores information for executing predetermined control in advance. It is intended to do.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine comprising first storage means for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on information stored in the first storage means,
Second storage means that can store information read from the first storage means and has a shorter period of time required for reading information than when read from the first storage means when compared by reading information of the same capacity When,
Transfer means for reading out the specific information used in executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means; ,
With
The control means executes the specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means, and further, a predetermined condition is satisfied after executing the first control. The specific control is executed in the case, and the specific control is not executed when the condition is not satisfied,
The transfer means stores the specific information in the second storage means when the first control is executed or started .
When the first control is executed or started, it comprises a limiting means for limiting the occurrence of a predetermined event before the execution of the specific control,
The transfer means stores at least a part of the specific information in the second storage means during a period restricted by the restriction means .

It is possible to suitably process using storage means that stores information for executing predetermined control in advance.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery determination. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the reading process for abnormality monitoring. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on the display control of a symbol display apparatus. The block diagram for demonstrating the hardware constitutions of character ROM. (A) Timing chart for explaining the state of transmission / reception between the write control unit and the controller when reading data from the character ROM, (b) State of transmission / reception between the controller and the NAND type storage unit Timing chart for explanation. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the software structure of character ROM. The flowchart which shows the main process in display CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing initial setting processing of a common data group in a bridge LSI. 7 is a flowchart showing data transfer processing in a bridge LSI. The flowchart which shows the initial transfer process in VDP. 10 is a flowchart showing drawing data setting processing in VDP. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing signal output process in VDP. 6 is a timing chart showing access timings to the write control unit and the VDP bridge RAM. The flowchart which shows the normal process in display CPU. The flowchart which shows the game time control processing in display CPU. The flowchart which shows the change start process by the simple symbol in display CPU. The flowchart which shows the process during change by the simple design in display CPU. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the fluctuation | variation display using a simple symbol. The timing chart for demonstrating the mode of the display control after power activation. The flowchart which shows the change start process by the normal symbol in display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process of the display table in display CPU. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing which shows the various tables memorize | stored in the table display area for fluctuation | variation display, (e) Explanatory drawing which shows the various tables memorize | stored in the table storage area for jackpot presentations. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a display table in case a jackpot effect is not performed after the effect for game times. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a display table in case a jackpot effect is performed after the effect for game times. The flowchart which shows the process during the fluctuation | variation by the normal symbol in display CPU. The flowchart which shows the operation corresponding | compatible process in display CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing drawing list setting processing in the display CPU. The flowchart which shows the data transfer instruction | indication process in display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing data transfer setting processing in a bridge LSI. The flowchart which shows the overwrite process in VDP. 10 is a flowchart showing a data transfer setting process for return in the bridge LSI. The flowchart which shows the reset process in VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that various data groups are transferred with the progress of production. The flowchart which shows the presentation control process for 15R probability variation big hits in display CPU. The flowchart which shows the start effect post-process in display CPU. The flowchart which shows the production | presentation control process for explicit 2R probability variation big hits in display CPU. The flowchart which shows the abnormality notification control process in display CPU. The flowchart which shows the standby image control process in display CPU. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating initial setting processing according to the fifth embodiment. The flowchart which shows the abnormality notification control processing in 6th Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the simple display in 7th Embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing drawing data setting processing in VDP. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing signal output process in VDP. The flowchart which shows the main process in the display CPU in 9th Embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing drawing data setting processing in VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating drawing list information. The flowchart which shows the data transfer instruction | indication process in display CPU. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. The perspective view which shows a slot machine. The perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which opened the front door. FIG. 3 is a development view of a belt-like belt constituting each reel. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a slot machine. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the normal process performed in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the lottery process performed in MPU of a main controller. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning probability in a normal game, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning probability in a bonus game. The flowchart which shows the reel control process performed in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the medal payout process performed in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the bonus game process performed in MPU of a main controller. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on the display control of the display apparatus in 11th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the normal time control processing by the display CPU in 11th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the control process at the time of the bonus by the display CPU in 11th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the presentation progress process by the display CPU in 11th Embodiment. The timing chart for demonstrating the mode of the display control at the time of winning a bonus combination. The timing chart for demonstrating the mode of display control when the number of payouts becomes 15 or less in a bonus game.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward by using one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated rearward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  Note that the gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, the front door frame 14 has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. Here, the structure of the game board 20 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20.

  The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 23, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, A main display unit 33, an accessory display unit 34, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, and the lower operating port 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 20, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

  In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. The game board 20 is provided with a large number of nails 28 for dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 27, the game ball enters the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 or the through gate 25. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 23 and 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 23 is on the upper side. The lower working port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 24, and the electric operating member 24a is in the open state (supported state or guide state). It is possible to win 24.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a large winning opening 22a that leads to the back side of the game board 20, and an open / close door 22b that opens and closes the large winning opening 22a. The open / close door 22b is normally in a closed state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As a release mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 33 and the accessory display portion 34 are provided on a decorative member 29 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 29 extends from the board surface of the game board 20 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 29 faces the window panel 53 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from dropping in front of the front surface of the decorative member 29.

  A main display unit 33 and an accessory display unit 34 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 29. That is, the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 53 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 33 and 34. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display unit 33, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 23 and the winning to the lower working port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display section 33 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 33. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 33 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the main display unit 33 is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  The accessory display unit 34 displays a variation of the picture triggered by a winning to the through gate 25, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 25 as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 25 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol that is a kind of symbol. The variable display unit 26 is provided with a center frame 32 so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The center frame 32 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 31, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is reduced due to the fall of the game ball is not caused. .

  The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  On the symbol display device 31, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 31 is started based on winning in the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 33, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 accordingly. Then, for example, the symbol display device 31 is set in advance to a game number of times that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 22a of the variable winning device 22 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  By the way, based on the winning at any one of the operating ports 23, 24, the variable display is started on the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time.

  A first holding lamp portion 35 corresponding to the main display portion 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided at the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 are reserved, and the number of reservations is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 35 is turned on.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 32, a second holding lamp portion 36 corresponding to the accessory display portion 34 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed when the second holding lamp unit 36 is turned on. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance lamp | ramp part 35 and 36 is fulfill | performed by the display in the one part area | region of the symbol display apparatus 31. FIG.

  Here, the game board 20 is provided with a magnetic detection sensor 38 as an abnormality detection means. The magnetic detection sensor 38 is installed on the back side of the game board 20 around the upper working port 23. As described above, the internal lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the opening / closing execution mode is performed using a winning at the upper operating port 23 as a trigger. Therefore, a magnet is brought close to the upper operating port 23 in front of the window panel 53 and the upper operation is performed illegally. An act of guiding the game ball to the mouth 23 is assumed. On the other hand, the provision of the magnetic detection sensor 38 makes it possible to detect an unauthorized act using the magnet. The magnetic detection sensor 38 is electrically connected to a main controller described later, and the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor 38 is input to the main controller. And in the main control apparatus, when the fraudulent act using the magnet is specified based on the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor 38, the process for performing abnormality notification is executed. Details of the abnormality notification and specific processing contents will be described later in detail.

  In addition, the position of the magnetic detection sensor 38 is not limited to the above-described one. For example, in order to suppress an illegal act to illegally enter the general winning opening 21 using the magnet, A magnetic detection sensor 38 may be arranged around the general winning award 21.

  An inner rail portion 41 and an outer rail portion 42 are attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is configured by the inner rail portion 41 and the outer rail portion 42, and is mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. A game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by operating a launch handle 51 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 52 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 52 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the above-described window panel 53 is fitted therein. The window panel 53 is colorless and transparent formed of glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed colorless and transparent using a synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 52, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp part 54 is provided above the window part 52 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 54, speaker units 55 for outputting sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 52 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 56 and a lower bulging portion 57 that bulge to the near side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 56a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 56, and a lower plate 57a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 57. The upper plate 56a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 57a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 56a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 56a and the lower plate 57a.

  In an area facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the upper bulging portion 56, an effect operating device 58 having an operation portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 58 is manually operated by the player so that the effect content on the display screen of the symbol display device 31 is the predetermined effect content.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display mode on the display screen of the symbol display device 31 is switched based on the operation of the effect operating device 58. Specifically, a plurality of types (for example, two types) of background images in the standby image displayed until the game turn is started and the game turn image displayed in a situation where the game turn is being executed are set. The background image is switched by operating the effect operating device 58 in a situation where the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. Further, an image corresponding to the operation is displayed on the symbol display device 31 based on the operation of the effect operating device 58 under a predetermined condition in a situation where game times are being executed.

  A main control device, an audio lamp control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, a power source and a firing control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. In the main controller 60, a substrate box that accommodates the main control substrate 61 or the like is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is attached by peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 65 and a payout control device 70 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 65 is connected to a power supply and launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 65.

  Also, various sensors such as a magnetic detection sensor 38 and various winning detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. Based on the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor 38, the magnetic detection determination is performed in the MPU 62. Further, the various winning detection sensors 67a to 67e are provided one-to-one with respect to the winning-corresponding balls such as the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24, and the through gate 25. The detection sensor is included, and the MPU 62 performs a winning determination (penetration determination) for each pitching unit. In addition, the MPU 62 executes a lottery generation lottery based on the winnings to the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 and also performs the support generating lottery based on the winnings to the through gate 25.

  A power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 70, and an audio lamp control device 90 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, the payout control device 70 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the sound lamp control device 90. In this case, the command information storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 22c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22, an electric combination driving unit 24b that opens and closes the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24, and a main display unit. 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 22c so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 24a is won, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 24b so that the electric combination 24a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 62. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 24a is to be opened is clearly indicated, display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 62.

  The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply and launch control device 80, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

  The power source and launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. And based on the external electric power supplied from the commercial power supply, the necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. The power supply and launch control device 80 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81, and the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound lamp control device 90 drives and controls the various lamp portions 35, 36, 54 and the speaker portion 55 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 60, and also the display control device 100. Is to control. In addition, a production operation device 58 is connected to the sound lamp control device 90, and the control of the display lamp unit 54, the speaker unit 55, and the display control device 100 is based on a manual operation on the production operation device 58. There are things to do. In the display control device 100, display control of the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 90.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 31 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display screen G, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, The combination is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, when an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later is obtained, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, An explicit video is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

<About various counters and reserved ball storage area>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 62 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 33, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 31, setting of display of the accessory display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery generation for jackpots, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining jackpot types such as a probable jackpot result and a normal jackpot result, In the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 31 moves out and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, The variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer 64a, the information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained information storage when a winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 occurs. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b as a means.

  The holding ball storage area 64b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 are stored on hold. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, in order to specify the number in which the winning history to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Is stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 33, and at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of whether or not is made is performed.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 63a as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 63. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 64 b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are: (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the bottom after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the operating port 24.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device 22 can be controlled so that the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 22 is relatively high from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 22a is performed 15 times (number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high frequency time) ) Or until the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high frequency). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 22a is performed twice (number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Or until the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 22a reaches 6 (the number of low frequency).

  In the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 51 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. . On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the one big winning opening 22a is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  It should be noted that the number of opening / closing of the large winning opening 22a in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time (or opening limit period) for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are the same as those in the high-frequency winning mode. If the occurrence frequency of winning in the variable winning device 22 is higher than that in the low frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode is started and ended, the value is not limited to the above value. Is optional. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or if the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning to the variable winning device 22 does not substantially occur. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the open limit number is set shorter than the open limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one large winning opening 22a are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the variable winning device 22 does not occur substantially.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24, the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric utility item 24a is opened is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as a minimum secured time after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize to the lower working port 24 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be generated in the upper operating port 23 than in the lower operating port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 24 is connected to the lower operating port 24. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (for example, on the display part 34 based on a winning to the through gate 25) secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, In this case, one condition or any combination of conditions is applied among shortening the average time of the reserved time and increasing the winning probability. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The distribution destination of game results for the big hit type counter C2 (that is, the lottery result by the lottery determination and the distribution lottery) is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 63 (distribution information). Group). As such distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result (low-probability-compatible special game result), an explicit 2R probability-variable jackpot result (an explicit high-probability-matched game result or a result that suddenly changes into a probability state), and a 15R probability-variable jackpot result (high probability) Corresponding special game result) is set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / not-lotting mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (special gaming state corresponding to low probability).

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (a special gaming state corresponding to high probability).

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the modes of the probability variation jackpot result are diversified. That is, when two types of probability variation jackpot results are compared, the advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest. Although the mode is the low-frequency winning mode, the support mode has the lowest explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result that is the high-frequency support mode. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  As a kind of probability variation jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. An explicit 2R probability change jackpot result (an explicit high probability corresponding game result or a result of a latent probability change state) may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probabilistic jackpot results is achieved.

  Furthermore, as a kind of losing result in the winning / losing lottery, there may be included a special losing result that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and that does not shift to the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode after the completion. . In the configuration in which both the above-described non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special outlier result are set, the switching execution mode shifts to the low-frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. However, if one of the results of non-explicit 2R probability change jackpot or special outage occurs in the normal gaming state, for example, it will be It is possible to cause the player to predict which result actually corresponds to.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. Expected effects include a symbol display device 31 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (patterns), and variable display in game times where the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 22 is the high-frequency winning mode. In the gaming machine in which the subsequent stop display result is a special display result, the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 31 is started, This means a display state for making the player think that a variable display state is likely to result in a special display result.

  In the expected effect, two types are set: the reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display or the generation of a special display result at a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is obtained by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31. A display state is displayed in which combinations of reach symbols that may be established are displayed, and in that state, symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  More specifically, the reach display related to the symbol variation display is performed in order to generate a high-frequency winning mode on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 31 as a stage before the symbol variation display is terminated. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a reach symbol combination for which a corresponding jackpot symbol combination may be established, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, a symbol variation display is displayed by the final stop symbol sequence. Is to do.

  The display contents of FIG. 5 will be described in detail. In the state where the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row Z1, and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any effective A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the notice display, the symbol display on the display screen of the symbol display device 31 is started in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode. In the game times that do not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing is referred to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63 in response to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main control device 60 but by the display control device 100. This will be described in detail later.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation display time on the main display unit 33 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 31. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the main display unit 33 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 31.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c of the RAM 64 at a timing when a game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 24a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

  As already described, in the MPU 62, at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the main display unit 33. In this determination, the variation display time table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is used. It is done.

<Various processes executed by main controller 60>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 62 in the main controller 60 advances the game at each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 62 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 62 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. The reading process includes a process of reading the states of the various winning detection sensors 67a to 67e, determining the states of the various winning detection sensors 67a to 67e, and storing the winning detection information. The reading process includes an abnormality monitoring reading process for executing control corresponding to the state of the magnetic detection sensor 38.

  Here, the reading process for abnormality monitoring will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S201, it is determined whether the magnetic detection sensor 38 is ON. If it is determined that it is not ON, in step S202, information on the abnormality detection counter in the various counter areas 64d of the main controller 60 is set as the abnormality reference number information. Specifically, the information of the abnormality detection counter is set to “2”.

  Information set in the abnormality detection counter is updated when it is determined that the magnetic detection sensor 38 is ON. That is, when the magnetic detection sensor 38 is ON, an affirmative determination is made in step S201, and the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, 1 is subtracted from the information in the abnormality detection counter.

  In a succeeding step S207, it is determined whether or not the information of the abnormality detection counter is “0”. If the information of the abnormality detection counter is not “0”, the reading process is terminated as it is. If the information of the abnormality detection counter is “0”, the abnormality detection flag is stored in the abnormality detection flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the main controller 60 in step S208. Incidentally, storing a flag means storing “1” information in the flag area. The same applies to the other flags.

  Thereafter, an abnormality specifying command is set in step S209, and the reading process is terminated. The abnormality specifying command set in step S209 is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 90 in the external output process in the normal process described later. The sound lamp control device 90 receives the abnormality specifying command and starts abnormality notification through the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55. Further, the sound lamp control device 90 controls the display control device 100 so that the symbol display device 31 performs abnormality notification.

  The state in which the abnormality detection flag is stored as described above is canceled when it is determined that the magnetic detection sensor 38 is not ON. That is, after determining that it is not ON (step S201: YES) and executing the process of step S202, the process proceeds to step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether an abnormality detection flag is stored. If the abnormality detection flag is not stored, the reading process is terminated as it is. If the abnormality detection flag is stored, the abnormality detection flag is deleted in step S204. Incidentally, erasing the flag means changing the information “1” stored in the flag area to information “0”. The same applies to the other flags.

  Thereafter, in step S205, an abnormality cancel command is set, and the reading process is terminated. The abnormality cancellation command set in step S205 is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 90 in an external output process in a normal process described later. The sound lamp control device 90 receives the abnormality cancel command, and terminates the abnormality notification performed through the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55. In addition, the sound lamp control device 90 controls the display control device 100 so as to end the abnormality notification performed in the symbol display device 31.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7), after executing the read process in step S101, the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  In subsequent step S104, a through winning process is performed in accordance with winning through the through gate 25. In the through winning process, when a winning to the through gate 25 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area 64c is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). On the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c. Moreover, the process for making the 2nd reservation lamp | ramp part 36 of the variable display unit 26 corresponding to the number of articles | goods reservation memory | storage corresponding to the audio lamp control apparatus 90 is performed.

  In a succeeding step S105, a winning process for the operating port accompanying winning in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, when a winning is made to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, the start reserved memory number stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b is the upper limit number (for example, “ 4)), the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 64b. In this case, the data is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the current start reserved memory number. Further, a process for lighting the first hold lamp unit 35 of the variable display unit 26 corresponding to the start hold storage number is executed for the voice lamp control device 90. After executing the process of step S105, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S301 to S307 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S309 and S310 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when a production command such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, or the like is set, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90.

  In the subsequent step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  In subsequent step S303, a game number control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game times control process, jackpot determination, symbol variable display setting by the symbol display device 31, display control of the main display unit 33, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In a succeeding step S305, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, the information stored in the electronic combination holding area 64c of the RAM 64 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric combination 24a, to open / close the electric combination 24a, and for the combination Display control of the display unit 34 is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S306, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power source and launch control device 80. . Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S307, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the RAM 64. The power failure flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 65 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 and is erased in the next main processing.

  When the power failure flag is not stored, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S308, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S309, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 64. In step S310, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S307 that the power failure flag is stored, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption processing from step S311 is executed. That is, in step S311, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in step S312, and after the access to the RAM 64 is prohibited in step S313, the power supply is completely shut off and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S303 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the open / close execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S402, that is, the game times starting process in steps S403 to S405 and the game times progressing process in steps S406 to S409. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 23 and 24 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the main display unit 33 is in a variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The variable display in-progress flag is stored when the main display unit 33 starts variable display, and is deleted when the variable display ends.

  If the main display unit 33 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S403 to S405. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S403, the number-of-holding storage number N, which is the number of pieces of on-hold information stored, is referred to by referring to the number-of-holding storage area NA of the holding ball storage area 64b. Determine whether. The case where the start hold storage number N is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 64b. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number N is not “0”, a data setting process is executed in step S404.

  In the data setting process, first, the start pending storage number N is decremented by one. Further, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE in the holding ball storage area 64b is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.

  In the data setting process, a process for causing the voice lamp control device 90 to recognize that the hold information has been shifted and changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 35 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold is executed. To do.

  After executing the data setting process, the game start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S405. Here, the variation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S501, a determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a, the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, It is determined whether or not the value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the high probability jackpot value information. In the case of the low probability mode, the value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a. Is matched with the jackpot numerical information for low probability.

  In the subsequent step S502, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination process in step S501 is a jackpot winning result. If it is a big win result, a type determination process is executed in step S503.

  In the type determination process, the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 63b, it is specified which jackpot type corresponds to the information related to the above-obtained jackpot type counter C2.

  In subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type specified in the type determination process in step S503 corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. If it corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, it is determined in step S505 whether the jackpot type corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  If the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, a stop result setting process for 15R probability variation jackpot is executed in step S506. Execute stop result setting process. If it is not a probable big hit result (step S504: NO), a normal big hit stop result setting process is executed in step S508. Furthermore, when it is determined that the result of the success / failure determination process in step S501 is not a big win winning result, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S509.

  In the stop result setting process in steps S506 to S509, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 is specified from information stored in advance in the ROM 63, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. To do. Further, in step S506, step S507, and step S508, the RAM 64 provides information for specifying in the MPU 62 that the determination result of the current game round is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, or a normal jackpot result. To store. Specifically, a 15R probability variation flag is stored in step S506, an explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in step S507, and a normal jackpot flag is stored in step S508.

  After executing any one of steps S506 to S509, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S510.

  In this process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 15R probability variation flag, the explicit 2R probability variation flag, or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. If any flag is stored, it is determined that reach display occurs. Even if none of the flags is stored, if the value related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the reach display is performed. Determine that it occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the fluctuation display corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach generation fluctuation display time table stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. Time information is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in a variable display time counter (variable display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the value corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 63c. The variable display time is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter.

  Note that the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number of the start pending storage numbers N increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation variation display time table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variable display time does not vary according to the number N of starting reserved balls and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of 15R probability variable jackpot results, explicit 2R probability variable jackpot results, normal jackpot results, out-of-reach and complete out-of-shift cases, separate variable display time tables are set. Also good. In this case, the variable display time is allocated according to each game result.

  After executing the variable display time setting process in step S510, a variable command and a type command are set in step S511. The change command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes 15R probability variation jackpot result information, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, outage result information, and the like as game result information.

  The change command and type command set in step S511 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). The sound lamp control device 90 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp unit 54 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 55 in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and the contents of the determined effect The display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 are controlled so as to be executed. The audio lamp control device 90 transmits the change command and the type command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 determines a variation display pattern in the symbol display device 31 in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and the symbol display device 31 is executed so that the variation display pattern is executed. Control display. Specific contents of the display control will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S511, the main display unit 33 starts to display the variable display of the pattern in step S512. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 10), when the main display unit 33 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S406 to S409 is executed.

  In the game times progression process, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the current game times change display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter of the RAM 64 has become “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (step S510). The value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S407. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 33 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S408. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 64 in the process of any one of the above steps S506 to S509 is specified, and the main display so that the pattern form corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 33. The display of the unit 33 is controlled.

  In the subsequent step S409, a change end command is set. The set change end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). The sound lamp control device 90 transmits the received change end command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. In the display control device 100, by receiving the change end command, the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round is confirmed and displayed (final stop display). Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S602, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 33 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 15R probability variation flag, the explicit 2R probability variation flag, or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, an opening / closing execution mode start process is executed in step S604. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) is set for waiting without opening the large winning opening 22a of the variable winning device 22 for opening in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 63 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64 d of the RAM 64. In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information indicates that the waiting time information is lower in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be shorter. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 1 sec. In the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) is executed.

  In a succeeding step S605, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, it is determined whether either the 15R probability variation flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “2” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 in step S606. The round counter RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the special winning opening 22a is opened. On the other hand, if it is the high-frequency winning mode, “15” is set in the round counter RC in step S607.

  After executing the processing of step S606 or step S607, after setting an opening command in step S608, the gaming state transition processing is terminated. The opening command set in step S608 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). This opening command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set.

  The sound lamp control device 90 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp unit 54 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 55 in the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and the content of the determined effect is executed. In this manner, the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 are controlled. In addition, the sound lamp control device 90 transmits the opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 31 to start an effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command. Specific contents of the display control will be described later.

  On the other hand, if it is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S601: YES), the process proceeds to step S609. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. When the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S610. Here, the special winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 22a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 22c. If the big prize opening 22a is not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” in step S702, and the timer T provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is determined in step S703. It is determined whether or not the value is “0”.

  When the value of the round counter RC is “0” or when the value of the timer T is not “0”, the big prize opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is not “0” and the value of the timer T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S704, and the variable prize driving unit 22c is set in the driving state to open the big prize opening 22a. To do.

  In subsequent step S705, setting processing for each round is executed. In the setting process for each round, it is first determined whether or not the high-frequency winning mode is set. If the high-frequency winning mode is set, “15000” (that is, 30 sec) is set in the timer T. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) is started, that is, every 2 msec. Also, “10” is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 22a. On the other hand, when it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, when it is the low-frequency winning mode, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer T, and “6” is set in the winning counter area PC. .

  Thereafter, an opening command is set in step S706, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). The sound lamp control device 90 changes the effect contents in the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 based on the received release command. Further, the sound lamp control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 switches the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in the symbol display device 31 based on the received opening command. Specific contents of the display control will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the special winning opening 22a is being opened (step S701: YES), the process proceeds to step S707 to determine whether or not the value of the timer T is “0”. If the value of the timer T is not “0”, it is determined in step S708 whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 22a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 22. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step S709, and then it is determined in step S710 whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. If not, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If the value of the timer T is “0” in step S707, or if the value of the winning counter area PC is “0” in step S710, it means that the special winning opening closing condition is established. In such a case, in step S711, the variable winning drive unit 22c is set to a non-driven state so as to close the special winning opening 22a.

  In subsequent step S712, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter RC, and in step S713, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”. When the value of the round counter RC is “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. If the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, it is determined in step S714 whether the high-frequency winning mode is set.

  When the high-frequency winning mode is set, the timer T is set to “1000” (that is, 2 sec), and when the low-frequency winning mode is set, the timer T is set to “100” (that is, 0.2 sec). That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the time during which the large winning opening 22a is closed between rounds is set shorter than in the high frequency winning mode. Thereafter, a closing command is set in step S717, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  The set closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). Based on the received closing command, the sound lamp control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 22a for one round has been completed. Further, the sound lamp control device 90 transmits the close command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 22a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and executes processing corresponding thereto. Specific contents of such processing will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 12), after executing the special winning opening / closing process in step S610, it is determined in step S611 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”. In step S612, it is determined whether the ending standby time has elapsed. Here, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when the opening / closing execution mode ends, an effect for ending is executed by the symbol display device 31 or the like, and the waiting time for ending is the effect for the ending. This is a period for waiting for the start of the next game time in the main control device 60 until the game ends.

  When the value of the round counter RC is not “0” or when the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, an ending command is set in step S613. The ending command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). The sound lamp control device 90 ends the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 based on the received ending command. Further, the audio lamp control device 90 transmits the ending command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 ends the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in the symbol display device 31 based on the received ending command. Specific contents of the display control will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S614, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the transition process, it is determined whether the 15R probability change flag, the explicit 2R probability change flag, or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. When the 15R probability variation flag or the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode, and the normal jackpot flag is stored. In this case, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

  Incidentally, when the normal jackpot flag is stored, “100” as the end reference number is set in the game number counter in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. This game number counter is decremented by 1 every time the above-described variation start process is executed, and when the value of the game number counter becomes “0”, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

  Then, in step S615, after executing the opening / closing execution mode end processing, the gaming state transition processing ends. In the open / close execution mode end processing, if any of the explicit 2R probability variation flag, 15R probability variation flag, or normal jackpot flag is stored, it is deleted, and if it is not already stored, the state is maintained. To do.

<Electrical Configuration Related to Display Control of Symbol Display Device 31>
Next, an electrical configuration relating to display control of the symbol display device 31 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio lamp control board 91 provided in the audio lamp control device 90. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. An effect operating device 58 and a main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various lamp units 35, 36, 54, a speaker unit 55, and the display control device 100 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Yes.

  The MPU 92 uses game control commands (game time control information) such as change commands, type commands, and change end commands already described, and jackpot effect commands (open game effects) such as opening commands, ending commands, opening commands, and closing commands. Information) is received from the main controller 60, and the various lamp units 35, 36, 54 and the speaker unit 55 are driven and controlled based on the received commands.

  In addition, the MPU 92 transmits the above commands received from the main control device 60 to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Further, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the production operation device 58 is operated by determining whether or not the operation generation signal is received from the production operation device 58 and is operated. If it is determined that it is, the operation generation command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  The display control device 100 includes a display CPU 102, a program ROM 103, a work RAM 104, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, a bridge side RAM 107, a VDP side RAM 108, and a bridge LSI 109. A display control board 101 is provided.

  The display CPU 102 has a function as a main control unit in the display control apparatus 100. Specifically, the display CPU 102 is connected to the input port 111 mounted on the display control board 101 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 90 are input to the display CPU 102 through the input port 111. Is done. The display CPU 102 is connected to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 via a bus.

  The program ROM 103 is a non-volatile storage unit for control for storing various control programs executed by the display CPU 102 and control information such as fixed value data. The program ROM 103 is a non-volatile semiconductor memory, and in detail, a NOR flash memory is used. Note that the storage capacity is 256 Mbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display CPU 102 is satisfactorily executed. Part of the fixed value data is stored in advance in the areas 103 a to 103 e of the program ROM 103. Details of these areas 103a to 103e will be described together with the description of the processing executed by the display CPU 102.

  The work RAM 104 is a control volatile storage unit for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the display CPU 102. The work RAM 104 is a volatile semiconductor memory, and a DRAM is used in detail. However, the present invention is not limited to DRAM, and SRAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 64 Mbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display CPU 102 is satisfactorily executed. The work data, flags and the like are stored in the areas 104 a to 104 d of the work RAM 104. Details of each of the areas 104a to 104d will be described together with a description of processing executed by the display CPU 102.

  The display CPU 102 uses the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 to execute arithmetic processing based on various commands received from the sound lamp control device 90. The display CPU 102 is connected to the bridge LSI 109 via the first bus 112 and also connected to the VDP 105 via the second bus 113. Then, the display CPU 102 performs control to give a predetermined instruction to the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 as a result of the arithmetic processing.

  The bridge LSI 109 has a function of transferring data stored in the character ROM 106 to the bridge RAM 107 based on an instruction from the display CPU 102. Specifically, the bridge LSI 109 includes a write control unit 121, an input / output driver circuit 122, and a cache buffer 123. The write control unit 121 includes a control ROM 124 and a control RAM 125, and has a function of executing various arithmetic processes in the bridge LSI 109. The write control unit 121 is connected to the character ROM 106 via the third bus 126, and is connected to the bridge-side RAM 107 via the input / output driver circuit 122 and the fourth bus 127. The third bus 126 is configured by a 32-bit bus line, and the fourth bus 127 is configured by a 32-bit bus line.

  The character ROM 106 is a non-volatile storage unit for image data (image information) for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 31 and background data. The character ROM 106 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory, and more specifically has a NAND flash memory. Since the character ROM 106 is provided with two 8-Gbit NAND flash memories, the storage capacity is 16 Gbits. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap-format image data of various characters, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the JPEG format for the background image. Image data is stored and held. Note that the character ROM 106 is non-write and used as a read-only memory when display control is performed in the display control apparatus 100.

  The bridge-side RAM 107 is a volatile storage unit for image data (image information) for temporarily storing and holding data stored in the character ROM 106 for reading data in the VDP 105. The bridge-side RAM 107 is a VRAM (video RAM) made of a volatile semiconductor memory, and an SDRAM is used in detail. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. Since four 256 Mbit SDRAMs are provided as the bridge-side RAM 107, the storage capacity is about 1 Gbit. That is, the storage capacity of the bridge-side RAM 107 is set smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 106.

  The write control unit 121 is connected to the cache buffer 123, and transfers image data from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 based on an instruction from the display CPU 102, and the image data after being transferred to the cache buffer 123. Write to the bridge-side RAM 107 at a predetermined timing.

  The cache buffer 123 is a volatile semiconductor memory, and its storage capacity is set to a storage capacity capable of sufficiently storing unit data in the character ROM 106. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, the unit data in the character ROM 106 is 4 Kbytes, and the storage capacity of the cache buffer 123 is 5 Kbytes corresponding thereto. That is, the storage capacity of the cache buffer 123 is set so that one unit data can be stored, but a plurality of unit data cannot be stored. As a result, it is possible to favorably hold the unit data temporarily while suppressing the storage capacity of the cache buffer 123.

  The VDP 105 includes a control ROM 131 and a control RAM 132, and specifically processes data using data stored in the bridge RAM 107 and the VDP RAM 108 based on instructions from the display CPU 102. Thus, the graphic display device 31 has a function of performing a drawing process. Specifically, the VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit (drawing means or drawing control unit) that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 105 can be said to be a microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing.

  The VDP 105 is connected to the input / output driver circuit 122 of the bridge LSI 109 via the fifth bus 133, and can access the bridge-side RAM 107 via the input / output driver circuit 122. Further, the VDP 105 outputs predetermined signals such as a non-access signal and a save status signal described later to the write control unit 121 via the fifth bus 133 and the input / output driver circuit 122. The fifth bus 133 is constituted by a 32-bit bus line.

  Incidentally, the input / output driver circuit 122 is interposed between the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105, and is interposed between the bridge side RAM 107 with respect to both the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105. In this case, a control signal is appropriately output from the write control unit 121 to the input / output driver circuit 122 to switch which path the data is transferred to. By interposing the input / output driver circuit 122 in this way, the VDP 105 accesses the bridge-side RAM 107 without going through the write control unit 121, so that the data reading speed from the bridge-side RAM 107 can be increased. At the same time, since it is not necessary to connect the VDP 105 to each of the write control unit 121 and the bridge RAM 107, the effect of increasing the read speed can be achieved while reducing the number of wires.

  The VDP 105 is connected to the VDP RAM 108 via the sixth bus 134. Similar to the bridge-side RAM 107, the VDP-side RAM 108 is a volatile storage unit for image data (image information) for temporarily storing and holding data stored in the character ROM 106 for reading data in the VDP 105. The VDP RAM 108 is a VRAM (video RAM) made of a volatile semiconductor memory, and an SDRAM is used in detail. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. Since two 256 Mbit SDRAMs are provided as the VDP RAM 108, the storage capacity is 512 Mbits. That is, the storage capacity of the VDP RAM 108 is set smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 106 and smaller than the storage capacity of the bridge RAM 107.

  The VDP 105 transfers data from the bridge side RAM 107 to the VDP side RAM 108. That is, the data is not directly transferred from the character ROM 106 to the VDP RAM 108, but the data once transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge RAM 107 is transferred to the VDP RAM 108.

  The VDP 105 accesses the bridge-side RAM 107 or the VDP-side RAM 108 while adjusting the processing timing of the write control unit 121 based on an instruction from the display CPU 102, and rendering data corresponding to the instruction from the display CPU 102 is provided in the control RAM 132 of the VDP 105. The drawing area 135 is created. The drawing area 135 can store data for one frame in the symbol display device 31. The VDP 105 is connected to an output port 136 mounted on the display control board 101, and the output port 136 is connected to the symbol display device 31. The VDP 105 outputs a drawing signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data stored in the drawing area 135 and displays a predetermined image on the display screen of the symbol display device 31. The drawing area 135 is configured to be able to store data for a plurality of frames, and data related to the next frame can be stored in advance while outputting a drawing signal for a predetermined frame to the symbol display device 31. May be.

  As described above, by using a NAND flash memory as the character ROM 106, it is possible to increase the capacity while suppressing the manufacturing cost as compared with a configuration using a NOR flash memory. Further, by using the NAND flash memory, rewriting can be repeatedly performed in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the development cost can be suppressed. Recycling is also possible. However, the NAND flash memory has a slower data transfer rate than the NOR flash memory. For example, the NOR flash memory is 360 Mbit / sec, while the NAND flash memory is 60 Mbit / sec.

  On the other hand, as described above, since the read-out RAMs such as the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108 are provided, necessary data can be read out in advance into the RAMs 107 and 108. Therefore, drawing data in the VDP 105 can be satisfactorily created by reading from the bridge-side RAM 107 or the VDP-side RAM 108 instead of the character ROM 106 at the drawing timing in the VDP 105.

  The sum of the storage capacities of the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108 is about 1.5 Gbits, whereas the storage capacity of the character ROM 106 is 16 Gbits as described above. Thus, by making the storage capacity of the RAMs 107 and 108 smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 106, the storage capacity of the RAMs 107 and 108 can be suppressed, and the above-described effects can be achieved while reducing the manufacturing cost. Incidentally, in the configuration in which the storage capacity on the RAM 107, 108 side is smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 106, it is necessary to appropriately switch the image data read out to the RAM 107, 108, but in the display CPU 102, VDP 105 and write control unit 121, image data is required. A process for performing the switching is performed. Such processing will be described in detail later.

  If the storage capacity of the character ROM 106 is larger than the storage capacities of the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108, the specific storage capacities thereof are arbitrary. The individual storage capacity and the number of memories constituting the character ROM 106 are arbitrary, and the individual storage capacity and the number of memories constituting the bridge-side RAM 107 and VDP-side RAM 108 are also arbitrary.

  Here, the regular area 137 is set in the VDP RAM 108 of the bridge RAM 107 and the VDP RAM 108. Of the various image data stored in the character ROM 106, the regular area 137 stores image data corresponding to a sudden drawing instruction that may occur in the display CPU 102, and the image data stored in the regular area 137. Will basically be resident.

  Specifically, the regular data group stored in the regular area 137 is stored and held while a situation in which a corresponding image drawing instruction can be generated continues. Further, even if a drawing instruction for a corresponding image is generated and the image is displayed once, it is stored and held in a situation where a new drawing instruction can be generated thereafter. Furthermore, at least a part of the common data group is stored and held until a predetermined erasing condition is satisfied even if the corresponding image drawing instruction is not in a situation that can be generated. Since the regular area 137 is provided, even if a display instruction is suddenly given from the display CPU 102, the VDP 105 can satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the rendering instruction by accessing the regular area 137. it can.

<Specific Configuration of Character ROM 106>
Next, a specific configuration of the character ROM 106 will be described.

  FIG. 15 is a block diagram for explaining the hardware configuration of the character ROM 106. As shown in FIG. 15A, a character ROM 106 is connected to a write control unit 121 mounted on the bridge LSI 109. The character ROM 106 includes a controller 141 and a NAND type storage unit 142 made up of a NAND type flash memory in one package. Configured.

  The write control unit 121 includes a CE terminal, a WE terminal, an OE terminal, an ADDR terminal, and a DATA terminal. The NAND storage unit 142 includes a CE terminal, a WE terminal, a RE terminal, a CLE terminal, an ALE terminal, and an I / O. It has a terminal.

  The controller 141 includes an HCE (HOST CHIP ENABLE) terminal, a HWE (HOST WRITE ENABLE) terminal, a HOE (HOST OUTPUT ENABLE) terminal, an ADDR terminal, and a DATA terminal on the write control unit 121 side. The HCE terminal is a write control. The CE terminal of the unit 121, the HOE terminal are connected to the OE terminal of the write control unit 121, and the ADDR terminal and the DATA terminal are connected to the ADDR terminal and the DATA terminal of the write control unit 121, respectively. The HWE terminal is set in a state where the power supply voltage Vcc is constantly applied and pulled up.

  Further, the NAND type storage unit 142 is provided with an FCE (FLASH CHIP ENABLE) terminal, an FWE (FLASH WRITE ENABLE) terminal, an FRE (FLASH READ ENABLE) terminal, a CLE terminal, an ALE terminal, and an I / O terminal. The terminal is the CE terminal of the NAND storage unit 142, the FWE terminal is the WE terminal of the NAND storage unit 142, the FRE terminal is the RE terminal of the NAND storage unit 142, and the CLE terminal is the CLE terminal of the NAND storage unit 142. The ALE terminal is connected to the ALE terminal of the NAND storage unit 142, and the I / O terminal is connected to the I / O terminal of the NAND storage unit 142.

  FIG. 15B is a block diagram of the controller 141. The controller 141 includes a main body side interface unit 151 that transmits / receives data to / from the write control unit 121, a storage side interface unit 152 that transmits / receives data to / from the NAND storage unit 142, data received from the write control unit 121, and A buffer memory unit 153 that temporarily stores data to be transmitted to the write control unit 121, a CPU 154, a ROM 155, and a RAM 156 that are control units that perform data control processing of the controller 141 and bad block management of the NAND type storage unit 142, NAND An error correction circuit 157 for detecting an error in data read from the mold storage unit 142 and correcting the detected error is provided.

  FIG. 16A is a timing chart for explaining a state of transmission / reception between the write control unit 121 and the controller 141 when data is read from the character ROM 106. An output signal from the CE terminal of the write control unit 121 becomes LOW, a signal is output from the OE terminal at a predetermined timing, and signal sequences CMD0 and ADDR0 corresponding to command data and address data are output from the ADDR terminal in synchronization with the timing. ~ 4, CMD1 is output. When the controller 141 receives these signal sequences, the controller 141 outputs a signal sequence DUMMY corresponding to dummy data corresponding thereto from the DATA terminal. The write control unit 121 does not use the dummy data received at the DATA terminal because it is not read data. The controller 141 stores the command data and address data received via the ADDR terminal in the buffer memory unit 153.

  FIG. 16B is a timing chart for explaining a state of transmission / reception between the controller 141 and the NAND storage unit 142. When the command data and the address data are stored in the buffer memory unit 153 as described above, the controller 141 outputs a signal from the CLE terminal and the FCE terminal and outputs a signal from the FWE terminal at a predetermined timing. Then, the ALE terminal is set to HIGH, and the command data and address data are transmitted from the I / O terminal in synchronization with the timing of the signal output from the FWE terminal.

  In this case, the CPU 154 performs processing so as to write data in a block area that replaces a defective block based on information related to the defective block area in the NAND storage unit 142 in advance, and creates an address management table for that purpose. . Accordingly, when the address data is received from the write control unit 121, the address data of the block area corresponding to the received address data is transmitted from the I / O terminal based on the address management data.

  When the NAND type storage unit 142 receives the command data and the address data at the I / O terminal, the NAND type storage unit 142 performs the reading process of the data in the corresponding address area based on these data as in the conventional case. As shown in FIG. 16B, the read data is output from the controller 141 to the RE terminal at a predetermined timing and transmitted from the I / O terminal to the controller 141 in synchronization with the timing. become.

  When the controller 141 receives the data read to the I / O terminal, the controller 141 saves the data in the buffer memory unit 153 and chucks the data error by the error correction circuit 157. If an error is detected, the error correction is performed. Process.

  The data for which the data error has been checked is stored in the buffer memory unit 153. As shown in FIG. 16A, a signal is output from the OE terminal of the write control unit 121 at a predetermined timing, and the buffer memory unit 153 is output from the ADDR terminal. When the data read command signal READ is transmitted, data DATAN to N + 2 stored in the buffer memory unit 153 is transmitted from the DATA terminal correspondingly.

  As described above, the data DATAN to N + 2 stored in the NAND-type storage unit 142 corresponding to the address data ADDR0 to ADDR4 is read, and the stored data can be sequentially read by repeating this read processing. it can.

  When reading data, the NAND flash memory used as the NAND storage unit 142 inputs a write command signal to the WE terminal, transmits command data and address data to the I / O terminal, and inputs a latch signal to the ALE terminal. As a result, the command data and the address data are stored in the NAND flash memory, and a read operation is performed in the memory. As described above, when the input of the write command signal is indispensable when reading data, it is assumed that the contents stored in the NAND-type storage unit 142 are illegally modified.

  As the unauthorized modification, for example, the image data of the abnormality notification image that is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31 when abnormality such as fraud is detected is rewritten to image data corresponding to a normal image different from the abnormality notification image. Thus, when an illegal act is performed with respect to the pachinko machine 10, an act of preventing abnormality notification from being performed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31 is assumed.

  On the other hand, the controller 141 is interposed between the write control unit 121 and the NAND type storage unit 142, and the FWE terminal of the controller 141 is connected to the WE of the NAND type storage unit 142 while the HWE terminal of the controller 141 is pulled up. By connecting to the terminal, a pseudo write command signal is input to the NAND type storage unit 142 while making it impossible to input a substantial write command signal from the outside of the controller 141. Therefore, illegal modification of data in the NAND storage unit 142 can be prevented while data can be read from the NAND storage unit 142 satisfactorily.

  Next, the software configuration of the character ROM 106 will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the software configuration of the character ROM 106.

  The NAND-type storage unit 142 of the character ROM 106 has a large number of unit areas for storing unit data. Incidentally, the capacity of the unit data is 4 K bytes as described above, but is not limited to this and is arbitrary. Unit data is individually stored for each of such many unit areas. A data group for displaying an image pattern to be displayed on the symbol display device 31 over a predetermined period is configured by unit data of a predetermined combination, and 1 for a plurality of types of image patterns. Data groups are set in correspondence with each other.

  As a plurality of types of data groups, an inspection data group, an initial display data group, an abnormality notification data group, a simple symbol data group, a first background data group, a normal symbol data group, Second background data group, notice A data group, notice B data group, normal reach data group, super reach A data group, super reach B data group, and 15R probability variable big hit data group And a normal jackpot data group and an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group are set at least.

  The inspection data group is a data group for displaying an inspection image (for example, an image for displaying a predetermined color) on the symbol display device 31 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Incidentally, the inspection image is an image for checking the operation of the symbol display device 31 when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped from the factory.

  The initial display data group includes an initial display image (for example, a part or all of the game machine manufacturer name, the model and model of the pachinko machine 10 after the inspection image is displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This is a data group for displaying (image).

  The abnormality notification data group is a data group for displaying a notification image when an abnormality is detected (for example, an image including characters “abnormality occurrence!”).

  The simple symbol data group is a data group for performing a variable display with a simple symbol in a situation in which a variation display with a normal symbol is not possible in game times.

  The first background data group and the second background data group are data groups for displaying a background image in a situation in which a variable display with a normal symbol is performed. In this case, as already described, in the pachinko machine 10, the display mode is switched according to the operation of the effect operating device 58, and the first background data group corresponds to the background corresponding to the first display mode. This is a data group for displaying an image, and the second background data group is a data group for displaying a background image corresponding to the second display mode.

  The normal symbol data group is a data group for displaying a normal symbol. As shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol includes nine types of main symbols and one type of sub symbol, and a data group corresponding to each symbol is set.

  The notice A data group and the notice B data group are data groups for displaying a notice display image, which is a kind of expected effect during the game round. In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of notice displays are displayed with different display modes, specifically two kinds of notice A and notice B are set, and a data group is set corresponding to each notice display. ing.

  The normal reach data group is a data group for displaying an image of the normal reach display among the reach displays that are a kind of expected effect during the game round.

  The data group for super reach A and the data group for super reach B are data groups for displaying an image of super reach display among reach displays that are one type of expected effects during game play. Incidentally, the super reach display is a reach display for making the player expect a jackpot result to be generated compared to the normal reach display, and when the super reach display is generated, the normal reach display is passed. In this pachinko machine 10, a super reach display has different display modes and a plurality of types, specifically, a super reach A and a super reach B are set, and data corresponding to each super reach display is set. A group is set.

  Here, in Super Reach B, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operating device 58 is executed. Therefore, the super reach B data group includes an image data group to be displayed in accordance with the operation of the effect operating device 58. Furthermore, the production mode is set differently when the production operation device 58 is operated in a predetermined mode and when the operation is not performed in the predetermined mode. Therefore, the data group for displaying the effect image when the operation is performed in a predetermined mode and the effect image when the operation is not performed in the predetermined mode are included in the super reach B data group. And a group of data for display.

  The 15R probability variation jackpot data group is a data group for displaying an image of the jackpot effect performed in the symbol display device 31 during the opening / closing execution mode when the 15R probability variation jackpot result is obtained. The jackpot effect corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result includes a jackpot start effect, an effect corresponding to each round, and a jackpot end effect, and an image of each effect is displayed in the 15R probability variation jackpot data group. A data group is included.

  The normal jackpot data group is a data group for displaying an image of the jackpot effect performed on the symbol display device 31 during the opening / closing execution mode when the normal jackpot result is obtained. The jackpot effect corresponding to the normal jackpot result includes a jackpot start effect, an effect corresponding to each round, and a jackpot end effect, and the normal jackpot data group is for displaying images of these effects. Data groups are included.

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group is a data group for displaying an image of the jackpot effect performed in the symbol display device 31 during the opening / closing execution mode when the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained. The jackpot effect corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is an effect in which an image of a predetermined mode, specifically, the same type of image is displayed from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and is included in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group. Includes a data group for displaying the same type of image.

  Here, while the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group is a data group for displaying the same type of image as described above, the 15R probability variation jackpot data group and the normal jackpot data group have a plurality of types of effects. Therefore, the 15R probability variation jackpot data group and the normal jackpot data group have a larger data capacity than the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group.

  Among the above data groups, the test data group, the initial display data group, the abnormality notification data group, the simple symbol data group, the first background data group, the normal symbol data group, The two background data groups are the regular data groups that are stored in the regular area 137 of the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108.

  When the abnormality notification data group is set as the regular data group, the abnormality display can be started immediately on the symbol display device 31 when an abnormality occurs. That is, the abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, and if the abnormality notification data group is read from the character ROM 106 to the RAMs 107 and 108 after the occurrence of the abnormality is specified, the reading speed of the character ROM 106 is slow. Due to this, the start of abnormality notification is delayed accordingly.

  On the other hand, since the abnormality notification data group is set as the regular data group, even if an abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, the abnormality notification data group is read to the regular area 137 at that time. Therefore, the abnormality notification image can be displayed immediately.

  By setting each background data group and normal symbol data group as a regular data group, the symbol display device 31 can immediately start the variable display of symbols when the game times start condition is satisfied. It becomes possible. In other words, winnings to the operating ports 23 and 24 provided in the game area are generated at an arbitrary timing, and a winning is generated to the operating ports 23 and 24 in a situation where no holding information is stored. When the hold information is acquired, the game times related to the hold information are immediately started. In this case, if the background data group or the normal symbol data group is read from the character ROM 106 to the RAMs 107 and 108 after the acquisition of the hold information is specified, the character ROM 106 is read slowly. Thus, the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 31 is delayed.

  On the other hand, since each background data group and normal symbol data group is set as a regular data group, even if a winning to the operation ports 23 and 24 occurs at an arbitrary timing, Since the background data group and the normal symbol data group are read in the regular area 137, an image of the symbol variation display can be displayed immediately.

  By the way, the background data group and the normal symbol data group are sufficient to start the variable display of the symbol, and the data capacity required at the start of the variable display compared to the configuration that requires the data group for other characters. Is suppressed. Along with this, the data capacity necessary for reading and storing the common data group is reduced.

  When both the first background data group and the second background data group are set as the regular data group, the symbol display device 31 is switched when the display mode is switched based on the operation of the effect operation device 58. It becomes possible to immediately switch the background image. That is, the operation of the production operation device 58 is performed at an arbitrary timing, and after the operation of the production operation device 58 is specified, the background data corresponding to the display mode to which the character is switched from the character ROM 106 to the RAMs 107 and 108. If the group is read out, the background image switching is delayed as much as the reading speed of the character ROM 106 is low.

  On the other hand, since both the first background data group and the second background data group are set as the regular data group, even if the production operating device 58 is operated at an arbitrary timing, the time point Since both background data groups are read out to the regular area 137, the background image can be switched immediately.

  In the controller 141 of the character ROM 106, the address data of each area of the NAND storage unit 142 and the image data stored in the area are associated by table information, and the controller 141 constitutes each type of data group. Which area each image data is stored in is specified with reference to the table information.

<Processing configuration related to display control of symbol display device 31>
Next, a processing configuration relating to display control of the symbol display device 31 will be described. In the display control apparatus 100, various processes are executed by the display CPU 102, and various processes are executed by the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 based on instructions from the display CPU 102, whereby the symbol display apparatus 31 is controlled in display. The

  The processing executed by the display CPU 102 includes a main processing executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and a normal processing executed after the main processing. In each processing, a write control unit of the bridge LSI 109 is included. A predetermined instruction is executed to 121 and VDP 105. Hereinafter, the main process of the display CPU 102 and the process of the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105 executed based on the instruction in the main process will be described, and then the normal process of the display CPU 102 and the instruction in the normal process will be executed. Processing of the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105 will be described.

<Main processing of display CPU 102>
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing main processing in the display CPU 102. As shown in FIG. 18, in step S801, an instruction process for initial setting of the common data group is executed. In the instruction processing, an initial setting command for the bridge LSI 109 read from the command storage area (instruction information storage means) 103a of the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 and at the same time for the VDP 105 read from the command storage area 103a. The initial setting command is transmitted to the VDP 105. By receiving the initial setting command, the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 execute processing for transferring the common data group from the character ROM 106 to the regular area 137 of the VDP RAM 108.

  Here, the processing content executed by the write control unit 121 when the initial setting command is received will be described, and the processing content executed by the VDP 105 will be described. First, processing contents executed by the bridge LSI 109 at the time of initial setting will be described.

<Processes executed by the bridge LSI 109 at the time of initial setting>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the common data group in the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. In the write control unit 121, the bridge-side main process including a plurality of types of processes is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec). Setting processing is set.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in step S901, it is determined whether an initial setting command is received from the display CPU. If an initial setting command has not been received, it is determined in step S902 whether the normal data group is in an initial setting state. If it is not the initial setting state of the common data group (step S902: NO), the initial setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the initial setting command has been received (step S901: YES), in step S903, the initial setting state of the regular data group is set and the transfer state of the inspection data group is set. Here, when setting various states, a setting flag corresponding to the state to be set is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121, and when releasing various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be canceled is erased. Done. The same applies to other states in the write control unit 121.

  By setting the transfer state of the test data group, the write control unit 121 transfers the test data group from the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107. Here, the data transfer processing in the write control unit 121 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The data transfer process is set as a part of the bridge side main process.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the data transfer process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether data is being read from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 or not. If data is not being read, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the transfer state of any data group is set. If it is not set in any transfer state, the data transfer process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the transfer states is set, a data group read start process corresponding to the currently set transfer state is executed in step S1003. In the start process, the currently set transfer state is specified, the transfer table corresponding to the specified transfer state is read from the control ROM 124 of the write control unit 121 to the control RAM 125, and the character ROM 106 is read according to the transfer table. Data reading is started, and processing for storing the read data in the cache buffer 123 for each unit data is executed.

  In the transfer table, the address information for specifying in which area each unit data of the data group to be read is stored in the NAND type storage unit 142 of the character ROM 106 and the reading order of each unit data are shown. The order information for specifying is set in a one-to-one correspondence.

  When the process of step S1003 is executed, or when data is being read from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 (step S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether reading of unit data to the cache buffer 123 is completed. If it is not completed, the data transfer process is terminated as it is. If completed, it is determined in step S1005 whether or not it is a non-access timing to the bridge RAM 107 in the VDP 105.

  Whether or not it is a non-access timing is determined by determining whether or not the write control unit 121 has received a non-access signal from the VDP 105. If a non-access signal has been received, no access is made. It is determined that it is the timing, and it is determined that it is the access timing when the non-access signal is not received. However, in the situation where the normal data group is in the initial setting state and the inspection data group is in the transfer state, an affirmative determination is made in step S1005 even if the non-access signal is not received. The timing at which the non-access signal is transmitted from the VDP 105 will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1005, the data transfer process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, a write process for writing the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 to the bridge RAM 107 is executed. As a result, the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 is written into the bridge-side RAM 107. In this case, in the transfer table, information for specifying in which address area in the bridge-side RAM 107 each address data is written by the write control unit 121 is set. When writing the unit data to the bridge-side RAM 107, the write control unit 121 writes the unit data in a predetermined area of the bridge-side RAM 107.

  In a succeeding step S1007, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the data group corresponding to the transfer state is completed. If transfer of the data group corresponding to the transfer state has not been completed, reading of the next unit data is started in accordance with the transfer table read to the control RAM 125 in step S1008. Thereafter, the data transfer process is terminated. In this case, in the subsequent data transfer processing, the next unit data is read to the cache buffer 123 and the read unit data is written to the bridge-side RAM 107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1007 that the transfer of the data group corresponding to the transfer state is completed, the transfer completion process is executed in step S1009, and then the data transfer process is terminated. In the transfer completion process, a transfer completion flag corresponding to the currently set transfer state is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121. For example, when the inspection data group is in the transfer state, the inspection transfer completion flag is stored in the control RAM 125.

  Returning to the description of the initial setting process of the common data group (FIG. 19), after executing the process of step S903, the process proceeds to step S904. If it is determined in step S902 that the common data group is in the initial setting state, the process also proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, it is determined whether the inspection data group has been transferred. This determination is performed by determining whether or not a completion flag corresponding to the transfer state of the test data group is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121. This is the same when determining whether or not another data group has been transferred.

  If it is determined that the inspection data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the inspection data group is canceled in step S905. In this transfer state release, both the transfer state setting flag and the completion flag corresponding to the current release target in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121 are erased. In step S905, the transfer state of the initial display data group is set. Thus, in the next data transfer process, the initial display data group is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107 via the cache buffer 123.

  If the inspection data group has not been transferred (step S904: NO) or after the processing of step S905 has been executed, it is determined in step S906 whether the initial display data group has been transferred.

  If it is determined that the initial display data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the initial display data group is canceled and the transfer state of the abnormality notification data group is set in step S907. Thus, in the next data transfer process, the abnormality notification data group is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107 via the cache buffer 123.

  If the initial display data group has not been transferred (step S906: NO) or after the processing of step S907 has been executed, it is determined in step S908 whether the abnormality notification data group has been transferred.

  If it is determined that the abnormality notification data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the abnormality notification data group is canceled and the transfer state of the simple symbol data group is set in step S909. As a result, in the next data transfer process, the simple symbol data group is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107 via the cache buffer 123.

  When the abnormality notification data group has not been transferred (step S908: NO) or after the processing of step S909 has been executed, it is determined in step S910 whether the simple symbol data group has been transferred.

  If it is determined that the simple symbol data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the simple symbol data group is canceled and the transfer state of the first background data group is set in step S911. Thereby, in the next data transfer process, the transfer of the first background data group from the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107 is performed via the cache buffer 123.

  When the simple symbol data group has not been transferred (step S910: NO) or after the processing of step S911 is performed, it is determined in step S912 whether the first background data group has been transferred.

  If it is determined that the first background data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the first background data group is canceled and the transfer state of the normal symbol data group is set in step S913. Thereby, in the next data transfer process, the normal symbol data group is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107 via the cache buffer 123.

  If the first background data group has not been transferred (step S912: NO) or after the processing of step S913 has been executed, it is determined in step S914 whether or not the normal symbol data group has been transferred.

  If it is determined that the normal symbol data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the normal symbol data group is canceled and the transfer state of the second background data group is set in step S915. Thereby, in the next data transfer process, the transfer of the second background data group from the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107 is performed via the cache buffer 123.

  When the normal symbol data group has not been transferred (step S914: NO) or after the process of step S915 is executed, it is determined in step S916 whether the second background data group has been transferred.

  If the second background data group has not been transferred, the initial setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second background data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the second background data group is canceled in step S917. In step S917, the initial setting state of the common data group is canceled. Thereafter, the initial setting process is terminated.

<Processes executed by the VDP 105 at the time of initial setting>
Next, processing executed by the VDP 105 at the time of initial setting will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing initial transfer processing in the VDP 105. In the VDP 105, the VDP side main process including a plurality of types of processes is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec), and an initial transfer process is set as a part of the VDP side main process. .

  As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, it is determined whether an initial setting command is received from the display CPU 102 or not. If the initial setting command has not been received, it is determined in step S1102 whether the common data group is in the initial setting state. If the normal data group is not in the initial setting state (step S1102: NO), the initial transfer process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the initial setting command has been received (step S1101: YES), the initial setting state of the regular data group is set in step S1103. Here, when setting various states, a setting flag corresponding to the state to be set is stored in the control RAM 132 of the VDP 105, and when releasing various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be canceled is erased. . The same applies to the setting and cancellation of other states.

  In step S1103, the initial transfer table corresponding to the initial setting is read from the control ROM 131 of the VDP 105 to the control RAM 132. In the initial transfer table, address information of an area to be referred to when data is read from the bridge-side RAM 107 and reference order information when the address information is sequentially referred to are set.

  After executing the process of step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1104. If it is determined in step S1102 that the common data group is in the initial setting state, the process also proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, it is determined whether data to be read is stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 or not. Here, the data to be read is unit data constituting any image data group. In step S1104, the area of the bridge-side RAM 107 corresponding to the address information to be read this time in the initial transfer table. Whether or not unit data is stored is determined.

  Note that the processing configuration for specifying the data to be read in the VDP 105 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. For example, every time the writing control unit 121 completes writing of unit data to the bridge-side RAM 107. Alternatively, a write completion signal may be transmitted from the write control unit 121 to the VDP 105, and the VDP 105 may receive the write completion signal and make an affirmative determination in step S1104.

  Further, the read target data is not limited to the unit data, and a group of image data groups may be set as the read target data. In this case, the VDP 105 waits without transferring data to the VDP RAM 108 until a group of image data is newly written to the bridge RAM 107. In this regard, a configuration in which data transfer from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108 is performed for each unit data is preferable in terms of early transfer of the regular data group to the VDP-side RAM 108.

  If the data to be read is not stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 (step S1104: NO), the initial transfer process is terminated as it is. If data to be read is stored in the bridge RAM 107 (step S1104: YES), the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, a write process for writing the unit data to be read in the bridge side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108 is executed. In this case, in the initial transfer table, information for specifying in the VDP 105 which unit address of each address in the regular area 137 is to be written is set. In the VDP 105, when unit data is written to the regular area 137, the unit data is written to the unit area of the regular area 137 that is predetermined for the unit data.

  In a succeeding step S1106, it is determined whether or not writing of a group of image data groups is completed. This determination is made by referring to the initial transfer table to determine whether it is the timing when writing has been completed for the last unit data among a number of unit data set as a group of image data. By doing.

  If the writing has not been completed, the initial transfer process is terminated. If the writing has been completed, in step S1107, a writing completion signal is transmitted to the display CPU 102 for causing the display CPU 102 to recognize that the writing of the predetermined image data group to the common area 137 has been completed. . The write completion signal is set to correspond to each image data group on a one-to-one basis. In step S1107, the corresponding write completion signal is transmitted to the display CPU.

  In a succeeding step S1108, a write completion process is executed. In the write completion process, a process for enabling the VDP 105 to specify the image data group stored in the regular area 137 is executed. Specifically, a data group flag storage area is set in the control RAM 132 of the VDP 105 in a one-to-one correspondence with the image data group that may be written to the regular area 137. In the write completion process, the data group flag is stored in the data group flag storage area corresponding to the image data group for the image data group determined to have been written to the regular area 137 in step S1106. The flag stored in each data group flag storage area is deleted when the corresponding image data group is deleted from the regular area 137.

  In a succeeding step S1109, it is determined whether or not the initial setting is completed. This determination is made with reference to the initial transfer table to determine whether or not the writing of the last image data group among the plurality of image data groups set as the regular data group has been completed. By doing. If the initial setting has not been completed, the initial transfer process is terminated. If the initial setting has been completed, the initial transfer process is terminated after canceling the initial setting state of the regular data group in step S1110. finish.

  The initial transfer process may be performed when the power is turned on, and after the initial transfer process is once completed after the power is turned on, the initial transfer process may not be performed until the next power is turned on. In this case, the initial transfer process does not include the processes of step S1102 and step S1103. After an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the processes of step S1104 to step S1110 are repeated until the initial setting of the common data group is completed. It should be executed.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 18) in the display CPU 102, after the instruction process for initial setting of the regular data group is executed in step S801, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the inspection data group to the regular area 137 has been completed. This determination is performed by determining whether a write completion signal corresponding to the inspection data group is received from the VDP 105.

  If the transfer of the inspection data group to the regular area 137 has not been completed, the process of step S802 is repeated, and if the transfer of the inspection data group to the regular area 137 has been completed, the step The process proceeds to S803. In step S803, an inspection image drawing instruction process is executed. Specifically, the drawing list information corresponding to the inspection image is displayed in the drawing list information storage area (drawing list information storage means) 103b of the program ROM 103 so that the inspection image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. And the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105.

  Here, the drawing list information is information in which a drawing instruction for one frame on the display screen G is set, and a color palette for determining the data information of the bitmap image and the display color of each dot of the bitmap image. Contains table information.

  In a succeeding step S804, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of displaying the inspection image. The measurement of the end timing is performed using the end timing counters of the various counter areas 104c provided in the work RAM 104. When the inspection image drawing instruction process is first executed in the end timing counter, the end timing is measured. Information on the end reference value is set. Each time a negative determination is made in step S804, the value of the end timing counter is updated so as to be decremented by 1. If the value of the end timing counter becomes “0”, the result is affirmative in step S804. Make a decision. The configuration related to the measurement of the end timing is the same in step S807 described later.

  If it is determined in step S804 that it is not the end timing, the inspection image drawing instruction process is executed again in step S803. In the inspection image drawing instruction process in this case, it is determined whether or not a new inspection image drawing instruction timing is reached. If the drawing instruction timing is reached, the drawing list information corresponding to the inspection image is transmitted to the VDP 105 again. To do. That is, the drawing list information corresponding to the inspection image is transmitted to the VDP 105 every time the drawing instruction timing is reached until the end timing. If it is determined in step S804 that the end timing is reached, the process proceeds to step S805.

  In step S805, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the initial display data group to the regular area 137 has been completed. This determination is performed by determining whether or not a write completion signal corresponding to the initial display data group is received from the VDP 105.

  If the transfer of the initial display data group to the regular area 137 has not been completed, the process of step S805 is repeated, and if the transfer of the initial display data group to the regular area 137 has been completed. The process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, an initial display image drawing instruction process is executed. Specifically, the drawing list information corresponding to the initial display image is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b so that the initial display image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, and the read drawing list is displayed. Information is transmitted to the VDP 105.

  In a succeeding step S807, it is determined whether or not the display end timing of the initial display image is reached. If it is determined that it is not the end timing, the initial display image drawing instruction process is executed again in step S806. In this case, the initial display image drawing instruction process determines whether or not it is a new initial display image drawing instruction timing. If it is the drawing instruction timing, the drawing list information corresponding to the initial display image is again displayed. It transmits to VDP105. That is, the drawing list information corresponding to the initial display image is transmitted to the VDP 105 every time the drawing instruction timing is reached until the end timing. If it is determined in step S807 that the end timing is reached, the main process shifts to the normal process.

<Processing executed by VDP 105 for drawing instruction>
Next, processing executed by the VDP 105 in response to a drawing instruction will be described. As processing executed by the VDP 105 in response to the drawing instruction, drawing data setting processing and drawing signal output processing are set. Both the drawing data setting process and the drawing signal output process are set as part of the VDP-side main process. Hereinafter, drawing data setting processing will be described first, and then drawing signal output processing will be described.

<Drawing data setting process>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing drawing data setting processing in the VDP 105. In step S1201, it is determined whether drawing list information is received from the display CPU. If it has not been received, the present setting process is terminated, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S1202.

  In step S 1202, it is determined whether data corresponding to the drawing list information is stored in the regular area 137. This determination is performed by determining whether the data group flag relating to the data corresponding to the drawing list information is stored in the control RAM 132 of the VDP 105.

  If data corresponding to the drawing list information is stored in the regular area 137, output of a non-access signal to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 is started in step S1203. In other words, in a situation where drawing data is created by accessing the regular area 137, the VDP 105 does not access the bridge-side RAM 107, and information to that effect is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the write control unit 121 as a non-access signal. Is done. Thereby, the write control unit 121 recognizes that it can access the bridge-side RAM 107.

  In the subsequent step S1204, necessary data is read from the regular area 137, and the read data is written in the drawing area 135 of the VDP 105 in step S1205. Thereafter, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not creation of drawing data corresponding to the current drawing list information has been completed. If the creation has not been completed, the processes in steps S1204 and S1205 are repeatedly executed. If creation is complete, the process advances to step S1207.

  In step S1207, by stopping the output of the non-access signal, the write control unit 121 recognizes that the VDP 105 may access the bridge-side RAM 107. As a result, the write control unit 121 recognizes that it cannot access the bridge-side RAM 107. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Here, during the period from the execution of step S1203 to the execution of step S1207, the write controller 121 of the bridge LSI 109 transfers the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 to the bridge RAM 107. It is set longer than the period required to do so. Therefore, the write control unit 121 can transfer unit data for one unit from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge-side RAM 107 while the VDP 105 creates drawing data with reference to the regular area 137.

  Incidentally, when creating drawing data for drawing list information received based on the drawing instruction process of the inspection image in step S803 and the drawing instruction process of the initial display image in step S806, the processes in steps S1203 to S1206 are executed. The

  On the other hand, if data corresponding to the drawing list information is not stored in the regular area 137 (step S1202: NO), necessary data is read from the change area, that is, the bridge-side RAM 107 in step S1208. The read data is written in the drawing area 135 of the VDP 105 in step S1209. Thereafter, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not creation of drawing data corresponding to the current drawing list information has been completed. If the creation has not been completed, the processes in steps S1208 and S1209 are repeatedly executed. If the creation has been completed, this setting process ends.

  The creation of the drawing data by the processes in steps S1208 to S1210 is executed when drawing list information is output based on a drawing instruction process such as a notice display or a reach display to be described later.

<Drawing signal output processing>
Next, drawing signal output processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether it is the output timing of drawing data. The drawing data output timing information is included in the drawing list information corresponding to the drawing data. If the drawing data output timing is not reached, the output processing is terminated as it is. If it is the drawing data output timing, the process advances to step S1302.

  In step S1302, output of a non-access signal to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 is started. In other words, in a situation where a drawing signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data stored in the drawing area 135, the VDP 105 does not access the bridge-side RAM 107, so that information to that effect is displayed. The non-access signal is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the write control unit 121. Thereby, the write control unit 121 recognizes that it can access the bridge-side RAM 107.

  In subsequent step S1303, the drawing area 135 is referred to, and in step S1304, a drawing signal corresponding to the referenced data is output to the symbol display device 31 through the output port 136. After that, in step S1305, it is determined whether or not the image drawing process corresponding to the current drawing data has been completed. If the drawing process has not been completed, the processes in steps S1303 and S1304 are repeatedly executed. If the drawing process has been completed, the process advances to step S1306.

  In step S1306, the output of the non-access signal is stopped, so that the write control unit 121 recognizes that the VDP 105 may access the bridge-side RAM 107. As a result, the write control unit 121 recognizes that it cannot access the bridge-side RAM 107. Thereafter, this output process is terminated.

  Here, during the period from the execution of the process of step S1302 to the execution of the process of step S1306, the write controller 121 of the bridge LSI 109 transfers the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 to the bridge RAM 107. It is set longer than the period required to do so. Therefore, the writing control unit 121 transfers unit data for one unit from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge-side RAM 107 while the VDP 105 performs drawing processing on the symbol display device 31 with reference to the drawing data. be able to.

<Access timing of the write controller 121 and the VDP 105 to the bridge RAM 107>
Next, the access timing of the write controller 121 and the VDP 105 to the bridge-side RAM 107 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  24A shows an access period to the regular area 137 by the VDP 105, FIG. 24B shows an access period to the bridge RAM 107 by the VDP 105, and FIG. 24C shows an access period to the symbol display device 31 by the VDP 105. FIG. 24D shows a period during which the write controller 121 can access the bridge-side RAM 107. FIG. 24E shows a period during which the write controller 121 writes to the cache buffer 123. Reference numeral 24 (f) denotes a write period for the bridge-side RAM 107 by the write control unit 121.

  First, a case where the VDP 105 performs a drawing process on the symbol display device 31 will be described.

  The VDP 105 accesses the bridge-side RAM 107 at the timing t1, for example, transfers image data from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108, and creates drawing data using the image data stored in the bridge-side RAM 107. In this case, the write control unit 121 is in a period during which access to the bridge-side RAM 107 is not possible, and unit data is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 in this situation.

  Thereafter, the transfer of the current unit data to the cache buffer 123 is completed in the write control unit 121 at the timing t2, and the access to the bridge RAM 107 by the VDP 105 is completed at the timing t3.

  Thereafter, drawing processing on the symbol display device 31 is started in the VDP 105 at timing t4. In this case, since the VDP 105 executes the drawing process with reference to the drawing data stored in the drawing area 135 of the VDP 105, the VDP 105 does not reliably access the bridge RAM 107. Accordingly, at the timing t4, the write control unit 121 can access the bridge RAM 107, and the write control unit 121 transfers the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 to the bridge RAM 107. .

  Thereafter, the transfer of the unit data to the bridge-side RAM 107 by the write control unit 121 is completed at the timing t5, and the drawing process on the symbol display device 31 by the VDP 105 is completed at the subsequent timing t6. Then, at the timing of t6, the period during which the write control unit 121 cannot access the bridge RAM 107 is started again.

  Next, a case where the VDP 105 accesses the service area 137 will be described.

  During the period when the access to the bridge-side RAM 107 by the write control unit 121 is disabled, the write control unit 121 transfers unit data from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 at the timing t7. Then, the transfer of the unit data is completed at the timing t8.

  Thereafter, at timing t9, the VDP 105 accesses the regular area 137 and creates drawing data using the image data stored in the regular area 137. In this case, since the normal area 137 is provided only in the VDP RAM 108, the period during which the VDP 105 accesses the normal area 137 is a period during which the access to the bridge RAM 107 does not occur reliably in the VDP 105. Accordingly, at the timing t9, the write control unit 121 can access the bridge RAM 107, and the write control unit 121 transfers the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 to the bridge RAM 107. .

  Thereafter, the transfer of unit data to the bridge-side RAM 107 by the write control unit 121 is completed at the timing of t10, and the access to the regular area 137 by the VDP 105 is completed at the subsequent timing of t11. At a timing t11, a period in which the write control unit 121 cannot access the bridge RAM 107 is started again.

  In a configuration in which both the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105 are connected to the bridge-side RAM 107 via the input / output driver circuit 122, a cache buffer 123 is provided in the write control unit 121, while the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge-side RAM 107. The unit data is transferred to the cache buffer 123, and the unit data is transferred from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge RAM 107 in a situation where the VDP 105 does not access the bridge RAM 107. As a result, the read timing of the image data from the bridge RAM 107 by the VDP 105 and the write timing of the image data to the bridge RAM 107 by the write controller 121 are adjusted, and both operations can be performed satisfactorily.

  In particular, a predetermined period is required to create drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list using image data stored in the regular area 137 directly connected to the VDP 105. In addition, a predetermined period is required to draw an image for one frame on the symbol display device 31 using the drawing data. In addition, since the reading speed from the cache buffer 123 configured as a RAM is faster than the reading speed from the character ROM 106 configured with the NAND flash memory, the character ROM 106 transfers data to the cache buffer 123. The time until the transfer of the unit data from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge RAM 107 is shorter than the time until the transfer of the unit data is completed, and this time is shorter than the predetermined period.

  In such a situation, the unit data is transferred from the character ROM 106 having a relatively slow reading speed to the cache buffer 123 while the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge-side RAM 107, and the cache buffer having a relatively fast reading speed. The unit data is transferred from 123 to the bridge-side RAM 107 during a predetermined period during which the drawing data is created in the VDP 105 or during a predetermined period during which drawing is performed on the symbol display device 31. Both of the above operations can be performed satisfactorily without setting a dedicated processing waiting time for adjusting the timing.

  Further, the unit of image data transferred to the cache buffer 123 is not the whole of one data group, but unit data constituting one data group. Therefore, the cache buffer 123 can store the unit data. It only needs to have a storage capacity. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the cache buffer 123, and to adjust both timings while reducing the cost of the cache buffer 123.

  Further, by reducing the unit of data to be handled, the time required for one data transfer from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 and the time required for one data transfer from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge RAM 107 are reduced. The time can be shortened. Therefore, it becomes easy to adjust both timings.

  The unit data is the minimum unit data that is individually divided and stored in the character ROM 106. As a result, the time required for one data transfer from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge-side RAM 107 is shortened. Therefore, the cache buffer 123 and the bridge-side RAM 107 are aimed at a small gap where the VDP 105 does not access the bridge-side RAM 107. Data transfer to can be performed.

  Further, when data transfer from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 is performed, the write control unit 121 only needs to read the unit data stored in the character ROM 106 as it is, so that the configuration for performing the data transfer is simple. Can be achieved.

<Normal processing of display CPU 102>
Next, normal processing of the display CPU 102 and processing in the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105 executed based on an instruction in the normal processing will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The normal process is executed after the main process is completed, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) after the main process is completed.

  In step S1401, a game times control process for displaying the effects for each game time on the symbol display device 31 is executed. In subsequent step S1402, a jackpot control process for displaying the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 31 is executed.

  In continuing step S1403, the abnormality notification control process for displaying abnormality notification on the symbol display device 31 is executed. In the subsequent step S1404, standby image control processing for switching the display mode based on the setting of the standby image and the operation on the effect operating device 58 is executed. Then, this normal process is complete | finished. Hereinafter, each process of step S1401 to step S1404 will be sequentially described.

<Game Time Control Process of Display CPU 102>
First, the game times control process of step S1401 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when performing an effect for game times on the symbol display device 31, a normal effect for displaying a variation of a symbol using a normal symbol and a variation of a symbol using a simple symbol are displayed. The simple performance to be performed is set. Of these effects for both game times, the normal effect is basically executed, but when the normal effect cannot be performed, the data group for normal symbols after the power is turned on, specifically, Is not read from the character ROM 106 to the regular area 137, a simple effect is executed. Accordingly, in the game times control process, a process for performing a normal effect as an effect for game times and a process for performing a simple effect as an effect for game times are set. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, first, the processing content in the case of performing a simple effect will be described, and then the processing content in the case of performing a normal effect will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1501, it is determined whether a change command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the sound lamp control device 90 is received. Here, the command received from the sound lamp control device 90 is stored in a command storage area 104 a provided in the work RAM 104. The command storage area 104a is a ring buffer that has a plurality of areas for storing commands, writes commands to the area set by the write pointer, and reads commands from the area set by the read pointer.

  If the change command has been received, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the transfer of the normal symbol data group to the normal area 137 has been completed. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the write completion signal corresponding to the normal symbol data group is received from the VDP 105. Here, as already described, the normal symbol data group is to be transferred to the regular area 137 after the first background data group. Therefore, the timing at which the transfer of the normal symbol data group is completed is the timing at which the transfer of the first background data group is also completed. 1 It means that the symbol can be changed and displayed using the normal symbol when the background image is displayed.

  This time, when the simple effect is performed, that is, since the transfer of the normal symbol data group is not completed, a negative determination is made in step S1502, and the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the simple symbol data group to the regular area 137 has been completed. This determination is performed by determining whether or not a write completion signal corresponding to the simple symbol data group is received from the VDP 105.

  If the transfer of the simple symbol data group has not been completed, the game turn control process is terminated. That is, even when the variation command is received, when the reading of the simple symbol data group from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM (specifically, the regular area 137) is not completed. The game display effect is not executed on the symbol display device 31. In this case, the symbol display device 31 maintains the display state of the already displayed image, specifically, the display state of the inspection image or the initial display image.

  However, even in such a situation, the variation display of the picture is performed on the main display unit 33 that is directly controlled by the main controller 60. Therefore, for the player, by visually observing the main display portion 33, it is confirmed that the winning to the operation ports 23, 24 is not invalidated, the game is being executed, and the result of the internal lottery. can do.

  On the other hand, when the transfer of the simple symbol data group has been completed, the game start control processing is terminated after executing the variation start processing by the simple symbol in step S1504. Here, the variation start processing by the simple symbol will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1601, the information of the fluctuation display time is grasped from the fluctuation command received this time. Further, as described above, main controller 60 also transmits a type command when transmitting a variation command. Therefore, in step S1601, the type command received together with the current variation command is read from the command storage area 104a, and information on whether or not a big hit is won and information on the big hit type is generated from the command if a big hit result is generated. To grasp. In step S1601, the grasped information is stored in the register of the display CPU.

  In the subsequent step S1602, a simplified display pattern setting process is executed. More specifically, the program ROM 103 is provided with a simple pattern storage area 103c as simple pattern information storage means for storing various table information for controlling variation display using simple symbols.

  The table information stored in the simple pattern storage area 103c is mainly composed of information on game results such as 15R probability variation jackpot results, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot results, normal jackpot results and outlier results, and variable display time information as parameters. The control device 60 is set so as to correspond one-to-one with respect to the combinations of the parameters that can be determined. In step S1602, the table information corresponding to the information grasped in step S1601 is read from the program ROM 103, and the read table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b provided in the work RAM 104.

  In subsequent step S1603, the information on the variable display time grasped in step S1601 is set in a measurement counter as a display measuring means provided in various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104. The information set in the measurement counter is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the normal processing by the display CPU 102 is newly started.

  In the subsequent step S1604, after the variation start process is executed so that the effect for playing the game with the simple symbols is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, the variation start process is terminated.

  In the change start process, the drawing list information at the start of change is specified by referring to the table information stored in the display table storage area 104b, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays the image at the start of fluctuation on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. .

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 26), when the change command is not received (step S1501: NO), it is determined in step S1506 whether or not the change display by the simple symbol is being performed. . This determination is made by determining whether or not the simple changing flag is stored in the simple changing flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 104 d of the work RAM 104. The simple variation flag is stored at the start of variation based on a simple symbol, and is erased at the end of the game.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol variation display is being performed. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the normal variation flag is stored in the normal variation flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 104 d of the work RAM 104. The normal variation flag is stored at the start of variation by the normal symbol, and is erased at the end of the game.

  If neither the variation display by the simple symbol nor the variation display by the normal symbol is in progress, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. Since this time is a case where a simple effect is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1506, and after the changing process by the simple symbol is executed in step S1508, the game turn control process is terminated.

  Here, the changing process using the simple symbols will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined with reference to the information of the measurement counter of the work RAM 104 whether or not it is a fluctuation stop timing. If it is not the fluctuation stop timing, it is determined in step S1702 whether it is the drawing list setting timing.

  If it is the setting timing of the drawing list, in step S1703, the current drawing list information is identified by comparing the table information stored in the variable display table storage area 104b with the information of the counter for measurement. The specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, so that the variable display using the simple symbols proceeds. The image on the display screen G is updated.

  When it is not the drawing list setting timing (step S1702: NO) or after the processing of step S1703 is executed, the data transfer instruction processing is executed in step S1704. In the data transfer instruction process, when a jackpot result is finally generated in the current game round, the jackpot presentation image data is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107 or the VDP-side RAM 108 during the game round. It is a process to keep. Such a process will be described together with the description of the changing process using normal symbols. After executing the processing in step S1704, the in-fluctuation processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is the variable stop timing (step S1701: YES), information on the game result in the current game round is specified from the information stored in the register of the display CPU 102 in step S1705. In subsequent step S1706, the drawing list information corresponding to the game result information specified in step S1705 is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b, and the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and the game result image based on the simple symbols is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. Display. After executing the processing of step S1706, the in-fluctuation processing is terminated.

<Variation display using simple symbols>
Here, the state of variable display using simple symbols will be described. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of variable display using simple symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the simple symbols include a symbol “◎” as the first simple symbol, a symbol “◯” as the second simple symbol, and a symbol “Δ” as the third simple symbol. , “X” symbol is set as the fourth simple symbol. Of these, the first simple symbol corresponds to the symbol showing the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the second simple symbol corresponds to the symbol showing the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the third simple symbol is usually It corresponds to the jackpot result, and the fourth simplified symbol corresponds to the missed result.

  The data capacity of the image data used when displaying the images of the first to fourth simple symbols is any of the data capacities of the image data used when displaying the images of the normal symbols for any of the simple symbols. Is set too small. Also, the number of simple symbols is less than that of normal symbols. Therefore, the data capacity of the simple symbol data group including the image data used when displaying the images of the first to fourth simple symbols is equal to the normal symbol including the image data used when displaying the normal symbol image. It is smaller than the data capacity of the data group. Furthermore, since the background image is displayed when the variable display with the normal symbol is performed, the first background data group or the second background data group is used. That is, the data capacity of the image data necessary for performing the variable display with the normal symbol is set larger than the data capacity of the image data necessary for performing the variable display with the simple symbol.

  When the variable display by the simple symbol is performed, the variable display is started from the state where the predetermined simple symbol is displayed on the display screen G among the first to fourth simple symbols. Thereafter, the first to fourth simplified symbols are switched and displayed in a predetermined order at each symbol switching timing. Then, at the timing when the variable display time set in the game time elapses, the variable display is ended in a state where the simple symbol corresponding to the game result of the game time is displayed on the display screen G.

  Note that the variation display mode of the symbols based on the simple symbols is not limited to the above. For example, the jackpot symbols are set in common for all types of jackpot results, and the symbols are not separated. A design for the result may be set, and during the variable display, they may be alternately displayed, and finally any of the symbols may be stopped and displayed. In this case, when a jackpot result is obtained, the player cannot recognize which type of jackpot result, but can recognize whether it is a jackpot result or a missed result. According to this configuration, the data capacity of the simple symbol data group can be reduced. Further, the display mode of the symbol is not limited to the display such as “◯” or “×”, and is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize to some extent what the stop result corresponds to. By the way, a change display of symbols by simple symbols may be used as a kind of effect.

<Display control after power on>
Next, the state of display control after power-on by executing the processing described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a timing chart for explaining the state of display control after power-on.

  When the power is turned on at the timing t1, transfer of each data group from the character ROM 106 to the regular area 137 is started. In this case, the plurality of types of data groups included in the regular data group are subjected to the predetermined priority order by executing the regular data group initial setting process (FIG. 19) already described in the write control unit 121. Sequentially transferred.

  That is, the inspection data group is transferred from the timing t1 to the timing t2, the initial display data group is transferred from the timing t2 to the timing t3, and the timing t3 thereafter. From time t4 to time t4, the abnormality notification data group is transferred, from time t4 to time t6, the simple symbol data group is transferred, and from time t6 to time t7. The first background data group is transferred over a period of time, and then the normal symbol data group is transferred from the timing of t7 to the timing of t9, and then from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10. The second background data group is transferred.

  If the transfer of the inspection data group is executed with the highest priority, whether the inspection image is normally displayed without waiting for the display of another image in the operation check after the manufacture of the pachinko machine 10 in the manufacturer. A check can be made. Further, the data capacity of the inspection data group is set to be smaller than at least the data capacity of the data group necessary for displaying the standby image. As a result, even if the transfer of the inspection data group is performed with priority, the completion of the transfer of the data group necessary for displaying the standby image is not extremely delayed.

  Incidentally, the standby image is a mode of an image that displays either the first background image or the second background image and displays the normal symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In order to display the standby image, it is necessary that the normal symbol data group and the data group corresponding to the background image to be displayed are transferred to the regular area 137.

  By transferring the initial display data group with priority, the initial display image is displayed after the inspection image is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the display of the inspection image from being continued until the display of the standby image is started. The data capacity of the initial display data group is set to be smaller than at least the data capacity of the data group necessary for displaying the standby image. Thereby, the period until the display of the inspection image is completed can be shortened as compared with the configuration in which the display of the inspection image is continued until the standby image is displayed.

  Even if an abnormality occurs at a relatively early timing after the power is turned on by transferring the abnormality notification data group with the next priority, the symbol display device 31 responds to the abnormality. Notification can be performed. The data capacity of the abnormality notification data group is set to be at least smaller than the data capacity of the data group necessary for displaying the standby image. Thereby, even if the transfer of the abnormality notification data group is performed with priority, the completion of the transfer of the data group necessary for displaying the standby image is not extremely delayed.

  A state in which a game design effect can be started with normal symbols by transferring the simple symbol data group, which has a smaller data capacity than the data group required for the normal symbol variation display, to the next priority. As compared with the configuration in which the effect for playing the game on the symbol display device 31 is not executed until the timing becomes, the timing at which the effect for playing the game on the symbol display device 31 can be started can be advanced. This prevents the player from being confused when the power is turned on.

  In other words, if a picture corresponding to the winning of the operating ports 23 and 24 is not displayed on the symbol display device 31, but the player has received a winning of the operating ports 23 and 24, the player can It is feared that will be confused by recognizing that it has been disabled. On the other hand, after the power is turned on, priority is given to the transfer of the simple symbol data group with a small data capacity, and the transition to the state where the variation display by the simple symbol can be performed at an early stage can suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above. be able to.

  Since the transfer of the first background data group and the normal symbol data group is executed in preference to the transfer of the second background data group, the normal symbol data group is transferred after the both background data groups are transferred. Compared to the transferred configuration, the period until the standby image can be displayed can be shortened, and the period until the transition to the state in which the effect for playing the game with the normal symbol can be started can be shortened. In order to achieve the effect, the normal symbol data group may be transferred before the first background data group.

  Next, the display execution timing of each image with respect to the transfer timing of the data group will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30, at the timing t2 when the transfer of the inspection data group is completed, display of the inspection image is started on the symbol display device 31. Thereafter, the display of the inspection image is continued until the timing t5. In this case, the transfer of the data group to the regular area 137 is performed in parallel with the state where the inspection image is displayed, and the initial display data group is transferred at the timing t3 which is the timing before the timing t5. The transfer is completed and the transfer of the abnormality notification data group is completed at the timing t4.

  When the display of the inspection image is terminated at the timing t5, the display of the initial display image is started instead. Even in the situation where the initial display image is displayed, the data group is transferred to the regular area 137 in parallel, and the transfer of the simple symbol data group is completed at the timing t6. In addition, the transfer of the first background data group is completed at the timing t7 when the initial display image is displayed.

  Thereafter, a winning for the operation ports 23 and 24 occurs at a timing t8 when the transfer of the normal symbol data group is not completed, and the main controller 60 executes a variation start process for the hold information acquired thereby. The In this case, because the transfer of the data group necessary for performing the variable display with the normal symbol has not been completed yet, the transfer of the data group necessary for performing the variable display with the simple symbol has been completed. Then, the variable display with simple symbols is started.

  Thereafter, even in a situation where the variation display by the simple symbols is performed, the transfer of the data group to the regular area 137 is performed in parallel, and the transfer of the regular symbol data group is completed at the timing t9. However, at this timing, the effect for playing the game is not switched from the simple symbol to the normal symbol, and the variation display by the simple symbol is continued.

  Thereafter, the transfer of the second background data group is completed at the timing of t10, and the variation display by the simple symbols is completed at the timing of t11. In this case, since the transfer of the first background data group and the normal symbol data group has already been completed, the symbol display device 31 starts displaying the standby image using the first background image. As already described, in the pachinko machine 10, the background image can be switched based on the operation of the effect operating device 58 as the display mode, but the first background image after the power is turned on. Is set to the first background image.

  Thereafter, a new winning is generated for the operation ports 23 and 24 at the timing of t12, and the main controller 60 executes a variation start process for the hold information acquired thereby. In this case, since the transfer of the first background data group and the normal symbol data group has already been completed, the variation display by the normal symbol is started.

  By transferring the data group and displaying the image in parallel as described above, the data group is transferred to the regular area 137 after the power is turned on and the image on the symbol display device 31 after the power is turned on. Display can be performed satisfactorily.

  In addition, even if the transfer of the data group necessary to perform the variable display with the normal symbol is completed in the situation where the variable display with the simple symbol is performed, the variable display with the simple symbol is continued and the game round is ended. Since the change display by the normal symbol is performed from the next game time, the complication of the processing can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the change display by the simple symbol is changed to the change display by the normal symbol in the middle of the game time.

<Game times control processing when performing variable display with normal symbols>
Next, the game times control process in the case of performing the variable display by the normal symbol will be described.

  In the game times control process (FIG. 26), it is determined whether or not the variation command is received in step S1501, as described above, and the normal symbol data group is transferred to the regular area 137 in step S1502. Determine if it is complete. Since this time is a case where the variation display by the normal symbol is performed, an affirmative determination is made in Step S1502, and after the variation start processing by the normal symbol is executed in Step S1505, the game turn control processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the change command has not been received (step S1501: NO), it is determined in step S1506 whether or not the change display by the simple symbol is being performed, and in step S1507 whether or not the change display by the normal symbol is being displayed. Determine whether. Since this time is a case where the variation display by the normal symbol is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1507, and after the process during variation by the normal symbol is executed in step S1509, the game turn control processing is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the variation start process using the normal symbol in step S1505 and the changing process using the normal symbol in step S1509 will be described.

<Variation start processing by normal symbol in display CPU 102>
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a variation start process using normal symbols.

  First, in step S1801, in the same manner as in step S1601, based on the received change command and type command, information on the presence / absence of jackpot winning, information on the jackpot type and change display time information when a jackpot result occurs. And the obtained information is stored in the register of the display CPU 102.

  In the subsequent step S1802, stop information setting processing is executed. In the stop information setting process, a process for determining information of a symbol combination to be finally stopped in the current game round is executed.

  Specifically, the work RAM 104 is provided with a symbol update counter and a symbol information acquisition area. The symbol update counter is provided with an upper symbol row counter, a middle symbol row counter, and a lower symbol row counter. These counters are provided with each symbol row Z1 in the symbol display device 31. A counter value corresponding to the number of symbols set in .about.Z3 is set.

  That is, in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, as described above, the counter for the upper symbol row is associated with the fact that 18 symbols are set as the total number of the main symbol and the sub symbol. The numerical value range of “0 to 17” is set in the counter for the lower symbol row. In addition, the middle symbol row Z2 has a numerical range of “0 to 19” in the counter for the middle symbol row, corresponding to the fact that 20 symbols are set as the total number of main symbols and sub symbols. Is set. The counter value for each symbol row counter is updated at different periods. The value of the counter for each symbol row corresponds to the symbol type that stops on the left line in the corresponding symbol row. Then, all the information updated in the counter for each symbol row is acquired at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec), and the acquired information is stored in the symbol information acquisition area.

  In the symbol information acquisition area, a 15R probability variation jackpot area, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot area, a normal jackpot area, a miss reach area, and a perfect miss area are set. Then, it is determined whether or not the information acquired from all the counters for each symbol sequence corresponds to any of 15R probability variation jackpot result, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, normal jackpot result, outreach reach, and complete outage. The information of the corresponding area in the symbol information acquisition area is updated.

  In the stop information setting process in step S1802, it is first determined whether the current game time is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, a normal jackpot result, a miss reach result, or a complete miss result. And the information of the symbol combination to be finally stopped is acquired from the area corresponding to the determination result in the symbol information acquisition area, and stored in the register of the display CPU 102. This symbol combination information includes 15R probability variation jackpot result symbol combination, normal jackpot result combination, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result symbol combination, and information on the effective line that stops outlier reach symbol combination. .

  Incidentally, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a mode in which the same odd number of symbols (specific symbols) are stopped and displayed on one effective line. The combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is a mode in which the same even number of symbols (non-specific symbols) are stopped and displayed on one effective line. In addition, the combination of symbols corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a mode in which the reach is out of reach in a predetermined mode. In addition, the combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment reach is an aspect in which the detachment is performed in a manner different from the predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the symbol combination corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a mode in which a combination of a pair of reach symbols is not displayed on one effective line, and is a predetermined special mode. It is good also as an aspect in which a design is materialized.

  In the following description, the stop information corresponding to the jackpot result is stop information corresponding to any of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the normal jackpot result, or the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S1803, a lottery process for displaying a notice is executed. In the lottery process for the notice display, the establishment lottery counter in the work RAM 104 and the establishment lottery table stored in the program ROM 103 are used. The winning lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured so that 1 is added every time a normal process (FIG. 25) is started, that is, at a cycle of about 4 msec. After reaching the maximum value, it is initialized to “0”.

  In addition, the winning lottery table is set to correspond to each of 15R probability variation jackpot result, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, normal jackpot result, miss reach, and perfect miss. These winning lottery tables are set so that the notice display is displayed at 100% in the winning lottery table corresponding to each jackpot result and missed reach, and missed reach → explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result → normal jackpot result → It is set so that the probability that the notice B is selected in the order of the 15R probability variation jackpot result is high. In addition, in the winning lottery table corresponding to complete losing, the probability that both the notice A and the notice B are not performed is the highest, then the probability of the notice A is high, and the probability of the notice B is the lowest. It has become. The probability of this notice B is set lower than in the case of outlier reach.

  In addition, in the case where the result is a complete outage result and the variation display time is shorter as the number of pieces of pending information is larger, the case is a complete outage result and the variation display time is shorter than a predetermined time. May be configured such that the notice display lottery process is not executed and the notice display is restricted.

  In step S1803, it is first determined whether the current game round is a 15R-probability jackpot result, an explicit 2R-probability jackpot result, a normal jackpot result, a missed reach result, or a completely missed result, and a winning lottery corresponding to the judgment result And the counter value for the establishment lottery are read out. Then, referring to the winning lottery table, whether or not the read counter value for winning lottery corresponds to either notice A or notice B, or whether both notice A and notice B are not performed. Determine. In subsequent step S1804, the result information of the lottery process for the notice display in step S1803 is acquired and stored in the register of the display CPU.

  In a succeeding step S1805, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the current game round. If reach display occurs, reach pattern setting processing for determining a reach pattern in the current game round is executed in step S1806.

  In the reach pattern setting process, a reach pattern table stored in the program ROM 103 is used. The reach pattern table is a table for determining a reach pattern according to the information of the variable display time grasped in step S1801 (the variable display time determined by the main controller 60). Specifically, a mode in which only normal reach is performed, a mode in which super reach A is performed after normal reach, and a mode in which super reach B is performed after normal reach are set in association with information on the variable display time. In step S1805, the reach pattern table is obtained by referring to the reach pattern table and stored in the register of the display CPU 102.

  As described above, the variable display time of each game time is determined by the main control device 60. The main control device 60 determines whether or not a reach display is generated in each game time, and the determination. The variable display time is determined according to the result.

  If no reach display is generated in the current game round (step S1805: NO), or after the processing in step S1806 is performed, if the current game round and jackpot result are generated in step S1807, the effect for jackpot The processing for setting a display table to be referred to as appropriate when performing display control of the symbol display device 31 is executed.

  In subsequent step S1808, the information on the variable display time grasped in step S1801 is set in a measurement counter as a display variable time measuring means provided in various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104. The measurement counter is a counter that is also used in the case of performing variable display using simple symbols.

  In subsequent step S1809, a background counter provided as display mode grasping means in the various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104 is referred to. The background counter is a storage means for grasping the type of the background image currently set in the display CPU 102, and the counter value is set in the background counter in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. Has been.

  Specifically, since the first display mode in which the first background image is displayed and the second display mode in which the second background image is displayed are set as the display modes. The counter value of the background counter is set to “0” and “1”. The counter value of the background counter is alternately switched based on the operation of the effect operating device 58 in a situation where the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. The process related to this switching will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S1810, after executing the process of starting the effect for playing the game with the normal symbol on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, this variation starting process is terminated. In step S1810, the display table set in step S1807 is referred to, and the drawing list information at the start of fluctuation is specified based on the reference result of the background counter in step S1809, and the specified drawing list information is used as the drawing list information. Read from the storage area 103b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105.

  In the VDP 105, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and an image at the start of fluctuation is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In this case, as described above, since the background data group and the normal symbol data group are stored in the regular area 137, it is possible to immediately read out the image at the start of fluctuation without reading the image data from the character ROM 106. Can be displayed.

<Table configuration and processing configuration related to display table settings>
Here, a table configuration and a processing configuration relating to the setting of the display table will be described. The display table includes information for specifying the timing of outputting the drawing list information to the VDP 105 and the type of the drawing list information in the middle of a game round or in the middle of a jackpot effect.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, when the display control of the symbol display device 31 is performed, the VDP 105 does not directly read out image data from the character ROM 106, but a read RAM (bridge RAM 107 or VDP RAM 108). ), The image data is transferred from the character ROM 106, and the VDP 105 reads the transferred image data. In this case, the storage capacity of the read-out RAM is a storage capacity that cannot store all of the data groups corresponding to the game times and the jackpot effects at a time. For example, in the game times when Super Reach B is displayed, the storage capacity of the data group required to display a series of effects from the start to the end of the game times exceeds 3 Gbits. The sum of the storage capacities of the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108 is about 1.5 Gbit as described above.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, a series of effects is divided into a plurality of effect ranges, and a data group corresponding to each effect range is sequentially transferred to the read RAM, and at the time of the transfer, the read RAM is already read. Are overwritten on unnecessary data groups. That is, a data group corresponding to the predetermined effect range is transferred to the read RAM in advance before the predetermined effect range is started. In this case, the front side production range set so as to be the execution target before the predetermined production range is executed. Further, in a situation where the predetermined effect range is being executed, a data group corresponding to the rear effect range that is set to be executed after the predetermined effect range is transferred to the reading RAM. In this case, the data group corresponding to the rear side production range is overwritten on the data group corresponding to the front side production range. At the time of this overwriting, a situation in which a part of the data group to be erased is erased or data to be erased due to the relationship between the newly written data group and the erased data group A situation occurs where the entire group is erased.

  In the display table, not only the timing for outputting the drawing list information and the information for specifying the type of the drawing list information, but also the transfer instruction timing for various data groups from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM is specified. Contains information. When the display table is set, the variable display table storage area 103d provided as the variable display information group storage means in the program ROM 103 is referred to, and the program ROM 103 is provided as the jackpot presentation information group storage means. The jackpot effect table storage area 103e is referred to.

  Hereinafter, while explaining the display table setting processing, the contents of various table groups stored as the variable display information group in the variable display table storage area 103d and the jackpot effect table storage area 103e are jackpoted as necessary. The contents of the various table groups stored as the production information group and the contents of the display table will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing display table setting processing. 33A to 33D show various table groups stored as a variable display information group in the variable display table storage area 103d, and FIG. 33E shows a jackpot effect table storage area. 103e shows various table groups stored as a jackpot presentation information group. FIGS. 34 (a) to (c) show display tables when a jackpot effect is not performed after an effect for game times, and FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (b) show a jackpot effect after an effect for game times. The display table when it is performed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 32, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the current game round. If reach display does not occur, in step S1902, a process for acquiring a base table corresponding to complete detachment is executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 33A, a base table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 103d. The base table group includes a complete detachment table group and a reach generation table group. Information for specifying the timing of outputting the drawing list information and the type of the drawing list information at the timing from the start of the variable display until the result of complete losing is displayed in the table for complete deviation (hereinafter, this information is displayed. There are a number of completely out-of-order tables that are also referred to as “use information”. These complete deviation tables are prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of variable display time and stop information.

  The reach generation table group includes a large number of reach generation tables in which display information at the timing from the start of variable display to the occurrence of reach is indicated. These reach generation tables are prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time and the reach symbol.

  In addition, the image of the variable display of the symbol when it is completely out of order and the reach from the start of the variable display to the occurrence of reach is composed of only the background image and the normal symbol image. As described above, the image data for displaying the background image is a storage target in the regular area 137 as the first background data group or the second background data group, and for displaying the normal symbol. The image data is stored in the regular area 137 as a regular symbol data group. Therefore, information for specifying transfer instruction timings of various data groups is not set in the complete removal table or the reach generation table.

  In step S1902, a complete out table corresponding to the combination of the variable display time and the stop information in the current game round is acquired from the base table group, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. To do. Thereafter, in step S1903, it is determined whether or not a notice A occurs in the current game round, and in step S1904, it is determined whether or not a notice B occurs in the current game round.

  When the notice A occurs (step S1903: YES), processing for obtaining the notice A table is executed in step S1905. If notice B occurs (step S1904: YES), processing for acquiring the notice B table is executed in step S1906. If neither notice A nor notice B occurs (step S1904: NO), the present setting process is terminated.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), a notice table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 103d. The notice table group includes a notice A table and a notice B table. The notice A table shows display information necessary for displaying the image of the notice A in the timing from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display of the symbols in the first symbol row. The notice B table shows display information necessary for displaying the image of the notice B at the timing from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display of the symbols in the first symbol row.

  Each of the notice A table and the notice B table has a transfer instruction timing for transferring the notice A data group or the notice B data group to the reading RAM (specifically, the bridge-side RAM 107). Information to specify is set. In this pachinko machine 10, the transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the notice A data group or the notice B data group is performed immediately after the start of the change display of the symbols (see FIG. 34A, etc.). . In this case, in the table that can be selected when the notice display is executed out of the complete removal table and the reach generation table included in the base table group, the symbols in the first symbol row from the start of the variable display are displayed. As a period until the change display is stopped, a sufficient period is secured for both the notice A and the notice B to complete the notice display after the transfer of the notice data group is completed.

  As long as the transfer of the data group corresponding to the notice display can be completed by the start of the notice display, the transfer instruction timing is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

  In step S1905, the notice A table is acquired from the variable display table storage area 103d, and the acquired table information is overwritten on the base table information stored in the display table storage area 104b. In step S1906, the notice B table is acquired from the variable display table storage area 103d, and the acquired table information is overwritten on the base table information stored in the display table storage area 104b.

  The notice A and the notice B are effects that are executed simultaneously in a situation where the symbol variation display is performed based on the base table. Therefore, in order to display an image corresponding to the effect, the symbol variation display and It is necessary to set drawing list information for displaying both of the notice displays at the same time. In this case, in the process of acquiring the notice table, the base already stored in the display table storage area 104b is set so that the drawing list information for simultaneously displaying both the symbol variation display and the notice display can be set. Overwrite the information in the notice table over the information in the table for work.

  In addition, a display area for storing display information and a transfer instruction area for storing transfer instruction timing information are set in the display table storage area 104b, and a notice table is acquired. In the process, information on the transfer instruction timing is stored in the transfer instruction area. Specifically, in the transfer instruction area, a flag storage area is set individually for each transfer instruction timing that can be assumed, and a transfer target data group that can be assumed in correspondence with each transfer instruction timing. On the other hand, a flag storage area is set individually. When storing transfer instruction timing information in the transfer instruction area, a flag is stored for the area corresponding to the transfer instruction timing to be set this time, and the area corresponding to the data group to be transferred to be set this time The flag is stored in the area set in association with the transfer instruction timing. The configuration relating to the setting of information in the transfer instruction area is the same when performed based on acquisition of other tables such as a normal reach table, a super reach table, and a jackpot presentation table.

  Returning to the description of the display table setting process (FIG. 32), if reach display occurs in the current game round (step S1901: YES), the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, processing for acquiring a base table corresponding to reach display is executed. Specifically, among the already-explained base table group, a reach generation table corresponding to the combination of the variable display time and the reach symbol in the current game time is acquired, and the acquired table information is displayed in the display table storage area. It is stored in 104b.

  In a succeeding step S1908, it is determined whether or not a notice A is generated in the current game round. When the notice A occurs, in step S1909, the notice A table is acquired from the variable display table storage area 103d, and the acquired table information is stored in the variable display table storage area 104b. Overwrite existing information. When the notice A does not occur, this time is a game time in which a reach display is generated, and in the game times in which a reach display is generated, the notice display is surely generated as described above. The notice B table is acquired from the display table storage area 103d, and the acquired table information is overwritten on the base table information stored in the variable display table storage area 104b. The processing contents related to the acquisition of the notice table are the same as those in steps S1905 and S1906.

  After the processing of step S1909 or step S1910 is executed, it is determined in step S1911 whether only normal reach occurs in the current game round and super reach does not occur. If only normal reach occurs, processing for acquiring a normal reach table is executed in step S1912. Thereafter, in step S1916, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result is generated in the current game round. If no jackpot result is generated, the present setting process is terminated. In this case, the creation of the display table as shown in FIG. 34A is completed in the variable display table storage area 104b.

  Here, the normal reach table will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 33C, a normal reach table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 103d. The normal reach table group includes a normal table group, a normal out table group, and a super reach development table group. The normal hit table group includes a number of normal hit tables in which display information necessary for displaying a normal reach image at the timing from the start of reach display to the big hit result is included. These normal winning tables are prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with arbitrary combinations of variable display time and stop information corresponding to the jackpot result.

  The table for normal losing includes a number of tables for normal losing in which display information necessary for displaying a normal reach image at the timing from the start of reach display to the result of losing is displayed. These normal deviation tables are prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time and the stop information corresponding to the deviation result.

  The super-reach development table group includes a number of super-reach development tables that display information necessary for displaying normal reach images from the start of reach display to the start of super reach. It is. These super reach development tables are set in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of variable display time and reach design.

  Each normal reach table includes information for specifying a transfer instruction timing (or transfer start timing) for transferring the normal reach data group to the read RAM (specifically, the bridge-side RAM 107). Is set. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), data for normal reach is determined at a predetermined intermediate timing from the start of the symbol variation display to the stop of the symbol variation display in the first symbol row. The transfer instruction timing is set so that a group transfer instruction is performed. Incidentally, in the game times in which the notice display is performed, the transfer instruction timing of the normal reach data group is the timing immediately after the notice display is started. In the above configuration, all reach generation tables included in the base table group are sufficient to complete the transfer of the normal reach data group as a period from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach display. A period is secured.

  As long as the transfer of the normal reach data group can be completed before the start of reach display, the transfer instruction timing is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary. Incidentally, in the normal reach display, the display pattern of the normal symbol is different from that in the non-reach mode, and therefore data for displaying the image of the mode is included in the normal reach data group.

  In step S1912, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result occurs in the current game round. If a jackpot result occurs, the combination of the variable display time and the jackpot result stop information in the current game round is supported. The normal winning table is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. In addition, when the jackpot result does not occur, a normal out table corresponding to the combination of the variable display time in the current game times and stop information for out of reach is acquired, and the acquired table information is displayed in the display table storage area. It is stored in 104b.

  Since the normal reach display is an effect that is executed after the symbol variation display is performed based on the reach generation table, the information of the normal reach table acquired in step S1912 is continuous with the reach generation table. In this manner, the data is stored in the display table storage area 104b. At this time, the display information is stored in the display area among the acquired information of the normal reach table, and the transfer instruction timing information is stored in the transfer instruction area. Incidentally, the display table shown in FIG. 34A shows a case where the notice A table is acquired and the normal reach loss table is acquired.

  If it is determined in step S1911 that super reach occurs in the current game round, an affirmative determination is made, and the flow proceeds to step S1913. In step S1913, it is determined whether or not super reach A occurs in the current game round. When super reach A occurs, processing for acquiring a super reach A table is executed in step S1914. Thereafter, in step S1916, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result is generated in the current game round. If no jackpot result is generated, the present setting process is terminated. In this case, the creation of the display table as shown in FIG. 34B is completed in the display table storage area 104b.

  Here, the super reach A table will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (d) and 34 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 33 (d), a super reach table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 103d. The super reach table group includes a table group for super reach A and a table group for removing super reach A.

  The super reach A per table group includes a super reach A per table indicating display information necessary for displaying a super reach image at the timing from the start of the super reach display to the big hit result. Many are included. These super reach A winning tables are prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with stop information corresponding to the jackpot result.

  In addition, the super reach A out table includes display information necessary for displaying a super reach image at the timing from the start of the super reach display to the result of the out of the super reach display. Many tables are included. These super reach A removal tables are prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the stop information corresponding to the reach failure results.

  Here, the data capacity of the super reach A data group referred to when performing the super reach A display is for changing the read RAM (specifically, the bridge RAM 107 and the VDP RAM 108) excluding the regular area 137. It exceeds the capacity when the data capacity of the normal reach data group is subtracted from the storage capacity of the area. On the other hand, the super reach A data group is set in a state of being divided into a plurality of data groups. As the plurality of data groups, as shown in FIG. 34B, an initial division data group, an intermediate division data group, and a final division data group are set.

  In each super reach A table, information for specifying a transfer instruction timing for transferring each divided data group to a read RAM (specifically, the bridge RAM 107) is set. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the initial segment data group is performed immediately after the normal reach display is started, and the super reach A display is displayed. The transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the intermediate divided data group is performed immediately after the start, and the transfer instruction of the final divided data group is issued at the timing when the super reach A display corresponding to the initial divided data group is finished. The transfer instruction timing is set to be performed.

  In the above configuration, all the normal reach tables included in the table group for super reach development among the table groups for normal reach are set as the period from the start of the normal reach display to the end of the normal reach display. A sufficient period is secured to complete the transfer. In addition, all the super reach A tables included in the super reach A table group transfer the intermediate segment data group as a period from the start to the end of the display of the image corresponding to the initial segment data group. As a period from the start to the end of the display of the image corresponding to the intermediate segment data group, a sufficient period is secured to complete the transfer of the final segment data group. A period is secured.

  If the transfer of the super reach A data group can be performed satisfactorily, the number of divisions of the super reach A data group and the transfer instruction timing of each divided data group are limited to those described above. It is optional.

  In step S1914, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result is generated in the current game round. If a jackpot result is generated, a table for super reach A corresponding to stop information for the jackpot result in the current game round is determined. And the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. Further, when the jackpot result does not occur, a super reach A out table corresponding to stop information for out reach in the current game round is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b.

  Since the super reach A display is an effect executed after the normal reach display is performed based on the normal reach table, the information on the super reach A table acquired in step S1914 is continuous with the normal reach table. In this manner, the data is stored in the display table storage area 104b. At this time, the display information is stored in the display area among the information of the acquired super reach A table, and the transfer instruction timing information is stored in the transfer instruction area. Incidentally, in the display table shown in FIG. 34 (b), the notice A table and the super reach development table are acquired, and the super reach A out table is acquired.

  If it is determined in step S1913 that super reach A does not occur in the current game round, an affirmative determination is made, and the flow proceeds to step S1915. In step S1915, a process for acquiring a super reach B table is executed. Thereafter, in step S1916, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result is generated in the current game round. If no jackpot result is generated, the present setting process is terminated. In this case, the creation of the display table as shown in FIG. 34C is completed in the display table storage area 104b.

  Here, the super reach B table will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (d) and 34 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 33 (d), the super reach table group in the variable display table storage area 103d includes a table group for super reach B and a table group for removing super reach B. .

  The super reach B per table group includes a super reach B per table indicating display information necessary for displaying a super reach image at the timing from the start of the super reach display to the big hit result. Many are included. These super reach B winning tables are prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with stop information corresponding to the jackpot result.

  In addition, the super reach B off table group includes display information necessary for displaying a super reach image at the timing from the start of the super reach display to the release result. Many tables are included. These super reach B out tables are prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the stop information corresponding to the reach out results.

  Here, in Super Reach B, an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 58 is executed, and when the effect operation device 58 is operated in a predetermined manner, the operation is not performed. Depending on the case, the contents of the subsequent production will be changed. The data capacity of the super reach B data group referred to when performing such super reach B display is the change area excluding the normal area 137 in the read RAM (specifically, the bridge RAM 107 and the VDP RAM 108). Exceeds the capacity obtained by subtracting the data capacity of the normal reach data group from the storage capacity of

  On the other hand, the super reach B data group is set in a state of being divided into a plurality of data groups. As the plurality of data groups, as shown in FIG. 34C, an initial division data group, a first operation system data group, and a second operation system data group are set. In addition, the first operation system data group includes a data group for displaying an image corresponding to the operation of the production operation device 58, and a case where the production operation device 58 is not operated in a predetermined manner. And a data group for displaying the production range (the production range of the unfinished aspect) that will be proceeded to. On the other hand, the second operation system data group is data for displaying an effect range (the effect range of the completion mode) that will proceed after that when the effect operating device 58 is operated in a predetermined mode. A group is included.

  A data group for displaying an unfinished production range is included in one of the first operation system data group and the second operation system data group, and a completion mode production range is displayed on the other. Since the data group is included, both the first operation system data group and the second operation system data group are read from the character ROM 106 in the situation where the production corresponding to the operation of the production operation device 58 is started. Must be transferred to the RAM. In this case, the sum data capacity of the first operation system data group and the second operation system data group does not exceed the sum storage capacity of the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108. The storage capacity of the storage area is exceeded. Therefore, in order to transfer both the first operation system data group and the second operation system data group to the read RAM, it is necessary to use the regular area 137 as well.

  Each of the super reach B tables is set with information for specifying transfer instruction timings for transferring the respective divided data groups to the read RAM (specifically, the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108). Yes. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the initial segment data group is performed immediately after the normal reach display is started, and the super reach B display is displayed. The transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the first operation system data group is performed immediately after the start, and the second operation system data group is immediately after the transfer of the first operation system data group is completed. The transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction is performed.

  For the first operating system data group, information indicating that it is necessary to transfer from the bridge RAM 107 to the regular area 137 of the VDP RAM 108 is set. Furthermore, in each super reach B table, the normal data group that is to be erased at the time of overwriting is stored in the normal area in correspondence with the fact that the first operating system data group is overwritten in the normal area 137. The transfer instruction timing is set so that a transfer instruction is issued to return to 137. The return transfer instruction timing is set as immediately after the production has progressed to either the unfinished production range or the completion production range.

  In the above configuration, all the normal reach tables included in the table group for super reach development among the table groups for normal reach are set as the period from the start of the normal reach display to the end of the normal reach display. A sufficient period is secured to complete the transfer. In addition, all the super reach B tables included in the super reach B table group have the first operation system data as a period from the start of the display of the image corresponding to the initial division data group to the end thereof. A sufficient period is secured to complete the transfer of both the group and the second operation system data group, and the period from the start of the unfinished effect range to the end and the effect range of the completed mode are As a period from the start to the end, a period sufficient for completing the restoration of the regular data group is secured.

  If the transfer of the super reach B data group can be performed satisfactorily, the number of divisions of the super reach B data group and the transfer instruction timing of each divided data group are limited to those described above. It is optional.

  In step S1915, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result is generated in the current game round. If a jackpot result is generated, a table for super reach B corresponding to stop information for the jackpot result in the current game round is determined. And the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. In addition, when the jackpot result does not occur, a super reach B out table corresponding to stop information for out reach in the current game round is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b.

  Since the super reach B display is an effect executed after the normal reach display is performed based on the normal reach table, the information of the super reach B table acquired in step S1915 is continuous with the normal reach table. In this manner, the data is stored in the display table storage area 104b. At this time, display information is stored in the display area among the information of the acquired super reach B table, and information on the transfer instruction timing is stored in the transfer instruction area. Incidentally, the display table shown in FIG. 34C shows a case where the notice B table and the super reach development table are acquired, and the super reach B departure table is acquired.

  If it is determined in step S1916 that a jackpot result will be generated in the current game round, an affirmative determination is made and processing proceeds to step S1917. In step S1917, it is determined whether or not a 15R probability variable jackpot result occurs in the current game round, and in step S1918, it is determined whether or not a normal jackpot result occurs in the current game round.

  If the 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated (step S1917: YES), the processing for obtaining the 15R probability variation jackpot table is executed in step S1919, and then this setting process is terminated. An example of the display table created in the display table storage area 104b in this case is shown in FIG. If a normal jackpot result occurs (step S1918: YES), the process for obtaining the normal jackpot table is executed in step S1920, and then the present setting process is terminated. If an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is generated (step S1918: NO), the process for obtaining the explicit 2R jackpot table is executed in step S1921, and then this setting process is terminated. An example of the display table created in the display table storage area 104b in this case is shown in FIG.

  Here, the jackpot presentation table will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (e) and 35 (a) to 35 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 33 (e), a jackpot presentation table group is stored in the jackpot presentation table storage area 103e. The jackpot presentation table group includes a 15R probability variation jackpot table, a normal jackpot table, and an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot table. Display information necessary for displaying an image of the jackpot effect at the timing from the start of the jackpot effect to the end of the jackpot effect on the 15R probability variable jackpot table, the normal jackpot table and the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot table It is shown.

  Here, in the jackpot effect corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot effect corresponding to the normal jackpot result, the round effect corresponding to each round is executed in each round after the jackpot start effect is executed, and finally the jackpot effect An end effect is executed. The data capacities of the 15R probability variation jackpot data group and the normal jackpot data group that are referred to when performing the jackpot presentation are the same as those of the read RAM (specifically, the bridge RAM 107 and the VDP RAM 108) except for the regular area 137. The data capacity of the last segment data group in the super reach A data group or the data capacity of the second operation data group in the super reach B data group is exceeded from the storage capacity of the change area. .

  On the other hand, the 15R probability variation jackpot data group and the normal jackpot data group are set in a state of being divided into a plurality of data groups. As the plurality of data groups, as shown in FIG. 35A, a start effect data group, an all-round effect data group, and an end effect data group are set. In this case, the data capacity of the all-round effect data group does not exceed the sum storage capacity of the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108, but exceeds the storage capacity of the change areas of the RAMs 107 and 108. Therefore, it is necessary to use the regular area 137 in order to transfer the all-round effect data group to the reading RAM.

  In each of the 15R probability variation jackpot table and the normal jackpot table, the start effect data group among the divided data groups is transferred to the read RAM (specifically, the bridge RAM 107 and the VDP RAM 108). Information for specifying the transfer instruction timing is set. In this pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), a transfer instruction for the start effect data group is performed immediately after the start of normal reach or immediately after the start of the last segment effect in super reach. Transfer instruction timing is set.

  Here, the transfer instruction timing of the start effect data group in the case where the jackpot effect is executed after the game times when the super reach display is performed will be described in detail. The jackpot after the game times when the super reach A display is performed When the effect is executed, the transfer instruction timing is set so that the start effect data group is instructed to be transferred immediately after the effect corresponding to the final segment data group is started.

  In addition, when the big hit effect is executed after the game times in which the super reach B display is performed, a transfer instruction for the start effect data group is performed instead of the normal data group return instruction in the super reach B display. The transfer instruction timing is set as described above. That is, in step S1919 and step S1920, it is determined whether or not table information corresponding to the super reach B display is stored in the display table storage area 104b, and if it is stored, a transfer instruction for the display table storage area 104b is stored. The flag relating to the return instruction of the regular data group in the work area is erased, and the flag relating to the transfer instruction of the start effect data group is stored.

  In the above configuration, all the normal reach tables included in the normal reach table group out of the normal reach table group are transferred the start effect data group as a period from the start of the normal reach display to the end. A sufficient period is secured for completion. In addition, all of the super reach tables included in the super reach table group and the super reach B table group in the super reach table group, the production of the last division in the super reach is started. As a period from the start to the end, a period sufficient to complete the transfer of the start effect data group is secured.

  On the other hand, the transfer instruction timing is not set in the 15R probability variation jackpot table and the normal jackpot table for the all-round effect data group and the end effect data group, and these transfer instruction timings are displayed for the jackpot effect display. It is predetermined on a processing program for controlling. In the open / close execution mode, the duration of each round and the end period of all rounds vary according to the winning frequency to the variable winning device 22, so that the transfer instruction timing is set in the table set based on the elapsed time. This is also because, for example, if the processing program is set so that the transfer instruction is performed with the reception of a predetermined command as a trigger, the complexity of the process related to the transfer instruction can be suppressed. Such processing will be described later.

  In the above processing program, the all-round effect data group is set so that a transfer instruction is given when the jackpot start effect is started, and the end effect data group is the reference round (specifically, the 13th round). The transfer instruction is set when the round production of (eye) is finished. In this case, information indicating that the data group for the first half round needs to be transferred from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 of the VDP-side RAM 108 is set for the all-round effect data group.

  Further, each of the 15R probability variation jackpot table and the normal jackpot table is a target to be erased at the time of overwriting in correspondence with the fact that a part of the all-round effect data group is overwritten in the regular area 137. It is necessary to restore the regular data group to the regular area 137. The return instruction timing is also predetermined in the processing program, and the return instruction timing is set when the jackpot end effect is started.

  Incidentally, each of the 15R probability variation jackpot table and the normal jackpot table is sufficient to complete the transfer of the data group for all-round effects as the period from the start of the jackpot start effect to the end. A period is secured, and the transfer of the end effect data group is completed as a period from the end of the round effect of the reference round (specifically, the 13th round) to the start of the jackpot end effect. A sufficient period is secured above. Furthermore, each of the 15R probability variation jackpot table and the normal jackpot table has a period sufficient to complete the restoration of the regular data group as a period from the start of the jackpot end effect to the end. It is secured.

  If the 15R probability variation jackpot data group and the normal jackpot data group can be transferred satisfactorily, the number of divisions of the jackpot data group and the transfer instruction timing of the divided data group are as described above. It is not limited and is arbitrary.

  The effect corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is an effect in which the same image is displayed from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and the data group for displaying the same image in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group It is included. Therefore, since the data capacity is relatively small, it is not necessary to divide into a plurality of data groups.

  In the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot table, information for specifying the transfer instruction timing for transferring the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group to the read RAM (specifically, the bridge-side RAM 107) is set. . In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), an instruction to transfer the explicit 2R probability variable big hit data group is issued immediately after the start of normal reach or immediately after the production of the last segment is started in super reach. The transfer instruction timing is set as described above.

  Here, the transfer instruction timing of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group when the jackpot effect is executed after the game times in which the super reach display is performed will be described in detail. The game times in which the super reach A display is performed When the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot effect is executed later, the transfer instruction timing is set so that the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group is instructed immediately after the presentation corresponding to the final data group is started. . In addition, when the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot effect is executed after the game times in which the super reach B display is performed, the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot data is immediately after the normal data group is restored in the super reach B display. The transfer instruction timing is set so that a group transfer instruction is performed.

  In the above configuration, all normal reach tables included in the normal reach table group in the normal reach table group include the explicit 2R probability variation big hit data group as a period from the start of normal reach display to the end. A sufficient period is secured to complete the transfer. In addition, all of the super reach tables included in the super reach table group and the super reach B table group in the super reach table group, the production of the last division in the super reach is started. As a period from the start to the end, a sufficient period is secured to complete the transfer of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group.

  Note that the transfer instruction timing of the data group is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary as long as the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group can be transferred satisfactorily. For example, when an explicit 2R probability change jackpot effect is executed after a game time in which super reach B display is performed, instead of an instruction to return the regular data group during execution of super reach B display, an explicit 2R probability change jackpot The transfer instruction timing may be reset so that the transfer instruction of the data group is performed. That is, in step S1921, it is determined whether or not the table information corresponding to the super reach B display is stored in the display table storage area 104b. If it is stored, in the transfer instruction area of the display table storage area 104b. The flag relating to the restoration instruction of the regular data group may be erased and the flag relating to the transfer instruction of the explicit 2R probability variation big hit data group may be stored. However, in this configuration, since it is necessary to return the regular data group in a situation where the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot effect is being executed, a return instruction for the regular data group is issued immediately after the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot effect is started. The transfer instruction timing needs to be set to be performed.

  In step S1919, the 15R probability variation jackpot table is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. In step S1920, a normal jackpot table is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. In step S1921, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot table is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b.

  Since the jackpot effect is an effect that is executed after the symbol variation display is performed, the information on the 15R probability variation jackpot table acquired in step S1919, step S1920 or step S1921, the information on the normal jackpot table, or the explicit The information on the 2R probability variation jackpot table is stored in the display table storage area 104b so as to be continuous with any of the normal reach table, the super reach A table, or the super reach B table. At this time, the display information is stored in the display area among the acquired information of the normal reach table, and the transfer instruction timing information is stored in the transfer instruction area. Incidentally, the display table shown in FIG. 35A shows a case where the notice A table and the normal reach table are acquired, and the 15R probability variation big hit table is acquired. In the display table shown in FIG. 35 (b), the notice B table and the normal reach table are acquired, and the explicit 2R probability variation big hit table is acquired.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, the setting of each of the jackpot tables is also executed in the variation start process (FIG. 27) using simple symbols. Thereby, in the game times in which the variation display by the simple symbol is performed and corresponding to the jackpot result, it is possible to start the effect for the jackpot after the game times in which the variation display is performed on the simple symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game times in which the variation display by the simple symbol is performed may be configured such that even if the big hit result is generated in the game times, the big hit effect is not executed. In this case, the symbol display device 31 does not perform the jackpot effect, but the variable winning device 22 is opened and closed.

<In-flight processing with normal symbols>
Next, the changing process using the normal symbol in step S1509 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the changing process using the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2001, it is determined whether a change end command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the sound lamp control device 90 is received. If the change end command has not been received, the measurement counter in the work RAM 104 is referred to in step S2002, the display table in the work RAM 104 is referred to in step S2003, and the operation corresponding effect is displayed in step S2004. It is determined whether it is a period.

  As already described, an effect in which an image corresponding to the operation of the effect operating device 58 is displayed is set in the super reach B display. In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the super reach B display is executed in the current game round based on the specific result of step S2003. If the super reach B display is not executed, a negative determination is made. Further, when the super reach B display is executed, the information on the elapsed time of the game times specified in step S2002 is collated with the display table specified in step S2003, and it corresponds to the operation corresponding effect period. It is determined whether or not.

  When it corresponds to the operation corresponding effect period, an operation corresponding process is executed in step S2005. Here, the operation handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S <b> 2101, it is determined whether an operation generation command is received from the sound lamp control device 90. As described above, the operation generation command is transmitted when the operation of the effect operation device 58 is detected in the sound lamp control device 90.

  If the operation generation command has been received, the operation generation flag is stored in the operation generation flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 104d of the work RAM 104 in step S2102. In subsequent step S2103, the counter information is updated so that the value of the operation occurrence counter provided in the various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104 is incremented by one.

  After performing the process of step S2103 or when determining in step S2101 that an operation generation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, it is determined whether the elapsed time of the game times measured by the measurement counter has reached the end timing of the operation-related effect period or whether the end timing has elapsed.

  If it has not elapsed, the operation handling process is terminated. If it has elapsed, the value of the operation occurrence counter is referred to in step S2105, and it is determined whether or not the value of the operation occurrence counter is equal to or greater than the reference number stored in advance in the program ROM 103.

  If the number of times is greater than the reference number, in step S2106, the operation completion flag is stored in the operation completion flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 104d of the work RAM 104, and then the operation corresponding process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number is less than the reference number, in step S2107, the operation incompletion flag is stored in the operation incompletion flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 104d of the work RAM 104, and then the operation corresponding process is terminated.

  By storing the operation completion flag, in the super reach B display, the effect range in the completion mode is executed after the operation corresponding effect period has elapsed. On the other hand, when the operation incomplete flag is stored, in the super reach B display, the effect range of the incomplete mode is executed after the operation corresponding effect period elapses.

  That is, when the super reach B display is performed, the effect operating device 58 is operated more than the reference number in the operation corresponding effect period, so that the effect range in the completion mode is executed after the operation corresponding effect period elapses, and When the number of operations of the operation device 58 is less than the reference number, the unfinished effect range is executed after the operation corresponding effect period has elapsed. Thus, by setting the production range of the completed mode and the production range of the unfinished mode, the content of the production is produced when the production operation device 58 is operated in a predetermined mode and when it is not operated. As a result, the contents of the effects in the symbol display device 31 are diversified.

  Returning to the description of the changing process using normal symbols (FIG. 36), after the operation corresponding process in step S2005 is executed or when it is determined in step S2004 that the operation corresponding effect period has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2006. . In step S2006, information on the elapsed time of the game times specified in step S2002 is compared with the display table specified in step S2003, and it is determined whether it is the setting timing of the drawing list.

  If it is the drawing list setting timing, a drawing list setting process is executed in step S2007. Here, the drawing list setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2201, the background counters provided in the various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104 are referred to. As already described, the background counter is storage means for the display CPU 102 to grasp the background image to be displayed this time. In setting the following drawing list, a drawing list corresponding to the background image corresponding to the reference result in step S2201 is set each time, although not particularly mentioned. In a succeeding step S2202, it is determined whether or not reach display is being performed.

  If the reach is not being displayed, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not a notice is being displayed. If the notice is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, with reference to the currently stored display table and information on the elapsed time of game times, the drawing list information corresponding to the current set timing among the drawing list information for variable display during non-reach is displayed. Read from the storage area 103b. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The drawing list information read in step S2204 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the changing process using normal symbols (FIG. 36). As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image that advances the variable display of the symbol at the time of non-reach. Is displayed on the display screen G.

  In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), when the reach display is not being performed (step S2202: NO) and the notice display is being displayed (step S2203: YES), the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, the currently stored display table and game time elapsed time information are referenced, and the drawing list information for notice corresponding to the current set timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. . In this case, drawing list information corresponding to the side set in the currently stored display table of the notice A and the notice B is read. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The drawing list information read in step S2205 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the changing process using normal symbols (FIG. 36). As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and advances the symbol variation display in the situation where the notice display is performed. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), if reach display is being performed (step S2202: YES), it is determined in step S2206 whether normal reach is being displayed. If the normal reach is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, the currently stored display table and game time elapsed time information are referred to, and normal reach drawing list information corresponding to the current set timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. . Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The drawing list information read in step S2207 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the changing process using normal symbols (FIG. 36). As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image for advancing the normal reach display on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. Let

  In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), if the normal reach display is not being performed (step S2206: NO), it is determined in step S2208 whether the super reach A is being displayed. If the super reach A is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S2209. In step S2209, with reference to the currently stored display table and game time elapsed time information, the drawing list information for the super reach A corresponding to the current setting timing is drawn list information storage area 103b. Read from. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The drawing list information read in step S2209 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the changing process using normal symbols (FIG. 36). As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image for proceeding with the super reach A display on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. To display.

  In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), when the super reach A is not displayed (step S2208: NO), it means that the super reach B is being displayed. Therefore, the super reach corresponding to steps S2210 to S2217 is performed. The setting process for B display is executed.

  In this process, first, in step S2210, it is determined whether or not the operation corresponding period has elapsed. If the operation response period has not elapsed, it is determined in step S2211 whether an operation occurrence flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the operation occurrence flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2212. In step S2212, the currently stored display table and the information on the elapsed time of the game times are referred to in the currently stored display table. Are read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The situation in which the operation handling period has not elapsed and the operation occurrence flag is not stored is a situation in which the operation handling period is not started in the super reach B display or the operation handling period, but the operation device for presentation No. 58 is not operated.

  The drawing list information read in step S2212 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the changing process using normal symbols (FIG. 36). As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image for progressing an effect corresponding to the non-operation in the super reach B display. It is displayed on the display screen G of the device 31.

  In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), if the operation occurrence flag is stored (step S2211: YES), the process proceeds to step S2213. In step S2213, the operation-corresponding location and the game time elapsed time information are referred to in the currently stored display table, and the super-reach B drawing list information corresponds to the operation and is set this time. Data corresponding to the timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Thereafter, after the operation occurrence flag is deleted in step S2214, this setting process is terminated.

  The drawing list information read in step S2213 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the changing process using normal symbols (FIG. 36). As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image that progresses the operation-related effects in the super reach B display. 31 is displayed on the display screen G.

  In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), if the operation-corresponding period has elapsed (step S2210: YES), it is determined in step S2215 whether an operation completion flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the operation completion flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2216. In step S2216, the operation completion location and the game time elapsed time information are referred to in the currently stored display table, and the drawing list information for Super Reach B is for operation completion, and this time. Are read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The drawing list information read in step S2216 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the changing process using normal symbols (FIG. 36). As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image that advances the effect for operation completion in the super reach B display. It is displayed on the display screen G of the device 31.

  In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), when the operation completion flag is not stored in the work RAM 104 (step S2215: NO), the process proceeds to step S2217. In step S2217, the information on the incomplete operation and the elapsed time of the game times in the currently stored display table is referred to, and the drawing list information for Super Reach B is the operation incomplete. Are read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The drawing list information read in step S2217 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the changing process using normal symbols (FIG. 36). As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image that progresses the operation incomplete operation in the super reach B display. It is displayed on the display screen G of the device 31.

  When the process for outputting the drawing list information (step S2008) is executed or the drawing list is not set at the timing (step S2006: NO) in the changing process using normal symbols (FIG. 36), step In S2009, after executing the data transfer instruction process, the in-fluctuation process ends.

  On the other hand, when the change end command is received (step S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, the display table currently stored is referred to, the drawing list information corresponding to the last set timing in the display table is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b, and the read drawing is read. The list information is output to the VDP 105. In the VDP 105, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the last image in the game round is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. Thereby, the variable display of the symbols for one game is completed.

  Thereafter, in step S2011, after executing a variation end process for executing a process such as deleting a flag stored in the work RAM 104 in order to advance an effect for game times such as an operation completion flag or an operation incomplete flag, The process during the change is terminated.

<Processing related to transfer of image data during game round>
Next, processing related to image data during the game round will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the data transfer instruction process.

  As shown in FIG. 39, first, in step S2301, the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b of the work RAM 104 and information on the elapsed time of the game times are referred to, and at the transfer instruction timing of the notice A data group. It is determined whether or not there is. When the transfer instruction timing of the notice A data group is set in the display table and the transfer instruction timing is reached, the transfer instruction process of the notice A data group is executed in step S2302. In the transfer instruction process, the transfer command for the notice A is read from the command storage area 103 a of the program ROM 103, and the read command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. Thereafter, the data transfer instruction process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the notice B data group, whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the normal reach data group, whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the initial division data group for the super reach A, and the intermediate for the super reach A Whether it is the transfer instruction timing of the partitioned data group, whether it is the transfer instruction timing of the final partitioned data group for super reach A, or whether it is the transfer instruction timing of the initial partitioned data group for super reach B, step S2303, The determination is made at each of S2305, S2307, S2309, S2311, and S2313. This determination method is the same as that in step S2301 except that the determination target is different.

  Further, according to each determination result, the transfer instruction process for the notice B data group, the transfer instruction process for the normal reach data group, the transfer instruction process for the initial division data group for the super reach A, and the intermediate division for the super reach A The data group transfer instruction process, the super-reach A final partition data group transfer instruction process, and the super-reach B initial partition data group transfer instruction process are performed in steps S2304, S2306, S2308, S2310, and S2312. In step S2314, the process is executed. This process is the same as that in step S2302 except that the transfer command to be set is different.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the operation system data group by referring to the currently stored display table and information on the elapsed time of game times. To do. The operation system data group includes a first operation system data group and a second operation system data group.

  When the transfer instruction timing of the operation data group is set in the display table and the transfer instruction timing is reached, the transfer instruction process of the operation data group is executed in step S2316. In the transfer instruction process, a transfer command for the operation system data group is read from the command storage area 103 a of the program ROM 103, and the read command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109.

  Here, as described above, when the operation system data group is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM, a part of the operation system data group is overwritten in the common area 137. Accordingly, in step S2317, the common data group overwrite instruction process is executed. In the regular data group overwrite instruction process, the regular data group overwrite command is read from the command storage area 103 a of the program ROM 103, and the read command is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereafter, the data transfer instruction process is terminated.

  If the operation table data group transfer instruction timing is not set in the display table or if the operation system data group transfer instruction timing is set, but the transfer instruction timing is not reached, the result in Step S2315 is negative. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S2318. In step S2318, it is determined whether or not it is the return instruction timing of the regular data group with reference to the currently stored display table and information on the elapsed time of game times.

  When the return instruction timing of the common data group is set in the display table and the return instruction timing is reached, the normal data group return instruction processing is executed in step S2319. In the return instruction processing, the bridge LSI return command is read from the command storage area 103a of the program ROM 103, the read return command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109, and the return for VDP is performed from the command storage area 103a. The command is read and the read return command is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereafter, the data transfer instruction process is terminated.

  Here, the overwriting of the regular area 137 includes the case where the super reach B display is performed as described above, and the rendering operating device 58 is determined in advance for the overwriting. The first operating system data group including the data group for displaying the unfinished effect range corresponding to the case where the operation is not performed in the same manner is overwritten on the regular area 137, and the effect operating device 58 is predetermined. A second operation system data group including a data group for displaying the effect range of the completion mode corresponding to the operation in the specified mode is written in the bridge-side RAM 107.

  In this case, the restoration of the regular data group is performed either in the case where the effect range in the incomplete mode is executed or in the case where the effect range in the completed mode is executed, but the effect range in the incomplete mode is executed. In this case, since the first operating system data group needs to be stored in the regular area 137, the regular data group cannot be returned to the regular area 137. However, even in this case, in the bridge-side RAM 107, the regular data group can be written to the area where the initial segment data group of the super reach B display has been stored and then saved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the normal data group is restored, if a non-erasable data group is stored in the normal area 137, the normal data group is saved in the bridge RAM 107 in step S2319. In the normal data group return instruction process, it is determined whether or not an operation incomplete flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If an operation incomplete flag is stored, a save-corresponding return command is transmitted as a return command to the VDP 105. In addition, if the operation incomplete flag is not stored, a normal return command is transmitted as a return command to the VDP 105. Thus, the VDP 105 executes processing corresponding to each return command, and the write control unit 121 executes saving processing based on information received from the VDP 105. Specific contents of these processes will be described later.

  In the data transfer instruction process, if the return instruction timing of the common data group is not set in the display table or if the return instruction timing is set but is not the return instruction timing, the result in Step S2318 is negative. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S2320. In step S2320, it is determined whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the big hit start effect data group by referring to the currently stored display table and information on the elapsed time of game times.

  When the transfer instruction timing is not set or when the transfer instruction timing is set but not at the transfer instruction timing, the data transfer instruction process is finished as it is. When the transfer instruction timing is set in the display table and the transfer instruction timing is reached, in step S2321, a transfer instruction process of the big hit start effect data group is executed. In the transfer instruction process, it is determined whether the current jackpot result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, a normal jackpot result, or an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. Then, a transfer command corresponding to each jackpot result is read from the command storage area 103 a of the program ROM 103, and the read transfer command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. Thereafter, the data transfer instruction process is terminated.

<Processing related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 when there is no overwrite in the common area 137>
Next, processing related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 when there is no overwriting to the common area 137 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing data transfer setting processing in the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. The data transfer setting process is set as a part of the bridge side main process.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the data transfer setting process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not a transfer command for instructing transfer of a predetermined data group is received from the display CPU. If no transfer command has been received, it is determined in step S2402 whether the data transfer state is normal.

  If no transfer command has been received (step S2401: NO) and the data transfer state is not normal (step S2402: NO), the data transfer setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if any transfer command is received (step S2401: YES), the process proceeds to step S2403 and subsequent steps.

  In step S2403, the normal data transfer state is set, and in step S2404, the type of data group that is the transfer instruction target is specified from the transfer command received this time. In step S2405, based on the identification result in step S2404, the transfer state of the data group to be transferred is set.

  Thereafter, in step S2406, it is confirmed to which area in the bridge-side RAM 107 the transfer instruction target data group set this time can be transferred. In subsequent step S2407, the transferable area is set this time. Is set as the transfer target area of the data group to be transferred. Specifically, regarding the processing in step S2406 and step S2407, information on the area to be written in the bridge-side RAM 107 is set in the control ROM 124 of the write control unit 121 in association with the data group to be transferred. .

  In this case, the transfer instruction target data group is an effect executed immediately before the currently executed effect range (ie, the effect range executed immediately before the effect range corresponding to the transfer instruction target data group). The information of the area to be written is set so that the data group corresponding to the range is written to an area including at least a part of the area of the bridge-side RAM 107. Here, since the types of data groups stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 are different immediately before starting the transfer of the data group to be transferred in accordance with the effects for game times and the effects for jackpot, The area to be written is set according to the situation.

  In detail, the data group for the notice A and the data group for the notice B are data groups that are first written in the effect for the game times. Therefore, at the timing when these data groups are to be written, basically the bridge side Data that cannot be erased is not stored in the RAM 107. Therefore, the notice A data group and the notice B data group are set to be written in an arbitrary area in the bridge-side RAM 107.

  However, as will be described later, there may occur a situation in which the common data group is saved in the bridge-side RAM 107. In this case, the area for storing the common data group is avoided so as to avoid the area for the notice A. A data group and a notice B data group are written.

  The area to be written for the normal reach data group is set to be written in an area set so as not to overlap with the area in which the notice A data group or the notice B data group is stored.

  The area to be written for the initial division data group for Super Reach A is set so as to include at least a part of the advance notice area, more specifically, the entire area and not to overlap with the normal reach area. ing. In addition, the area to be written in the intermediate division data group for super reach A is set so as to include at least a part of the normal reach area, more specifically, the entire area, and the super reach A initial division area. It is set not to overlap. In addition, the area to be written in the final reach data group for super reach A is set to include at least a part of the super reach A initial partition area, more specifically, the entire area and the super reach A intermediate partition. It is set so as not to overlap with the work area.

  The area to be written for the initial division data group for Super Reach B is set so as to include at least a part of the advance notice area, more specifically, the entire area, and not to overlap with the normal reach area. ing. In addition, the area to be written for the operation system data group is set so as to include at least a part of the normal reach area, more specifically, the entire area, and not to overlap with the super reach B initial division area. Has been.

  In the operation system data group, the sum data capacity of the first operation system data group and the second operation system data group exceeds the storage capacity of the operation system area. On the other hand, as described above, the first operation system data group is transferred to the regular area 137 of the VDP RAM 108, and the operation system area has a data capacity smaller than the storage capacity of the operation system area. Only the operation data group 2 is written. In this case, the first operating system data group is once written in the operating system area as a stage before being transferred to the regular area 137 and then transferred to the regular area 137 and the second operating system data group. Is written in the operation system area after the first operation system data group is transferred from the operation system area to the service area 137.

  The area to be written for the start effect data group corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is the effect range currently being executed in the bridge-side RAM 107 (ie, the effect range executed immediately before the jackpot start effect). ) Is set as an area including at least a part of an area in which a data group corresponding to the effect range executed immediately before is stored. The area to be written for the data group for all-round effects includes an area including at least a part of an area in the bridge RAM 107 in which a data group corresponding to the effect range executed immediately before the jackpot start effect is stored. Is set as

  The data capacity of the all-round effect data group exceeds the storage capacity of the area to be written that can be set. On the other hand, as already explained, the data group of the first half part of the data group for all round effects is transferred to the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108, and the area to be written has a data capacity larger than the storage capacity of the area. Only a small second half data group is written. In this case, the data group in the first half is temporarily written in the area to be written as a stage before being transferred to the regular area 137, and then transferred to the regular area 137. After the data group is transferred from the area to be written to the regular area 137, it is written to the area to be written.

  The area to be written for the end effect data group is set as an area including at least a part of the area where the start effect data group is stored. In addition, the area to be written about the production data group corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is an effect range currently being executed in the bridge-side RAM 107 (ie, an effect range executed immediately before the jackpot start effect). It is set as an area including at least a part of an area in which a data group corresponding to the effect range executed immediately before is stored.

  By executing the processing from step S2403 to step S2407 in the data transfer setting process (FIG. 40), the transfer of the data group set as the current transfer instruction target in the already described data transfer process (FIG. 20) is executed. To do. In this case, in the corresponding data read start processing in step S1003, the transfer table corresponding to the type of data group set as the transfer instruction target and the set write target area is read from the control ROM 124, and the control RAM 125 is read. And transfer data according to the transfer table.

  After executing the process of step S2407, the process proceeds to step S2408. If it is determined in step S2402 that the data transfer state is normal, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the transfer instruction target data group has been completed. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the completion flag corresponding to the current transfer state is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121. As described above, the completion flag is stored in step S1009 of the data transfer process (FIG. 20).

  If the transfer of the data group subject to transfer instruction has not been completed, the data transfer setting process is terminated as it is. If transfer of the data group to be transferred is completed, transfer completion processing is executed in step S2409 to cancel the current transfer state. Thereafter, the data transfer setting process ends.

<Processing related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 when the common area 137 is overwritten>
Next, processing related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 when the common area 137 is overwritten will be described.

  The write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 executes the processing of steps S2401 to S2408 when there is an overwriting to the common area 137. In other words, data transfer is performed using the same subroutine regardless of whether the common area 137 is not overwritten or overwritten.

  Here, the data group set as the transfer target in the write control unit 121 when the overwrite instruction is given is the data group to be overwritten (specifically, the first data group to be overwritten in the regular area 137). Data group of the first half of all the operation system data group or all round effect data group) and a non-overwrite target data group (specifically, the second operation system data group) finally written in the bridge RAM 107 Or the data group of the latter half of the data group for all-round effects). In this configuration, when writing to the regular area 137 is performed, the transfer table (transfer time reference information group) set in the data transfer process (FIG. 20) is used to transfer the data group to be overwritten. Information and information for transferring the non-overwrite target data group are set, but the overwriting target data group is set to be the transfer target first. In the transfer table, the transfer start timing of the non-overwrite target data group is set so that a sufficient period is secured to transfer the overwrite target data group from the bridge RAM 107 to the regular area 137 in the VDP 105. ing.

  The VDP 105 overwrites the common area 137 by executing an overwrite process. The overwriting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The overwriting process is set as a part of the VDP side main process.

  First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not an overwrite command is received from the display CPU. If an overwrite command has not been received, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not an overwrite state has occurred. If it is not overwritten (step S2502: NO), the overwriting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an overwrite command has been received (step S2501: YES), the overwrite state is set in step S2503. In step S2503, the overwrite table corresponding to the current overwrite instruction is read from the control ROM 131 of the VDP 105 to the control RAM 132. In the overwrite table, the address information of the area to be referred to when reading data from the bridge-side RAM 107, the reference order information when sequentially referring to the address information, and the data type to be read from the area of each address information Information is set.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the data group to be overwritten is either the first operation system data group or the first half data group in the all-round effect data group, but the latter data group As already described, the area once read to the bridge-side RAM 107 varies depending on the content of the game-play effect. On the other hand, the overwriting table has a plurality of patterns set corresponding to each of the situations that can be assumed, and the display CPU 102 determines which game contents are accompanied by the VDP 105. The overwrite command is transmitted in a manner that can be recognized by. As a result, the VDP 105 can read the overwrite table corresponding to each situation.

  After executing the process of step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504. If it is determined in step S2502 that the data is overwritten, the process advances to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether data to be read is stored in the bridge RAM 107 or not. Here, the read target data is unit data constituting any image data group. In step S2504, the bridge-side RAM 107 area corresponding to the address information to be read this time in the overwrite table is stored in step S2504. It is determined whether or not unit data to be read is stored.

  Note that the processing configuration for specifying the data to be read in the VDP 105 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. For example, the unit data included in the data group to be overwritten in the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 Each time the writing to the bridge-side RAM 107 is completed, a write completion signal is transmitted from the write control unit 121 to the VDP 105, and the VDP 105 receives the write completion signal and makes an affirmative determination in step S2504.

  Further, the read target data is not limited to the unit data, and a group of image data groups may be set as the read target data. In this case, the VDP 105 waits without transferring data to the VDP RAM 108 until a group of image data is newly written to the bridge RAM 107. In this respect, a configuration in which data transfer from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108 is performed for each unit data is preferable in terms of early transfer of the data group to be overwritten to the VDP-side RAM 108.

  If the data to be read is not stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 (step S2504: NO), the overwriting process is terminated as it is. If data to be read is stored in the bridge RAM 107 (step S2504: YES), the process proceeds to step S2505.

  In step S2505, a write process for writing the unit data to be read in the bridge RAM 107 to the regular area 137 of the VDP RAM 108 is executed. In this case, in the overwrite table, information for specifying in the VDP 105 which unit address of each address in the regular area 137 is written is set. In the VDP 105, when unit data is written to the regular area 137, the unit data is written to the unit area of the regular area 137 that is predetermined for the unit data.

  Here, in the common data group transferred to the common area 137 at the time of initial setting, as already described, the inspection data group, the initial display data group, the abnormality notification data group, and the simple symbol data are included. A group, a first background data group, a normal symbol data group, and a second background data group are set. Among these data groups, the data group excluding the abnormality notification data group is a situation where the production range corresponding to the data group to be overwritten is being executed and the production range immediately before the production range is being executed. This is a data group that is not used in.

  That is, in the super reach B display, an image dedicated to the effect is displayed in the effect range corresponding to the operation system data group, and corresponds to the initial segment data group corresponding to the effect range immediately before the effect range. An image dedicated to the effect is also displayed in the effect range. In addition, in each round effect corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, an image dedicated to the effect is displayed, and also in the jackpot start effect corresponding to the immediately preceding effect range with respect to the effect range, An image is displayed.

  In the above configuration, in the situation where the production range corresponding to the data group to be overwritten is being executed and the production range immediately before the production range is being executed, the inspection image, the initial display image, and the simple design An image, each background image, and a normal design image are unnecessary. On the other hand, an abnormality can occur at an arbitrary timing in a situation where an effect for game times and an effect for jackpot are being executed, and accordingly, an abnormality notification needs to be executable at an arbitrary timing. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the overwriting table is set so that the abnormality notification data group of the regular data group is not erased when the overwriting target data group is written, and other data groups are overwritten. The overwrite table is set so that it is erased when writing.

  In a succeeding step S2506, it is determined whether or not the current overwriting is completed. If the overwriting is not completed, the overwriting process is terminated as it is. If the overwriting has been completed, the overwriting process is terminated after the overwriting state is canceled in step S2507.

<Processing related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 when the normal data group is restored to the normal area 137>
Next, processing related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 when the normal data group is restored to the normal area 137 will be described.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a data transfer setting process for return in the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. The return data transfer setting process is set as a part of the bridge-side main process.

  As shown in FIG. 42, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether a return command has been received from the display CPU. If no return command has been received, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not the common data group has been returned.

  If the return command has not been received (step S2601: NO), and if the normal data group has not been returned (step S2602: NO), the data transfer setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a return command has been received (step S2601: YES), the process proceeds to step S2603 and subsequent steps.

  In step S2603, it is confirmed to which area the normal data group can be transferred in the bridge-side RAM 107, and in subsequent step S2604, the transferable area is set as a transfer target area of the normal data group. . Here, the situation in which the normal data group is restored includes a situation where an operation system effect is being performed in the super reach B display, and a jackpot end in a jackpot effect corresponding to a 15R probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. It is a situation where production is being performed. In each of these situations, in the former situation, an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the initial division data group is stored in the super reach B display and that does not overlap with the area in which the operation system data group is stored It is set as an area. On the other hand, in the latter situation, an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the round effect data group is stored and does not overlap with the area in which the end effect data group is stored is set as an area to be written. ing.

  In the subsequent step S2605, the normal data group is set to the return state and the inspection data group is set to the transfer state. After executing the process of step S2605, the process proceeds to step S2606. If it is determined in step S2602 that the normal data group is in the return state, the process also proceeds to step S2606.

  Thereafter, in step S2606 to step S2617, setting and canceling of the transfer state of each data group constituting the return-use regular data group are sequentially performed. In this case, in steps S2606 to S2607, processing similar to that in steps S904 to S905 in the normal data group initial setting processing (FIG. 19) is executed. In step S2608, it is determined whether or not the initial display data group has been transferred. If it has not been transferred, the process proceeds to step S2610. If it has been transferred, the initial display data group is transferred in step S2609. After canceling the transfer state of the data group and setting the transfer state of the simple symbol data group, the process advances to step S2610.

  Also, in steps S2610 to S2611, the same processing as in steps S910 to S911 in the normal data group initial setting processing (FIG. 19) is executed. In steps S2612 to S2613, the same processing as that in steps S912 to S913 in the normal data group initial setting process (FIG. 19) is executed. Also, in steps S2614 to S2615, the same processing as in steps S914 to S915 in the common data group initial setting processing (FIG. 19) is executed. In step S2616, it is determined whether or not the second background data group has been transferred. If the second background data group has not been transferred, the data transfer setting process is terminated. If the transfer has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2617. Then, after canceling the transfer state of the second background data group and canceling the return state of the regular data group, the data transfer setting process ends.

  When each transfer state is set as described above, a data group corresponding to the set transfer state is transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 in the data transfer process (FIG. 20). In this case, each data group is transferred to the transfer target area set in step S2604.

  Here, as already described, when overwriting the regular area 137, the abnormality notification data group is excluded from the regular data group. Therefore, when the normal data group is restored, the abnormality notification data group is not transferred. As a result, compared to the case where the regular data group is transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 at the time of initial setting, the time until the transfer is completed is shortened when the regular data group is transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 at the time of return. Yes.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a return process in the VDP 105. The return process is set as a part of the VDP main process.

  In the return process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether a return command is received from the display CPU 102 or not. If a return command has not been received, it is determined in step S2702 whether the normal data group is in a return state.

  If the return command has not been received (step S2701: NO), and if the normal data group is not in the return state (step S2702: NO), the return processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a return command has been received (step S2701: YES), the return state of the regular data group is set in step S2703. In step S2703, the return table corresponding to the current return instruction is read from the control ROM 131 of the VDP 105 to the control RAM 132. The return table includes address information of an area to be referred to when data is read from the bridge-side RAM 107, reference order information when the address information is sequentially referred to, and data types to be read from the areas of the address information. Information is set.

  In a succeeding step S2704, it is determined whether or not the return command received this time is an evacuation corresponding return command. If it is an evacuation corresponding return command, the evacuation state is set in step S2705. Here, as described above, the save-corresponding return command is the return timing of the regular data group. However, since the current regular area 137 stores a non-erasable data group, the regular data group is changed to the regular area. This command is transmitted from the display CPU 102 when it is necessary to save it in the bridge RAM 107 without returning to 137. Therefore, the save state is a state in which the common data group is transferred to the bridge RAM 107 but is saved in the bridge RAM 107 without being written in the common area 137.

  After executing the process of step S2705, the process proceeds to step S2706. Also, if it is determined in step S2702 that the normal data group is in a return state, or if it is determined in step S2704 that a normal return command is received instead of the save correspondence return command, the process proceeds to step S2706.

  In step S2706, it is determined whether it is in the evacuation state. If it is in the evacuation state, in step S2707, it is determined whether or not a command corresponding to the information to be released from the evacuation state is received from the display CPU. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a change end command is received from the display CPU 102. The change end command is transmitted to the VDP 105 when the display CPU 102 executes the change end process in step S2011 in the changing process using normal symbols (FIG. 36).

  If the change end command has not been received, transmission of the save status signal is started in step S2708, and then the return processing is ended. If transmission of the save status signal has already been started, that state is maintained. The save status signal is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. In the situation where the save status signal is received from the VDP 105, the write control unit 121 regulates not to overwrite another data group with respect to the regular data group stored in the bridge-side RAM 107.

  Specifically, in step S2406 in the data transfer process (FIG. 40) of the write control unit 121, it is determined whether a save status signal is received from the VDP 105. If the save status signal is received, the area where the regular data group is stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 is excluded from the transferable areas. As a result, it is possible to prevent other data groups from being overwritten on the regular data group saved in the bridge-side RAM 107 in the saved state.

  If the change end command has been received (step S2707: YES), the return processing is ended after the evacuation state is canceled in step S2709. In other words, the situation in which the common data group is saved is a situation in which the production range of the unfinished aspect is executed in the super reach B display as described above, and the situation is canceled when the game round is ended. Is done. Therefore, when the change end command is received, the evacuation state is released.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2706 that it is not in the retracted state, it is determined in step S2710 whether data to be read is stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 or not. Here, the data to be read is unit data constituting one of the image data groups. In step S2710, the bridge-side RAM 107 area corresponding to the address information to be read this time is stored in the return table. It is determined whether or not unit data to be read is stored.

  The processing configuration for specifying the data to be read in the VDP 105 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. For example, the unit data included in the data group to be restored in the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 Each time writing to the bridge-side RAM 107 is completed, a write completion signal is transmitted from the write control unit 121 to the VDP 105, and the VDP 105 may receive the write completion signal and make an affirmative determination in step S 2710.

  Further, the read target data is not limited to the unit data, and a group of image data groups may be set as the read target data. In this case, the VDP 105 waits without transferring data to the VDP RAM 108 until a group of image data is newly written to the bridge RAM 107. In this regard, a configuration in which data transfer from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108 is performed for each unit data is preferable in terms of early transfer of the data group to be restored to the VDP-side RAM 108.

  If the data to be read is not stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 (step S2710: NO), the return processing is terminated as it is. If data to be read is stored in the bridge RAM 107 (step S2710: YES), the process proceeds to step S2711.

  In step S 2711, a write process for writing unit data to be read in the bridge-side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 of the VDP-side RAM 108 is executed. In this case, in the return table, information for specifying in the VDP 105 which unit address of each address in the regular area 137 is to be written is set. In the VDP 105, when unit data is written to the regular area 137, the unit data is written to the unit area of the regular area 137 that is predetermined for the unit data.

  Here, as already described, out of the regular data group, the abnormality notification data group is not overwritten and is stored and held in the regular area 137. In this case, when the normal data group is restored, the return table sets the information on the area to be written so that the normal data group is not overwritten on the area where the abnormality notification data group is stored. Has been.

  In a succeeding step S2712, it is determined whether or not the restoration of the common data group is completed. If the return is not completed, the return process is terminated as it is. If the restoration is completed, the restoration process is terminated after the restoration state of the regular data group is canceled in step S2713.

<Transfer of various data groups as the game rounds progress>
Next, a description will be given of how various data groups are transferred along with the progress of the game-use effects. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how various data groups are transferred along with the progress of production in the game times in which the notice B display and the super reach B display are performed and the final reach result is obtained. .

  FIG. 44A shows a display table when super reach B display is performed, and FIG. 44B shows data stored in the regular area 137 of the VDP RAM 108 and the bridge RAM 107 at each timing of game play. Shows the group. 44A to 44H show images displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 at each timing.

  At the timing t1, the current game start timing is reached. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the normal area 137 stores an initial variation display data group, specifically, each background data group and normal symbol data group. The drawing process is executed in the VDP 105 by appropriately using the image data included in the variable display data group. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the change display of symbols in the current game round is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the transfer of the notice B data group to the bridge RAM 107 is started as shown in FIG. 44A, and the transfer of the notice B data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 is started. Thus, the transfer of the notice B data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 is completed as shown in FIG. The data capacity of the notice B data group is set smaller than the storage capacity of the bridge RAM 107, and the notice B data group is written in a partial area of the bridge RAM 107. Incidentally, even in a situation in which the data group for the advance notice B is being transferred, the symbol display device 31 displays the symbols in a variable manner in all symbol rows.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. In this case, the bridge-side RAM 107 has already stored the notice B data group. The image data included in the notice B data group is appropriately used and the initial variation data group stored in the regular area 137 is used. The drawing process is executed in the VDP 105 by appropriately using the included image data. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the symbol B is displayed on the symbol display device 31 in a situation where the symbol variation display is performed in all symbol rows.

  After that, at the timing of t5, the transfer of the normal reach data group to the bridge RAM 107 is started at the transfer timing of the normal reach data group to the bridge RAM 107 as shown in FIG. At this timing, the transfer of the normal reach data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 is completed as shown in FIG. The data capacity of the normal reach data group is set to be smaller than the capacity obtained by subtracting the data capacity of the notice B data group from the storage capacity of the bridge RAM 107. The normal reach data group is a partial area of the bridge RAM 107. Thus, it is written in an area that does not overlap with the area in which the notice B data group is stored. Incidentally, even in the situation where the normal reach data group is being transferred, the symbol display device 31 displays the notice B character in a situation where the symbol variation display is performed in all symbol rows. Yes.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the normal reach display start timing is reached as shown in FIG. In this case, the normal RAM data group is already stored in the bridge-side RAM 107, and the image data included in the normal reach data group is used as appropriate, and is included in the initial variation data group stored in the regular area 137. Drawing processing is executed in the VDP 105 using image data as appropriate. Thereby, as shown in FIG.44 (c), reach display is performed in the symbol display apparatus 31. FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, the transfer of the initial divided data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 is started at the timing of transfer of the initial divided data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 as shown in FIG. At this timing, the transfer of the initial divided data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 is completed as shown in FIG.

  The data capacity of the initial partition data group is set to be smaller than the capacity obtained by subtracting the data capacity of the normal reach data group from the storage capacity of the bridge RAM 107. The initial partition data group is a partial area of the bridge RAM 107. Thus, the data is written in an area that does not overlap with the area where the normal reach data group is stored. Further, in this case, the area in which the initial division data group is written includes the area where the previous notice B data group has been stored, and thus the previous notice B data group is deleted.

  Here, in FIG. 44 (B), for the sake of convenience, the area where the notice B data group is stored and the area where the initial segment data group is stored are shown as being the same. The size of the area on the writing side varies depending on the data capacity of the data group to be written. The same applies to other data groups. That is, a plurality of data groups are stored in the bridge RAM 107 at the same time, but the size of the area in which each data group is stored varies depending on the type of the stored data group. .

  Incidentally, even in a situation where the initial segment data group is being transferred, the symbol display device 31 performs normal reach display.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, the start timing of super reach B display is reached as shown in FIG. In this case, an initial segment data group is already stored in the bridge-side RAM 107, and drawing processing is executed in the VDP 105 using image data included in the initial segment data group as appropriate. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44D, the symbol display device 31 displays an image of the effect range of the initial division in the super reach B display.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, the operation system data group is transferred to the RAMs 137 and 107 by the transfer timing of the operation system data group to the regular area 137 and the bridge side RAM 107 as shown in FIG. Is started. In this case, first, transfer of the first operation system data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is started, and transfer of the first operation system data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed at timing t12.

  The data capacity of the first operation system data group is set smaller than the capacity obtained by subtracting the data capacity of the initial segment data group from the storage capacity of the bridge RAM 107, and the first operation system data group is stored in the bridge RAM 107. Are written in an area that does not overlap with an area in which the initial division data group is stored. Further, since the area in which the first operation system data group is written includes the area where the normal reach data group has been stored so far, the normal reach data group is erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the transfer of the first operation system data group from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 is started at the timing t13, and to the regular area 137 at the timing t14. The transfer of the first operating system data group is completed. The data capacity of the first operation system data group is set to be smaller than the capacity obtained by subtracting the data capacity of the abnormality notification data group from the storage capacity of the service area 137, and the first operation system data group is stored in the service area. It is written in an area which is a part of the area 137 and does not overlap with an area where the abnormality notification data group is stored. In FIG. 44B, for convenience, the service area 137 is shown as if only the first operating system data group is stored in the service area 137. As described above, the first operation system data group and the abnormality notification data group are stored.

  Further, at the timing t14, the transfer of the second operation system data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 is started as shown in FIG. 44B, and at the timing t15, the second operation system data to the bridge-side RAM 107 is started. The transfer of the data group is completed.

  The data capacity of the second operation system data group is set smaller than the capacity obtained by subtracting the data capacity of the initial segment data group from the storage capacity of the bridge RAM 107, and the second operation system data group is stored in the bridge RAM 107. Are written in an area that does not overlap with an area in which the initial division data group is stored. In this case, since the area where the second operation system data group is written includes the area where the first operation system data group has been stored so far, the first operation system data group is erased. .

  When the transfer of the second operation system data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 is completed, the transfer of the operation system data group from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM is completed. Incidentally, even in a situation where the operation system data group is being transferred, the effect display range of the initial division in the super reach B display is executed in the symbol display device 31.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. During the period corresponding to the operation effect (operation-corresponding effect period), the image of the effect range of the initial section is continuously displayed, and the image corresponding to the effect operation device 58 is displayed every time the effect operation device 58 is operated. This is the period displayed on the device 31. In this case, the first operation data group is already stored in the regular area 137, and the initial segment data group is still stored in the bridge RAM 107. When the production operation device 58 is operated, the drawing process is executed in the VDP 105 by appropriately using the image data included in the initial segment data group and the image data included in the first operation system data group. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (e), the character corresponding to the operation of the effect operating device 58 is displayed in the situation where the image of the effect range of the initial division in the super reach B display is displayed on the symbol display device 31. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, the operation corresponding effect period elapses at the timing of t17. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the operation device 58 for the effect is determined in advance during the operation corresponding effect period, specifically, when the operation device 58 for the effect is operated more than the reference number of times. Then, the effect range of the completed mode advances thereafter, and when the operation is not performed in a predetermined mode, the effect range of the incomplete mode advances thereafter.

  Thus, even when the production range branches into a plurality of patterns, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 44B, the image data corresponding to the production range of the incomplete mode is the first operation system. While being stored in the regular area 137 as a data group, image data corresponding to the effect range of the completion mode is stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 as a second operation system data group. Therefore, it can respond to any production range.

  When the effect range of the completion mode is executed, the drawing process is executed in the VDP 105 using image data included in the second operation system data group as appropriate. Thereby, as shown in FIG.44 (f), in the symbol display apparatus 31, the character according to a completion mode is displayed. On the other hand, when an unfinished production range is executed, drawing processing is executed in the VDP 105 by appropriately using image data included in the first operation system data group. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (g), the character corresponding to the incomplete mode is displayed on the symbol display device 31.

  After that, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. In this case, transfer of the regular data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 is started in any of the situation where the effect range of the completed mode is being executed and the situation where the effect range of the incomplete mode is being executed. Then, at the timing of t19, the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed.

  The data capacity of the regular data group is set to be smaller than the capacity obtained by subtracting the data capacity of the second operation system data group from the storage capacity of the bridge RAM 107, and the regular data group is a partial area of the bridge RAM 107. Then, the second operation system data group is written in an area that does not overlap with the stored area. Further, since the area where the common data group is written includes the area where the initial divided data group has been stored so far, the initial divided data group is deleted.

  As described above, at the timing when the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 is completed, in the situation where the effect range of the completion mode is being executed, the regular data group is immediately transferred from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the regular area 137. At the timing t20, the transfer of the regular data group to the regular area 137 is completed. In this case, the normal use area 137 already stores the abnormality notification data group, and the return target normal data group does not include the abnormality notification data group. Therefore, when the regular data group is transferred from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the regular area 137, the regular data group is written in an area that does not overlap the area where the abnormality notification data group is stored in the regular area 137.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the production range of the incomplete mode is executed, even if the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 is completed, the transfer of the regular data group to the regular area 137 is not started, and the regular data The group is saved in the bridge RAM 107.

  After that, at the timing of t21, as shown in FIG. In this case, the drawing process is executed in the VDP 105 by appropriately using image data included in the initial division data group of the common data group. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (h), the symbol display device 31 displays a stop result corresponding to the current game result. Incidentally, when the stop result is displayed, if the normal data group is restored to the normal area 137, the normal data group stored in the normal area 137 is referred to, and the normal data group is saved in the bridge RAM 107. If it is, the common data group stored in the bridge RAM 107 is referred to.

  In addition, when the production range of the incomplete mode is executed in the current game round, the transfer of the regular data group from the bridge RAM 107 to the regular area 137 is started at the timing t21 when the variable display of the symbols is finished. , T22, the transfer of the regular data group to the regular area 137 is completed. Note that the deletion of the regular data group from the bridge RAM 107 is restricted until the transfer of the regular data group to the regular area 137 is completed.

<Big hit control processing of display CPU 102>
Next, the jackpot control process in step S1402 will be described.

  The jackpot control process includes an effect control process for controlling the jackpot effect until the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result ends after the game round that results in the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and a normal jackpot result. The game control process for controlling the jackpot effect until the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is finished after the game round is completed, and the game round that is the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is finished. An effect control process for controlling the effect for jackpot until the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is completed. However, the 15R probability variation jackpot effect control process and the normal jackpot effect control process have the same processing configuration. Hereinafter, the effect control process for 15R probability variation jackpot and the explicit control process for explicit 2R probability variation jackpot will be described respectively.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the effect control process for 15R probability variation big hit.

  First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not it is after the jackpot start effect. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the post-start effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104. The flag after the start effect is stored when the end timing of the jackpot start effect is reached, and is deleted when the present jackpot effect is ended.

  If it is not after the jackpot start effect, it is determined in step S2802 whether the jackpot start effect is being performed. If the jackpot start effect is not being performed, it is determined in step S2803 whether or not an opening command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the sound lamp control device 90 has been received.

  If the opening command has not been received, the effect control process is terminated as it is. If the opening command has been received, a period corresponding to the jackpot start effect is specified in step S2804, and information on the specified period is set in the measurement counter of the work RAM 104. Note that information on the period for the jackpot start effect is stored in advance in the program ROM 103. The measurement counter is also used when measuring the elapsed time of game times, and the method of updating the counter is as described above.

  In the subsequent step S2805, the type of the drawing list information of this time is specified by referring to the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b of the work RAM 104, and the specified drawing list information is used as the drawing list information of the program ROM 103. Read from the storage area 103 b and output to the VDP 105. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays a jackpot start effect image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. .

  In the subsequent step S2806, a transfer instruction process for the all-round effect data group is executed. In the transfer instruction process, a transfer command for the all-round effect data group is read from the command storage area 103 a of the program ROM 103, and the read command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109.

  Here, as described above, when the all-round effect data group is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the read-out RAM, a part of the all-round effect data group is overwritten in the regular area 137. Therefore, in the subsequent step S2807, the common data group overwrite instruction process is executed. In the regular data group overwrite instruction process, the regular data group overwrite command is read from the command storage area 103 a of the program ROM 103, and the read command is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereafter, the effect control process is terminated.

  The bridge LSI 109 receives the transfer command for the all-round effect data group, and executes the data transfer setting process (FIG. 40) and the data transfer process (FIG. 20) described above, and sets the all-round effect data group. Transfer to the bridge-side RAM 107. Also, the VDP 105 receives the overwrite command, executes the already-described overwrite process (FIG. 41), and overwrites the regular area 137 with the first half of the data group for all round effects. At the time of overwriting, as already described, the area in which the data group excluding the abnormality notification data group is stored is overwritten in the normal data group.

  If the jackpot start effect is being performed (step S2802: YES), it is determined in step S2808 whether or not it is the drawing list setting timing. If it is not the set timing, the effect control process is terminated as it is, and if it is the set timing, the present effect control process is ended after outputting the current drawing list information in step S2809.

  In these step S2808 and step S2809, by referring to the elapsed time of the jackpot start effect measured in the measurement counter of the work RAM 104 and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b, It is determined whether or not it is set timing, and the type of drawing list information is specified. In addition, when the drawing list information is output in step S2809, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and performs a big hit start effect. The image to be advanced is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  If it is after the big hit start effect (step S2801: YES), after the start effect post-process is executed in step S2810, the effect control process is terminated. The start effect post-process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 22a is being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an open flag is stored in various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104. The open flag is stored when an open command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the sound lamp control device 90 is received, and is deleted when a close command is received.

  If not open, it is determined in step S2902 whether an open command has been received. If the release command has been received, a period for one round is specified in step S2903, and information on the specified period is set in the measurement counter of the work RAM 104. Information on a period for one round is stored in the program ROM 103 in advance.

  In the following step S2904, information on the counter for round provided in the various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104 is updated so that the counter value is incremented by one. In a succeeding step S2905, the round counter is referred.

  After that, in step S2906, by referring to the number of rounds measured by the round counter and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b, it corresponds to the start of the round related to the start of this time. The type of drawing list information is specified, and the specified drawing list information is output to the VDP 105. Thereafter, the post-start effect post-processing is terminated. In the VDP 105, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and an image corresponding to the current round is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  If the big prize opening 22a is being opened (step S2901: YES), it is determined in step S2907 whether a closing command has been received. If the close command has not been received, it is determined in step S2908 whether it is the drawing list setting timing. If it is not the set timing, the post-start effect post-processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the set timing, the present drawing list post-processing is ended after outputting the current drawing list information in step S2909.

  In these steps S2908 and S2909, the drawing list is set by referring to the elapsed time of the round effect measured by the measurement counter of the work RAM 104 and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b. It is determined whether it is timing, and the type of drawing list information is specified. In addition, when the drawing list information is output in step S2909, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and proceeds with the round effect. The image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  If a close command has been received (step S2907: YES), it is determined in step S2910 whether the counter value of the round counter is a counter value corresponding to the return target round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the counter value corresponds to 13 rounds.

  If the counter value corresponds to the return target round, the normal data group return instruction process is executed in step S2911. In the return instruction processing, the bridge LSI return command is read from the command storage area 103a of the program ROM 103, the read return command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109, and the return for VDP is performed from the command storage area 103a. The command is read and the read return command is transmitted to the VDP 105.

  Here, when the first operating system data group is overwritten on the normal area 137 in the situation where the super reach B display is being performed, the first operating system data group is still at the return instruction timing of the normal data group. A situation in which the data group is in use may occur. In this case, by sending a save-corresponding return command as a return command to the VDP 105, it is not necessary to use the first operation data group once The common data group is saved in the bridge RAM 107 until it becomes. On the other hand, when a portion of the all-round effect data group is overwritten on the regular area 137 in the situation where the jackpot effect is being performed, the data group of the first half of the all-round effect data group is The service area 137 is overwritten. Also, the return instruction timing of the regular data group is set after the first half of the rounds of all round effects have been completed. That is, the timing at which the return instruction process in step S2911 is executed is a timing at which there is no problem even if the normal data group is returned to the normal area 137. Therefore, in step S2911, the normal return command is always transmitted to the VDP 105.

  The bridge LSI 109 receives the return command, executes the return data transfer setting process (FIG. 42) already described, and transfers the regular data group to the bridge RAM 107. Further, the VDP 105 receives the normal return command, thereby executing the already-described return process (FIG. 43) and returning the normal data group to the normal area 137. At the time of this return, as already explained, the current common data group is written in an area other than the area where the abnormality notification data group is already stored in the regular area 137.

  After performing the process of step S2911, the process proceeds to step S2912. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S2910, the process proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, it is determined whether the counter value of the round counter is a counter value corresponding to the final round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the counter value corresponds to 15 rounds.

  If it is not the counter value corresponding to the final round, the post-start effect post-processing is terminated. If the counter value corresponds to the final round, in step S2913, the period for the end effect is specified, and information on the specified period is set in the measurement counter of the work RAM 104. Note that information on the period for the end effect is stored in advance in the program ROM 103.

  In subsequent step S2914, the type of the drawing list information of this time is specified by referring to the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b of the work RAM 104, and the specified drawing list information is used as the drawing list information of the program ROM 103. Read from the storage area 103 b and output to the VDP 105. Thereafter, the post-start effect post-processing is terminated. In the VDP 105, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the jackpot end effect image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  If it is determined in step S2902 that the release command has not been received, the process advances to step S2915. In step S2915, it is determined whether an ending command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the sound lamp control device 90 is received.

  If the ending command has not been received, it is determined in step S2916 whether or not it is the drawing list setting timing in the situation where the jackpot end effect is being executed. If it is not the set timing, the post-start effect post-process is terminated as it is, and if it is the set timing, the present-plot effect post-process is terminated after outputting the current drawing list information in step S2917.

  In these step S2916 and step S2917, by referring to the elapsed time of the jackpot end effect measured in the measurement counter of the work RAM 104 and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b, the drawing list is updated. It is determined whether or not it is set timing, and the type of drawing list information is specified. In addition, when the drawing list information is output in step S2917, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and the jackpot end effect is generated. The image to be advanced is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  On the other hand, if an ending command has been received (step S2915: YES), the process proceeds to step S2918. In step S2918, the contents of the current standby image are grasped. Specifically, by referring to the counter value of the background counter in the work RAM 104, the type of the background image currently set is grasped. In the following step S2919, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the standby image to be displayed using the background image grasped in step S2918 is specified, and the specified drawing list information is stored in the drawing list information of the program ROM 103. Read from area 103b and output to VDP 105. Thereafter, the post-start effect post-processing is terminated.

  The VDP 105 receives the drawing list information output in step S2919, executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays the current standby image. It is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. By the way, in the effect for jackpot, the background image used for the variable display of the symbol is not displayed.

  Next, an effect control process for the explicit 2R probability variation big hit will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot.

  First, in step S3001, it is determined whether an effect for explicit 2R probability variation big hit is in progress. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104. The effect-in-progress flag is stored when the effect for the explicit 2R probability variation big hit is started, and is deleted when the effect is ended.

  If it is not in the effect for the explicit 2R probability variation big hit, it is determined in step S3002 whether or not the opening command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the audio lamp control device 90 is received. If the opening command has not been received, the effect control process is terminated as it is. If the opening command has been received, a period for a series of effects is specified for the explicit 2R jackpot effect in step S3003, and information on the specified period is set in the measurement counter of the work RAM 104. Information on the period is stored in the program ROM 103 in advance. The measurement counter is also used when measuring the elapsed time of game times, and the method of updating the counter is as described above.

  In subsequent step S3004, the type of the drawing list information of this time is specified by referring to the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b of the work RAM 104, and the specified drawing list information is used as the drawing list information of the program ROM 103. Read from the storage area 103 b and output to the VDP 105. Thereafter, the effect control process is terminated. By receiving the drawing list information output in step S3004, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and the explicit 2R probability variation big hit. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  If it is during the effect for the explicit 2R probability variation big hit (step S3001: YES), whether or not an ending command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the audio lamp control device 90 is received in step S3005. Determine whether. If an ending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S3006.

  In step S3006, it is determined whether it is a drawing list setting timing. If it is not the set timing, the effect control process is terminated as it is. If it is the setting timing, the present rendering control process is terminated after outputting the current drawing list information in step S3007.

  In these steps S3006 and S3007, by referring to the elapsed time of the effect for the explicit 2R probability variation big hit that is measured by the measurement counter of the work RAM 104 and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b. It is determined whether or not it is a drawing list setting timing, and the type of drawing list information is specified. Further, when the drawing list information is output in step S3007, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and the explicit 2R probability variation big hit. An image for promoting the production effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has been received (step S3005: YES), the effect control process is terminated after the processes of steps S3008 and S3009 are executed. The processing in step S3008 and step S3009 is the same as the processing in step S2918 and step S2919, and the standby image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 by executing such processing.

  As described above, in the effect control process for 15R probability variation jackpot (FIG. 45), a part of the image data group used in the VDP 105 at the time of the jackpot effect is overwritten on the regular area 137, and the jackpot effect is performed. In contrast, the regular data group is restored to the regular area 137 by the end of the process, whereas the above-described overwriting and restoration are not performed in the effect control process for the explicit 2R probability variation big hit (FIG. 47).

  In the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, since the duration of each round varies according to the winning frequency to the variable winning device 22, the start timing of the production corresponding to each round is an arbitrary timing. Then, the image data group used in the VDP 105 for displaying the effects for each round is collectively transferred as a data group for all round effects from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM as described above. It is preferable. However, since the data capacity is relatively large, by overwriting a part of the data group for all round effect data group in the regular area 137, the storage capacity of the read RAM can be suppressed and each round can be used. The effect can be displayed well.

  In contrast, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the total number of rounds is set smaller and the duration of each round is definitely shorter than in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result. Become. Therefore, the data capacity of the explicit 2R probability variation big hit data group becomes relatively small, and there is no need to use the regular area 137. Therefore, it is not necessary to overwrite the common area 137 or restore the common data group.

<Abnormality notification control processing of display CPU 102>
Next, the abnormality notification control process in step S1403 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not abnormality notification is being performed. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the abnormality notification flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 104 d of the work RAM 104. The abnormality notification flag is stored when an abnormality specifying command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the sound lamp control device 90 is received, and is erased when an abnormality release command is received.

  If no abnormality notification is being performed, it is determined in step S3102 whether an abnormality identification command has been received. If it has not been received, the abnormality notification control process is terminated as it is. If it has been received, in step S3103, an abnormality notification flag is stored, and the abnormality notification state is set. In the following step S3104, the type of drawing list information for notifying abnormality is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 and output to the VDP 105. Thereafter, the abnormality notification control process ends.

  The VDP 105 receives the drawing list information output in step S3104, thereby executing the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and an abnormality notification image. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In the image, the specific content that is abnormal is shown.

  Here, the abnormality notification data group referred to for displaying the abnormality notification image in the VDP 105 is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108 as a regular data group when the power is turned on. This state is maintained while the power is turned on. Assuming a configuration in which the abnormality notification data group is not resident in the regular area 137, it is necessary to read out the image data included in the abnormality notification data group from the character ROM 106 every time the abnormality notification execution timing is reached. In the configuration in which the NAND flash memory is used, there is a concern that the start timing of the abnormality notification is delayed with respect to the occurrence timing of the abnormality due to the slow transfer speed. On the other hand, since the abnormality notification data group is resident in the regular area 137 as described above, the abnormality notification can be started immediately when an abnormality occurs.

  In addition, when super reach B display is performed as an effect for game times, or when an effect corresponding to a 15R probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is performed as a jackpot effect, a part of the data group for the effect Is overwritten in the regular area 137, the abnormality notification data group is excluded from being erased at the time of overwriting. It is possible that an abnormality will occur even in a situation where an effect for game times is being performed or a situation in which a jackpot effect is being performed. If a data group is excluded, even if an abnormality occurs in a situation where an effect for game times is being performed or a situation where a jackpot effect is being performed, abnormality notification can be started immediately. it can.

  Incidentally, even in a situation where the abnormality notification flag is stored, the display CPU 102 shifts to processing of each subroutine other than the abnormality notification control processing (game number control processing, jackpot control processing, and standby image control processing). However, in the situation where the abnormality notification flag is stored, the drawing list information is not output in the processing of these other subroutines. Specifically, although not shown in each flowchart, it is determined whether or not an abnormality notification flag is stored before each process in which drawing list information is output, and the abnormality notification flag is stored. If it is, the drawing list information is restricted from being output. However, since processing other than the output processing is executed, the transfer of the data group corresponding to the elapsed time of the game times and the elapsed time of the jackpot effect is performed even during abnormality notification.

  If the abnormality is being notified (step S3101: YES), it is determined in step S3105 whether an abnormality release command has been received. If the abnormality cancel command has not been received, it is determined in step S3106 whether it is the drawing list setting timing. If it is not the drawing list setting timing, the abnormality notification control process is terminated. If it is the set timing, in step S 3107, the type of the current drawing list information is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103 b of the program ROM 103 and output to the VDP 105. Thereafter, the abnormality notification control process ends.

  By receiving the drawing list information output in step S3107, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and advances abnormality notification. The image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In this case, the symbol display device 31 is controlled such that characters or the like indicating the specific details of the abnormality blink. In addition, it is good also as a structure which does not perform the process of step S3106-step S3107, and displays the same image at the time of abnormality notification.

  On the other hand, when the abnormality cancellation command is received (step S3105: YES), the abnormality notification state is canceled by deleting the abnormality notification flag in step S3108. Thereafter, the abnormality notification control process ends.

  By canceling the abnormality notification state, drawing list information is not output in the processing of each subroutine other than the abnormality notification control processing in the display CPU 102 (game turn control processing, jackpot control processing, and standby image control processing). The state regulated by is canceled. As a result, the drawing list information is first output in any one of the above subroutines, so that the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is changed from the abnormality notification image to the output drawing list information. Switch to a compatible image. In this case, the effect for game times and the effect for jackpots may be resumed. However, as already described, since the data group is transferred based on the display table even during abnormality notification, the effect A data group necessary for resuming is read from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure by which multiple types of abnormality types of abnormality notification object are set. In this case, main controller 60 includes information on the type of abnormality in the abnormality identification command, and display CPU 102 identifies the type of abnormality and displays an image corresponding to the identification result when the abnormality identification command is received. It is good to do so.

<Standby image control processing of display CPU 102>
Next, the standby image control process in step S1404 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not an effect for game times is being performed. If it is during the game round effect, the standby image control process is terminated as it is. If it is not during the game round effect, the process proceeds to step S3202. In step S3202, it is determined whether a jackpot presentation is being performed. If the jackpot effect is being performed, the standby image control process is terminated as it is, and if the jackpot effect is being performed, the process proceeds to step S3203.

  In step S3203, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the common data group has been completed. If the normal data group transfer has not been completed, it is determined in step S3204 whether the normal symbol data group transfer has been completed. If the transfer of the normal symbol data group is not completed, the standby image control process is terminated as it is. If the transfer of the normal symbol data group has been completed, it is determined in step S3205 whether or not it is the standby image update timing. This update timing is set as a period corresponding to a predetermined number of repetition cycles in the display CPU 102, for example, once every 20 msec.

  If it is not the update timing, the standby image control process is terminated as it is. If it is the update timing, in step S 3206, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the update of the current standby image is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103 b of the program ROM 103. Output to VDP105. Thereafter, the standby image control process ends. The VDP 105 receives the drawing list information output in step S3206, thereby executing the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and updating the standby image. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  Here, when the transfer of the normal data group is not completed, the transfer of the normal symbol data group is completed when the first background data group and the normal symbol data group are used when the power is turned on. Although the transfer to the area 137 has been completed, the transfer of the second background data group to the regular area 137 has not been completed. That is, the transfer of the data group corresponding to the full display mode is not completed when the power is turned on, but the transfer of the data group corresponding to the reference display mode is completed. By starting the display of the standby image in such a situation, the display of the standby image is a power source as compared with the configuration in which the standby image display is not started until the transfer of the data group corresponding to the full display mode is completed. It can be started early after startup.

  On the other hand, if the transfer of the common data group has been completed (step S3203: YES), the process proceeds to step S3207. In step S3207, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command is received from the sound lamp control device 90. If an operation generation command has been received, background counter update processing is executed in step S3208. As already described, two types of display modes are set: a first display mode in which the first background image is displayed and a second display mode in which the second background image is displayed. Accordingly, in step S3208, if the counter value corresponds to the first display mode, the counter value is updated to the second display mode. If the counter value corresponds to the second display mode, the first display is performed. Update to the counter value corresponding to the mode.

  In subsequent step S3209, it is determined whether or not the background counter has a counter value corresponding to the first display mode. If the counter for the background corresponds to the first display mode, the process proceeds to step S3210. In step S3210, the type of the drawing list information corresponding to the first background image and the current stop symbol in each symbol row is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 to obtain the VDP 105. Output to. Thereafter, the effect control process is terminated. The VDP 105 receives the drawing list information output in step S3210, and executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and the first background image is displayed. The used standby image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  If the background counter is not a counter value corresponding to the first display mode (step S3209: NO), the process proceeds to step S3211. In step S3211, the type of the drawing list information corresponding to the second background image and the current stop symbol in each symbol row is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 to obtain the VDP 105. Output to. Thereafter, the effect control process is terminated. The VDP 105 receives the drawing list information output in step S3211, thereby executing the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and the second background image is displayed. The used standby image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  Here, the first background data group and the second background data group referred to in order to display the background image in the VDP 105 are the regular data group from the character ROM 106 to the regular area of the VDP RAM 108 when the power is turned on. This state is maintained in a situation where a game-playing effect or a jackpot effect is not performed while the power is turned on. Assuming a configuration in which these background data groups are not stored in the regular area 137, it is necessary to read image data from the character ROM 106 every time the display mode is switched, and a NAND flash memory is used for the character ROM 106. In such a configuration, there is a concern that the timing at which the display mode is switched becomes late with respect to the operation timing of the effect operating device 58 due to the slow transfer speed. On the other hand, since each background data group is stored in the regular area 137 as described above, the display mode can be switched immediately when the production operation device 58 is operated.

  If it is determined in step S3207 that an operation generation command has not been received, it is determined in step S3205 whether or not it is a standby image update timing. If it is not the update timing, the standby image control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the update timing, in step S 3206, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the update of the current standby image is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103 b of the program ROM 103. Output to VDP105. Thereafter, the standby image control process ends. The VDP 105 receives the drawing list information output in step S3206, thereby executing the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and updating the standby image. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  By using a NAND flash memory as the character ROM 106 of the display control device 100, it is possible to increase the capacity while reducing the manufacturing cost as compared with a configuration using a NOR flash memory. Further, by using the NAND flash memory, rewriting can be repeatedly performed in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the development cost can be suppressed. However, the NAND flash memory has a slower data transfer rate than the NOR flash memory. In contrast, read-out RAMs such as the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108 are provided, and image data is not read out from the character ROM 106 at the drawing timing of the VDP 105, but in advance to the bridge-side RAM 107 or the VDP-side RAM 108. The transferred image data is read out. As a result, the time required for reading out image data in the VDP 105 can be shortened, and image drawing can be performed satisfactorily.

  A series of effects is divided into a plurality of effect ranges, and a data group corresponding to each effect range is sequentially transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107, and is not a data group already stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 at the time of transfer. It is configured to overwrite the required data group. More specifically, a data group corresponding to the rear side production range set to be executed after the predetermined production range in a situation where the predetermined production range is being executed is transferred to the bridge RAM 107. In this case, the data group corresponding to the rear effect range is overwritten on the data group corresponding to the front effect range that has been executed before the predetermined effect range. Thus, since it is not necessary to store all the data groups in the read RAM at the same time, the storage capacity of the read RAM can be made smaller than that of the character ROM 106, and the cost of the read RAM can be reduced. On the other hand, the capacity of the character ROM 106 can be favorably realized. Further, when overwriting a data group, the data group corresponding to the effect range being executed is not erased as described above, so that the execution of the effect range is not affected.

  Each of the super reach A data group, the super reach B data group, the 15R probability variation jackpot data group, and the normal jackpot data group is divided into a plurality of data groups. As a result, even when an effect range with a large data capacity is executed, a plurality of divided data groups are sequentially transferred to the read RAM, and unnecessary data groups are sequentially deleted. For this reason, the storage capacity required for the read RAM can be reduced compared to a configuration in which a data group corresponding to a predetermined additional production range is transferred together.

  On the other hand, the data group for the notice A, the data group for the notice B, and the data group for the normal reach for which the data capacity is small and the execution time of the presentation is short are not divided into a plurality of data groups, thereby transferring a plurality of data groups in a short time. There is no need to perform this, and it is possible to prevent the processing related to the transfer of the data group from becoming complicated.

  When the symbol display of the game times and the effect for jackpot are executed on the symbol display device 31, a display table is created in advance, and each drawing timing is referred to by referring to information set in the display table. The drawing content at is determined. In this case, the transfer start timing of each divided data group is set in association with each drawing timing in the display table. Thereby, the display CPU 102 can refer to the display table and suitably perform the drawing of the image on the symbol display device 31 and the transfer of the divided data groups while linking each other.

  In the configuration in which the transfer start timing is set by linking to the drawing contents from the start to the end of the effect as described above, the effect is preferably advanced while referring to a series of display tables from the start to the end of the effect. . However, assuming a configuration in which a display table is prepared in advance for each series of effects from the start to the end, the data capacity becomes large. That is, there are a notice display and a super reach display in the effect range that can be performed in the middle of a series of effects, and a plurality of kinds of the notice display and the super reach display are set. Also, in each game round, when only one notice display is executed, when any one of plural kinds of notice displays and one of plural kinds of super reach displays are executed in combination, the notice display In some cases, both the super reach display and the super reach display are not executed. In this case, in the configuration in which a series of display tables from the start to the end of the production is prepared in advance, it is necessary to cover all the above patterns, and the data capacity of each display table is large.

  On the other hand, a variable display table is prepared in advance for each production range, and a display table is created by combining tables acquired from the variable display tables. Further, in each variation display table, the data group transfer start timing required in the production range corresponding to the variation display table is set. As a result, it is sufficient that the tables prepared in advance are prepared for each type of effect range, and furthermore, since each table is for the corresponding effect range, the data capacity of each table is reduced. Therefore, the above-described effects can be achieved while suppressing the storage capacity required in the program ROM 103.

  In game times where a jackpot result occurs, a display table including a jackpot effect is created at the start of the game time, and the transfer start timing of the data group for starting the jackpot effect is the same as the effect for the game times. It is set as an intermediate timing. As a result, there is no data group transfer waiting time from the end of the game times to the start of the jackpot effect. In the configuration, a jackpot presentation table is set corresponding to the type of the jackpot presentation, and the transfer start timing for the data group used in the corresponding presentation range is set in each jackpot presentation table. Has been. Therefore, in a configuration in which a display table including a jackpot effect is created at the start of game times, the data capacity of the table that should be stored in advance is suppressed, and as a result, the necessary storage capacity in the program ROM 103 is suppressed. be able to.

  The VDP 105 can access all areas of the bridge-side RAM 107 at the read timing, and the write control unit 121 can access all areas of the bridge-side RAM 107 at the transfer timing. This increases the degree of freedom with respect to the capacity of a group of information that can be stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 at a time, compared to a configuration in which the area of the bridge-side RAM 107 is divided into a plurality of areas and switched between reading and transfer. Further, when a plurality of types of data groups are stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 at the same time, the degree of freedom in selecting the combination of data groups stored at the same time is increased.

  In the above configuration, when the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge-side RAM 107, the write controller 121 restricts access to the bridge-side RAM 107, and when the VDP 105 is not accessing the bridge-side RAM 107, the write controller 121. Is configured to access the bridge-side RAM 107. As a result, the inconvenience that the write control unit 121 overwrites the data group in the area being read by the VDP 105 is suppressed.

  A cache buffer 123 is provided in the write control unit 121, and unit data is transferred to the cache buffer 123 while the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge-side RAM 107, and the cache is stored in a situation where the VDP 105 does not access the bridge-side RAM 107. Unit data is transferred from the buffer 123 to the bridge RAM 107. As a result, the read timing of the image data from the bridge RAM 107 by the VDP 105 and the write timing of the image data to the bridge RAM 107 by the write controller 121 are adjusted, and both operations can be performed satisfactorily.

  A VDP RAM 108 is provided as a read RAM separately from the bridge RAM 107, and the VDP RAM 108 is connected to the VDP 105 without passing through the bridge LSI 109. Thus, in a situation where the VDP 105 creates drawing data using the image data transferred to the VDP RAM 108, the write controller 121 can transfer the data group to the bridge RAM 107. Thereby, the creation of the drawing data and the transfer of the data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 can be performed in parallel, and the speed of the drawing process can be increased.

  The VDP RAM 108 is provided with a regular area 137 for storing a regular data group. The regular data group stored in the regular area 137 is image data processed by the VDP 105 to display a predetermined image in response to a specific event that occurs at an arbitrary timing, and the regular data transferred to the regular area 137 The group is stored and held as long as the situation in which the corresponding specific event can occur continues. As a result, when a specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, the time required for reading the image data corresponding to the specific event in the VDP 105 can be shortened, and the image corresponding to the specific event can be displayed smoothly. Can do.

  The regular area 137 is provided not in the bridge RAM 107 but in the VDP RAM 108. Assuming a configuration in which the common area 137 is provided in the bridge-side RAM 107, a specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the write control unit 121 can adapt to the arbitrary timing on the bridge side. It becomes necessary to transfer the data group to the RAM 107. On the other hand, since the regular area 137 is provided in the VDP-side RAM 108, the configuration for transferring the data group in the write control unit 121 can be simplified.

  The common data group includes a data group (specifically, the background data group and the normal symbol data) necessary for starting the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 31, and the regular data group. Is read from the character ROM 106 and transferred to the regular area 137 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Thereby, even if the game turn start condition is satisfied at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to immediately start the variable display of the symbol.

  When the data group necessary for starting the symbol variation display is transferred when the power is turned on, the simple symbol data group is transferred prior to that. This simple symbol data group is set to have a data capacity smaller than that of a data group necessary to start normal symbol variation display. When the transfer of the data group necessary for starting the normal symbol variation display is not in time until the game times start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is performed using the simple symbol. This allows the player to recognize that the start condition of the game times has not been invalidated even if the start condition of the game times is satisfied in a situation where the normal symbol variation display cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused in a situation where the normal symbol variation display cannot be performed.

  Since the data capacity of the simple symbol data group is smaller than the data group required to start the normal symbol variation display, the time until the symbol variation display using the simple symbol can be performed Shortening can be achieved. In addition, even if the simple symbol data group is transferred before the data group necessary for starting the normal symbol fluctuation display, the data group necessary for starting the normal symbol fluctuation display. It is possible to prevent the transfer completion timing from becoming extremely late.

  Even when the variation display of the symbols using the simple symbols is performed, the variation display time at that time is the variation display time determined by the main controller 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game time digestion time from fluctuating depending on the presence / absence of symbol variation display using simple symbols. In addition, occurrence of a situation in which the game display variation display time grasped by the main control device 60 does not coincide with the game play variation display time grasped by the display control device 100 can be suppressed.

  In a configuration in which a plurality of data groups including each data group of the regular data group are transferred from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the plurality of data groups are transferred according to a predetermined priority order. Is done. Thereby, priority can be given to the display of an image which needs to be started early after power-on.

  In a situation where a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 by processing the previously transferred data group, by transferring the data group with the lower priority in parallel, When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time required to complete the transfer of a plurality of data groups to be transferred can be shortened.

  In a configuration in which a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display device 31 in response to an operation of the production operation device 58 by being in a predetermined operation corresponding state, a data group corresponding to the predetermined image is a predetermined operation corresponding The data is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM before the situation is reached. Thereby, the time from when the production operation device 58 is operated until a predetermined image is displayed can be shortened. In a predetermined operation support situation, a data group corresponding to the predetermined image is stored and held in a read RAM. This shortens the time until a predetermined image is displayed with respect to the operation of the effect operating device 58 that occurs at an arbitrary timing.

  In the configuration in which the display mode of the symbol display device 31 is switched each time the production operation device 58 is operated in the game start waiting state, the display mode can be switched for each background data group corresponding to each display mode. The data is read from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM before the situation is reached, and stored and held in a situation where the display mode can be switched. Thereby, the display mode can be smoothly switched with respect to the operation of the effect operating device 58 that occurs at an arbitrary timing.

  In the super reach B display, if the production operation device 58 is operated more than the reference number during the operation-related production period, the production range of the completion mode proceeds thereafter, and if not operated more than the reference number The unfinished production range will progress. In this case, both of the data groups corresponding to each effect range are transferred to the read-out RAM before branching between the effect range in the completed mode and the effect range in the incomplete mode is performed. As a result, regardless of the production range, there is no data group transfer waiting time at the time of branching, and the production proceeds smoothly.

  About the data group of the production range that was not selected as the destination in the production range of the completion mode and the production range of the unfinished mode, depending on other data groups in the situation where the production of the production range selected as the destination is being executed Overwritten. Thereby, the area of the RAM for reading can be effectively used.

  When transferring the operation system data group used when executing the above-described branching mode to the RAM for reading, the operation system data for an area including at least a part of the area in which the regular data group is stored. The group is overwritten. Thereby, it is possible to collectively store operation system data groups having a relatively large data capacity in the read RAM while suppressing the storage capacity required in the read RAM.

  The regular data group to be erased is a data group that is not used when an operation system effect is executed, such as each background data group or regular symbol data group, so the regular data group is temporarily erased. Even if it does, a problem does not arise. In this return, the common data group is overwritten on the area of the data group corresponding to the side that is not selected as the destination in the production range of the completion mode and the production range of the incomplete mode. As a result, the normal data group can be restored while effectively utilizing the read RAM area.

  On the other hand, in normal reach where the data capacity is not so large, the normal data group is erased and restored in a relatively short time by not overwriting the area where the common data group is stored. It can be suppressed.

  In the 15R probability variation jackpot effect and the regular jackpot effect, when the all-round effect data group is transferred to the read-out RAM, the data group is overwritten on the area in which the regular data group is stored. . As a result, it is possible to collectively store all round effect data groups having a relatively large data capacity in the read RAM while suppressing the storage capacity required in the read RAM.

  The regular data group to be erased is a data group that is not used when the big hit effect is executed, such as the background data group or the normal symbol data group, so the regular data group is temporarily erased. Even if it does, a problem does not arise. In addition, since the common data group to be erased is restored by the end of the jackpot effect, when it is necessary to display the image using the common data group, the display of the image is improved. It can be carried out.

  On the other hand, in the effect for the explicit 2R probability variation big hit where the data capacity is not so large, the area where the common data group is stored is not overwritten, so that the regular data group can be erased and restored in a relatively short time. The occurrence of the situation to do is suppressed.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the hardware configuration of the display control device 100 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of the display control apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 50, unlike the first embodiment, the VDP side RAM 108 and the bridge side RAM 107 are not provided, and the RAM for reading image data from the character ROM 106 in advance is the read RAM 161. It has been aggregated. The read RAM 161 is connected to an input / output driver circuit 122 provided in the bridge LSI 109, and is connected to each of the VDP 105 and the write control unit 121 through the input / output driver circuit 122.

  The write control unit 121 transfers various image data groups stored in the character ROM 106 to the read RAM 161 based on an instruction from the display CPU 102. In addition, the VDP 105 executes a drawing process on the symbol display device 31 using a data group for various images stored in the read RAM 161. Since the read RAM 161 for reading the data group in advance is connected to the bridge LSI 109 and aggregated, the data group need only be transferred from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM 161 in advance. Compared with the first embodiment that requires the transfer of a data group to the side RAM 108, the process related to the transfer of the data group can be simplified.

  However, in the first embodiment, since the VDP side RAM 108 is connected to the VDP 105 without going through the input / output driver circuit 122, in the situation where the data group stored in the VDP side RAM 108 is referenced during the drawing process of the VDP 105. The VDP 105 does not access the bridge-side RAM 107. In this situation, the write control unit 121 can access the bridge-side RAM 107. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the read RAM 161 is connected to the bridge LSI 109 and aggregated, the opportunity for the write control unit 121 to access the read RAM 161 is reduced.

  In this case, a cache buffer 123 is provided in the bridge LSI 109, and image data read from the character ROM 106 can be temporarily stored. Therefore, image data is read out to the cache buffer 123 during a period when the read control unit 121 cannot access the read RAM 161, and the read image data is written into the read RAM 161 when it becomes an accessible period. Can do. This makes it possible to transfer the data group to the read RAM 161 satisfactorily.

  The storage capacity of the read RAM 161 is set smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 106. In this case, although the storage capacity of the read RAM 161 can be reduced, it is necessary to appropriately change the data group to be read to the read RAM 161, so that the data group to be read to the read RAM 161 is well adjusted. In addition, a regular area 162 and a change area 163 are set.

  In the common area 162, common data groups such as an abnormality notification data group, a normal symbol data group, and each background data group are read out as in the first embodiment. In the change area 163, a change data group such as a notice data group or a normal reach data group is read and a data group to be read is changed as appropriate. The configuration appropriately changed is the same as the configuration related to the transfer of the data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 in the first embodiment. By providing the regular area 162, it is possible to satisfactorily execute a drawing process in response to a drawing instruction generated at an arbitrary timing, and by providing the change area 163, a series of relatively long periods of time can be performed. It is possible to satisfactorily execute a drawing process for displaying each image of the effect.

  Further, in the above configuration, when a game group effect or a jackpot effect is performed, when it is necessary to read a data group having a relatively large amount of data to the read RAM 161, the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, the data area is overwritten to the common area 162, and thereafter, the common data group is restored. In this case, since the common area 162 is aggregated in the read RAM 161, the transfer from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM 161 may be performed when the data group to be overwritten or the common data group to be restored is transferred. At this time, the VDP 105 is not interposed. Therefore, complication of processing at the time of overwriting and restoration can be suppressed, and the time required for overwriting and restoration can be shortened.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the hardware configuration of the display control device 100 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of the display control apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 51, unlike the first embodiment, a first bridge side RAM 171 and a second bridge side RAM 172 are provided as a bridge side RAM, and the first bridge side RAM 171 and the second bridge are provided. Each of the side RAMs 172 is individually connected to the input / output driver circuit 173 of the bridge LSI 109. Further, the input / output driver circuit 173 is connected to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 and also to the VDP 105.

  The input / output driver circuit 173 sets one of the first bridge side RAM 171 and the second bridge side RAM 172 as a data group write target by the write control unit 121, and sets the other as a data group read target by the VDP 105, Further, it has a function of appropriately switching between a writing target side and a reading target side as necessary.

  Specifically, in a series of effects including the first effect range, the second effect range, and the third effect range so as to be continuous in this order, the first corresponding to the first effect range. Is stored in the first bridge RAM 171 and the second data is stored in the first bridge RAM 171 and the second bridge RAM 172 corresponds to the second effect range. The data group becomes a write target by the write control unit 121. In this case, the symbol display device 31 displays an image of the first effect range.

  After that, when the first effect range ends, the second data group stored in the second bridge RAM 172 becomes a read target by the VDP 105, and the first bridge RAM 171 corresponds to the third effect range. The third data group is switched to a write target by the write control unit 121. In this case, the symbol display device 31 displays an image of the second effect range.

  Thereafter, when the second effect range ends, the third data group stored in the first bridge-side RAM 171 becomes a target to be read by the VDP 105, and the second bridge-side RAM 172 provides effects after the third effect range. The data group corresponding to the range is switched to a write target by the write control unit 121. In this case, the symbol display device 31 displays an image of the third effect range.

  According to this configuration, the reading of the data group by the VDP 105 from one of the first bridge RAM 171 and the second bridge RAM 172 and the writing of the data group by the write controller 121 to the other are performed in parallel. Therefore, it is not necessary to adjust the read timing by the VDP 105 and the write timing by the write control unit 121. Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is not necessary to perform processing for adjusting both timings, and the degree of freedom in setting the read timing by the VDP 105 and the write timing by the write control unit 121 is increased.

  Incidentally, the present embodiment focuses on the remarkable effect that the degree of freedom in setting both timings can be increased, and the write timing is adjusted using the cache buffer 123 as in the first embodiment. Therefore, the cache buffer 123 is not provided. However, a cache buffer 123 may be provided.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the hardware configuration of the display control device 100 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of the display control apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 52, unlike the first embodiment, the VDP 105, the bridge LSI 109, the bridge RAM 107, and the VDP RAM 108 are not provided. Instead, in this embodiment, a three-dimensional image processing unit 181 and a read RAM 182 are provided. The three-dimensional image processing unit 181 is connected to the display CPU 102, the character ROM 183, and the reading RAM 182, and has a function of transferring a data group from the character ROM 183 to the reading RAM 182 and a data group transferred to the reading RAM 182. And has a function of displaying a three-dimensional image on the symbol display device 31.

  A function for displaying a 3D image in the 3D image processing unit 181 will be described.

  The 3D image processing unit 181 stores the viewpoint and character ROM 183 in advance in a world coordinate system, which is a 3D coordinate system corresponding to a virtual 3D space, in order to realize a display mode according to a command from the display CPU 102. Various stored objects are arranged, and so-called geometry calculation processing is performed in which the objects are changed or the viewpoint is displaced. Also, projection information that is two-dimensional coordinate information obtained by projecting an object in the world coordinate system onto a projection plane based on the line of sight from the viewpoint is generated. Based on the projection information, a position corresponding to the vertex of each polygon of each object in the frame memory provided in the drawing storage unit 195, that is, an address in the frame memory is obtained. Further, the texture stored in advance in the character ROM 183 is deformed so as to match the vertex of each polygon of each object, and the texture is drawn based on each address in the frame memory. When the drawing of textures on all objects is completed, a display image is generated in the frame memory, and the display image is output to the symbol display device 31.

  Note that an object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in the world coordinate system, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by vertices of a plurality of three-dimensional coordinates. The texture is an image to be pasted on each polygon of the object, and includes images corresponding to the object by pasting the texture on the object, for example, a normal symbol, a simple symbol, a background image, an abnormality notification image, and the like. A display image is generated. The object image data is stored in advance in the object data area 184 of the character ROM 183, the texture image data is stored in advance in the texture data area 185 of the character ROM 183, and the background image image data is It is previously stored in the background data area 186 of the character ROM 183.

  A more specific hardware configuration of the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 will be described.

  As a configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image, the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 includes an I / F 191 for exchanging data with the display CPU 102, the character ROM 183, and the reading RAM 182 and data received by the I / F 191. A geometry calculation processing unit 192 that performs coordinate calculation processing based on the data, a rendering processing unit 193 that generates a display image based on data received by the I / F 191, and a rendering processing unit that displays color information based on a plurality of types of color palettes A pallet processing unit 194 that is appropriately provided to 193, a drawing storage unit 195 having a plurality of frame memories including a first frame memory 195a and a second frame memory 195b, and a plurality of frame memories provided in the drawing storage unit 195 Selector unit 196 for switching and display image A video output unit 197 to output the symbol display device 31, and a.

  The I / F 191 receives various commands transmitted from the display CPU 102. The I / F 191 includes coordinates such as a storage address of an object stored in the read RAM 182, an arrangement coordinate value for arranging the object in the world coordinate system, and an arrangement coordinate value for setting a viewpoint, which are included in the various commands. The calculation target data is supplied to the geometry calculation processing unit 192, and the storage address data such as the texture transferred to the read RAM 182 included in the command to be image drawing is supplied to the rendering processing unit 193. Further, the I / F 191 provides the palette processing unit 194 with a color palette for instructing the color of the texture included in the command.

  The geometry calculation processing unit 192 performs coordinate calculation processing accompanying movement or rotation of a three-dimensional coordinate point based on data given from the I / F 191. Specifically, the geometry calculation processing unit 192 reads out a plurality of polygonal objects arranged in the local coordinate system based on the storage address of the object. Then, based on the coordinate value where the object with the posture rotated based on the rotation angle data is arranged, the coordinate value of each polygon of the object in the world coordinate system when arranged in the world coordinate system is calculated. Here, the local coordinate system is an object-specific coordinate system in which an object having a reference posture is set. Also, the coordinate value of each polygon of the object in the viewpoint coordinate system based on the viewpoint set based on the coordinate value and the rotation angle of the viewpoint is calculated. Furthermore, projection information including two-dimensional coordinate values of each polygon of the object on the projection plane when the object is projected onto the projection plane set perpendicular to the line of sight based on the viewpoint is calculated. Then, the geometry calculation processing unit 192 gives the projection information to the rendering processing unit 193.

  The display CPU 102 performs processing for determining the movement and rotation of the three-dimensional coordinate point and the movement and rotation of the viewpoint. The geometry calculation processing unit 192 reads out the object based on the information determined by the display CPU 102. In addition, the projection information may be calculated at the same time.

  The palette processing unit 194 includes a palette RAM (not shown) that stores a plurality of types of color palettes composed of a plurality of types of color information written by the display CPU 102. The palette processing unit 194 has a color palette specified by the display CPU 102 through the I / F 191. Data is given to the rendering processing unit 193. Giving a color palette means giving the storage address of the color palette stored in the palette RAM, for example, to the rendering processing unit 193, and the rendering processing unit 193 stores the display image when the display image is generated. Refer to color information. Each data of the color palette, that is, each palette is assigned to each dot constituting the texture, and the entire texture is drawn by drawing each dot with the color information of each palette.

  The rendering processing unit 193 first reads a background image based on the storage address where the background image data in the read RAM 182 is transferred and stored, and the background image is provided in the frame provided in the drawing storage unit 195. The drawing is performed in the memory, and each polygon of the object based on the projection information is developed in the frame memory. Further, the rendering processing unit 193 transfers the texture read from the read RAM 182 to each polygon in the frame memory based on the storage address and the color palette data to which the texture data in the read RAM 182 is transferred and stored. Draw on the corresponding area.

  In the above-described geometry calculation processing unit 192 and rendering processing unit 193, clipping processing for determining a portion to be displayed on the display screen G, hidden surface processing for determining a visible portion and an invisible portion according to the context of the polygon, and a light source Processing such as shading calculation processing for calculating the degree of light hitting and the state of reflection is also appropriately performed.

  The selector unit 196 selects a plurality of frame memories as appropriate. Specifically, the selector unit 196, when the image is drawn by the rendering processing unit 193 described above, is a plurality of frame memories provided in the drawing storage unit 195, for example, the first frame memory 195a or the second frame memory. Either one of the two-frame memories 195b is selected. In this case, a display image is generated in the selected frame memory. On the other hand, the selector unit 196 reads a display image for which display image generation has already been completed from the frame memory on the side where drawing has not been performed, and sends the display image to the video output unit 197. The selector unit 196 sequentially switches between the reading-side frame memory and the drawing-side frame memory. The video output unit 197 converts the display image sent from the selector unit 196 into a video signal and outputs the video signal to the symbol display device 31.

  With the above configuration, the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 displays a three-dimensional image corresponding to the drawing instruction from the display CPU 102 on the symbol display device 31. For example, as already described in the first embodiment, an image corresponding to an effect for game times, an image corresponding to an effect for jackpot, and the like are displayed on the symbol display device 31.

  Next, a function for transferring a data group from the character ROM 183 to the reading RAM 182 in the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 will be described.

  Prior to the description of the configuration for transferring the data group in the 3D image processing unit 181, the configuration of the character ROM 183 and the read RAM 182 will be described. Like the character ROM 183 in the first embodiment, the character ROM 183 is configured using a NAND flash memory, and has a data capacity of 4 Gbits, for example. The character ROM 183 is connected to the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 through, for example, a 16-bit bus line.

  The read RAM 182 is a VRAM made of a volatile semiconductor memory, and for example, DDR is used. As the read RAM 182, for example, four 512 Mbit DDRs are provided, so that the storage capacity is about 2 Gbits. Each of these four DDRs is connected to the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 by, for example, a 16-bit bus line. Here, while the storage capacity of the character ROM 183 is about 4 Gbits, the storage capacity of the read RAM 182 is about 2 Gbits. That is, the storage capacity of the read RAM 182 is set smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 183.

  The three-dimensional image processing unit 181 includes a writing control unit 198 as a configuration for transferring image data from the character ROM 183 to the reading RAM 182. The write control unit 198 receives a transfer command as described in the first embodiment from the display CPU 102 via the I / F 191. Then, the image data corresponding to the received transfer command is read from the character ROM 183 via the I / F 191 and the read image data is written to the read RAM 182.

  Here, the read RAM 182 is provided with a regular area 201, and areas for storing regular data groups are set in the areas 184 to 186 of the character ROM 183. When the power supply is turned on, the writing control unit 198 reads the common data group from each of the areas 184 to 186 of the character ROM 183 and writes the read common data group to the common area 201 as in the first embodiment.

  The normal data group includes at least an abnormality notification data group, a normal symbol data group, and each background data group. Each data group of the regular data group includes object data and texture data. Accordingly, it is not necessary to read data from the character ROM 183 having a low transfer speed each time a drawing instruction is generated at an arbitrary timing, and it is only necessary to read data from the read RAM 182 having a high transfer speed. The image can be displayed favorably.

  The read RAM 182 is provided with a change area 202 in addition to the regular area 201, and the write control unit 198 performs a game-playing effect and a jackpot effect, as in the first embodiment. Among the data groups of the production ranges that move back and forth in time series, in the situation where the front data group is stored in the change area 202 and used for image display, the front data group in the change area 202 is used. Is transferred in advance to an area different from the area in which is stored. Each of these data groups includes object data and texture data used for each production range. Thereby, in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the read RAM 182 is smaller than that of the character ROM 183, an image corresponding to the effect for game times and the effect for jackpots can be displayed favorably.

  Note that, in the above configuration, similarly to the first embodiment, the configuration may be applied in which the regular area 201 is overwritten and the regular data group is restored after the game round effect or the jackpot effect. Good. In this case, while suppressing the storage capacity of the read RAM 182, it is possible to satisfactorily display an image in response to a drawing instruction generated at an arbitrary timing, and it is possible to simultaneously read a data group having a large data capacity.

  In addition, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 52, a cache buffer 203 is provided in the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 and data is read from the read RAM 182 to display an image, as in the first embodiment. The timing and the timing of transferring the data group from the character ROM 183 to the reading RAM 182 may be adjusted.

  In addition, a configuration in which the bridge LSI 109 is not provided as illustrated in FIG. 52 may be applied to a configuration in which a two-dimensional image is displayed instead of a configuration in which a three-dimensional image is displayed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the type of data group transferred as a regular data group to the regular area 137 when the power is turned on is different from that in the first embodiment. FIG. 53 shows an initial setting process executed by the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 in place of the normal data group initial setting process in the first embodiment.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether an initial setting command is received from the display CPU. If an initial setting command has not been received, it is determined in step S3302 whether or not an initial setting state has been reached. If it is not in the initial setting state (step S3302: NO), the initial setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an initial setting command has been received (step S3301: YES), in step S3303, the initial setting state is set and the inspection data group transfer state is set. Here, when setting various states, a setting flag corresponding to the state to be set is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121, and when releasing various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be canceled is erased. Done.

  By setting the transfer state of the inspection data group, the write control unit 121 executes the data transfer process (FIG. 20), and the transfer of the inspection data group from the character ROM 183 to the bridge-side RAM 107 is executed. However, unlike the first embodiment, the inspection data group is not transferred to the regular area 137 of the VDP RAM 108.

  After executing the process of step S3303, the process proceeds to step S3304. If it is determined in step S3302 that the current state is the initial setting state, the process also proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, it is determined whether the inspection data group has been transferred. This determination is performed by determining whether or not a completion flag corresponding to the transfer state of the test data group is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121. If it is determined that the inspection data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the inspection data group is canceled in step S3305. In this transfer state release, both the transfer state setting flag and the completion flag corresponding to the current release target in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121 are erased.

  In step S3305, the transfer state of the initial display data group is set. Thus, in the next data transfer process (FIG. 20), the initial display data group is transferred from the character ROM 183 to the bridge-side RAM 107. In this case, the write control unit 121 transfers the initial display data group so as not to overwrite the initial display data group in the area in the bridge RAM 107 where the inspection data group is stored. Further, the initial display data group is not transferred to the regular area 137 of the VDP RAM 108.

  In a succeeding step S3306, a transfer completion signal of the inspection data group is output to the display CPU. The display CPU 102 receives the transfer completion signal of the inspection data group, makes an affirmative determination in step S802 of the main process (FIG. 18), proceeds to step S803, and instructs the VDP 105 to draw an inspection image. I do.

  If the inspection data group has not been transferred (step S3304: NO) or after the processing of step S3306 has been executed, it is determined in step S3307 whether the initial display data group has been transferred.

  If it is determined that the initial display data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the initial display data group is canceled and the transfer state of the simple symbol data group is set in step S3308. As a result, in the next data transfer process (FIG. 20), the simple symbol data group is transferred from the character ROM 183 to the bridge-side RAM 107. In this case, the writing control unit 121 does not overwrite the simple symbol data group in the area where the inspection data group and the initial display data group in the bridge RAM 107 are stored. Perform group transfers. The simple symbol data group is not transferred to the regular area 137 of the VDP RAM 108.

  In the subsequent step S3309, a transfer completion signal for the initial display data group is output to the display CPU. The display CPU 102 receives the transfer completion signal of the initial display data group and, when the display period of the inspection image has elapsed, makes an affirmative determination in step S805 of the main process (FIG. 18). In step S 806, the VDP 105 is instructed to draw an initial display image.

  If the initial display data group has not been transferred (step S3307: NO) or after the processing of step S3309 has been executed, it is determined in step S3310 whether the simple symbol data group has been transferred.

  If it is determined that the simple symbol data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the simple symbol data group is canceled and the transfer state of the regular data group is set in step S3311. In this case, the normal data group includes an abnormality notification data group, a normal symbol data group, and each background data group. As a result, in the next data transfer process (FIG. 20), the regular data group is transferred from the character ROM 183 to the bridge RAM 107. In this case, the writing control unit 121 does not overwrite the common data group over the area in which the inspection data group, the initial display data group, and the simple symbol data group in the bridge RAM 107 are stored. Transfer common data group.

  In the subsequent step S3312, a transfer completion signal of the simple symbol data group is output to the display CPU. When the display CPU 102 receives a change command at a timing after the transfer of the normal symbol data group or the background data group has not been completed after receiving the transfer completion signal of the simple symbol data group, A drawing instruction is performed so that the variation display of the symbols by the simple symbols is performed.

  In the subsequent step S3313, a transfer start signal for the regular data group is output to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 receives the transfer start signal of the normal data group, makes an affirmative determination in step S1101 of the initial transfer process (FIG. 21), and uses the normal data group transferred to the bridge side RAM 107 as the normal use of the VDP side RAM 108. Transfer to area 137.

  When the simple symbol data group has not been transferred (step S3310: NO) or after the process of step S3313 is executed, it is determined in step S3314 whether the common data group has been transferred. If the common data group has not been transferred, the initial setting process is terminated. If the common data group has been transferred, the initial setting process is terminated after canceling the initial setting state in step S3315.

  According to the above configuration, the data capacity of the regular data group can be suppressed, and the storage capacity allocated as the regular area 137 can be suppressed. In addition, the period until the display of the inspection image and the initial display image after the power is turned on and the period until it becomes possible to perform the variable display of the symbols using the simple symbols are shortened. Can do.

  Incidentally, the test data group, the initial display data group, and the simple symbol data group stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 as a result of executing the above initial setting process are used for game replay when the variable symbol display is normally performed. When the data group for displaying the image of the effect or the data group for displaying the image of the effect for the big hit is transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107, the data is deleted. Further, in this embodiment, after the data area for displaying the effect image for game times and the data group for displaying the effect image for jackpot are overwritten on the normal area 137, the normal data group is restored. When performing, the normal data group and each background data group are restored without naturally returning the test data group, the initial display data group, and the simple symbol data group.

  The configuration in which the test data group, the initial display data group, and the simple symbol data group are excluded from the regular data group as described above is applied to the second embodiment and the fourth embodiment. May be. In this case, in the initial setting after the power is turned on, the writing control units 121 and 198 write the inspection data group, the initial display data group, and the simple symbol data group to the change areas 163 and 202, and use the common data. The area 162 and 202 may be configured to write the abnormality notification data group, the normal symbol data group, and each background data group. Even in this case, the storage capacity required for the regular areas 162 and 202 can be reduced.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, a plurality of types of abnormalities to be notified of abnormalities are set in the symbol display device 31, and the symbol display device 31 notifies the abnormality in the symbol display device 31 correspondingly. The data configuration and processing configuration for this are different from those of the first embodiment.

  As a data structure for performing abnormality notification, the character ROM 183 includes, as an abnormality notification data group, an initial notification data group and a first abnormality corresponding to the abnormality in the first mode (for example, abnormality in magnetic detection). A classification data group and a second abnormality classification data group corresponding to the abnormality of the second mode (for example, vibration detection abnormality) are included. The initial notification data group includes image data used when an image for notifying that some abnormality has occurred is displayed on the symbol display device 31. The first abnormality type data group includes image data used when an image for notifying that the abnormality that has occurred this time is an abnormality of the first aspect is displayed on the symbol display device 31. The second abnormality type data group includes image data used when an image for notifying that the abnormality that has occurred this time is an abnormality of the second aspect is displayed on the symbol display device 31.

  Of these, the initial notification data group is transferred to the regular area 137 as part of the regular data group when the power is turned on, and each abnormality type data group constitutes a change area as necessary. Is transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107.

  Next, a processing configuration for performing abnormality notification will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification control process executed by the display CPU 102.

  First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not abnormality notification is being performed in the same manner as in step S3101 in the first embodiment. If no abnormality notification is being performed, it is determined in step S3402 whether an abnormality identification command has been received. If it has not been received, the abnormality notification control process is terminated as it is. If it has been received, the abnormality notification state is set in step S3403. In the subsequent step S3404, the type of drawing list information for initial notification is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 and output to the VDP 105.

  The VDP 105 receives the drawing list information output in step S3404, thereby executing the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and an initial notification image. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. The image notifies that some abnormality has occurred. As the image, for example, a mode of displaying characters such as “abnormality occurrence!” Is conceivable.

  In the subsequent step S3405, abnormality type determination processing is executed. In the abnormality type determination process, it is specified from the abnormality identification command received in step S3402 whether the current abnormality mode is the first mode abnormality or the second mode abnormality. And when it is specified that the abnormality is in the first aspect, the first abnormality flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104, and when it is specified that the abnormality is in the second aspect, The second abnormality flag is stored in the flag storage area 104d.

  Incidentally, when the main control device 60 transmits an abnormality specifying command based on the occurrence of the abnormality of the first aspect, the main control apparatus 60 transmits a command including information to that effect, and the abnormality of the second aspect has occurred. When an abnormality specifying command is transmitted based on the command, a command including information to that effect is transmitted.

  After that, in step S3406, the abnormality type data group transfer instruction process corresponding to the current abnormality type is executed, and then the abnormality notification control process ends. In the transfer instruction process, a transfer command for the abnormal type data group is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. The write control unit 121 transfers the abnormality type data group corresponding to the current transfer instruction to the bridge-side RAM 107 by executing the data transfer setting process (FIG. 40) and the data transfer process (FIG. 20) already described. . In this case, the abnormality type data group is transferred so that the data group that may be used after the abnormality notification is canceled in the bridge RAM 107 is not deleted. In addition, when the data group for production is transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 in a situation where the notification for the abnormality type is being performed, the data group for the production for the area in which the data group for the abnormality type is stored. It is regulated not to overwrite.

  If abnormality notification is being performed (step S3401: YES), it is determined in step S3407 whether an abnormality release command has been received. If the abnormality cancel command has not been received, it is determined in step S3408 whether or not the current abnormality type data group has been transferred. The write control unit 121 is configured to transmit a transfer completion signal to the display CPU 102 when the transfer of the abnormality type data group that has started transfer based on the transfer instruction in step S3406 is completed. In step S3408, the write control unit 121 transmits the transfer completion signal. It is determined whether or not a transfer completion signal has been received.

  If the abnormality type data group has not been transferred (step S3408: NO), it is determined in step S3409 whether or not it is the drawing list setting timing. If it is not the drawing list setting timing, the abnormality notification control process is terminated. If it is the set timing, in step S3410, the drawing list information corresponding to this time is specified from the drawing list information for initial notification, the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103, and the VDP 105 Output to. Thereafter, the abnormality notification control process ends.

  The VDP 105 receives the drawing list information output in step S3410, executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and advances the initial notification. The image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In this case, the symbol display device 31 is controlled so that characters indicating that some abnormality has occurred blinks. In addition, it is good also as a structure which does not perform the process of step S3409-step S3410, and continues displaying the same image in the case of initial notification.

  On the other hand, if the abnormality type data group has been transferred (step S3408: YES), it is determined in step S3411 whether or not it is the drawing list setting timing. If it is not the drawing list setting timing, the abnormality notification control process is terminated. If it is the set timing, in step S3412, the type notification drawing list information corresponding to this time is specified, the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103, and the VDP 105 Output to. Thereafter, the abnormality notification control process ends.

  The VDP 105 receives the drawing list information output in step S3412, thereby executing the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described to perform type notification. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. As the image, for example, a mode of displaying characters such as “abnormality occurrence in the first mode” or “abnormality generation in the second mode” is conceivable. In addition, the symbol display device 31 is controlled so that these characters blink. Note that the same image may be continuously displayed when the type is notified.

  If an abnormality cancel command has been received, an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, and the flow proceeds to step S3413. In step S3413, the abnormality notification state is canceled. In this case, the flag stored in step S3405 is deleted to specify the type of abnormality notification. Thereafter, the abnormality notification control process ends.

  According to the above-described configuration, first, it is notified that some abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality type data group corresponding to the type of abnormality of this time is transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 in the situation where the initial notification is performed. In addition, it is not necessary to store the abnormality notification data group corresponding to each abnormality type in the regular area 137 by performing the stepwise notification that the abnormality type is notified after the transfer is completed. Notification corresponding to each type of abnormality can be performed while suppressing the storage capacity required for the regular area 137.

  In addition, although the type of abnormality is not specified, an initial notification data group for notifying that an abnormality has occurred is read out to the regular area 137, and even if any type of abnormality occurs, the initial notification is first performed. By performing the initial notification using the data group, the abnormality notification can be started immediately with respect to the abnormality occurrence timing.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the image displayed on the symbol display device 31 in a situation where the symbol variation display using the normal symbol cannot be started is different from that in the first embodiment. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image displayed on the symbol display device 31 in this situation. In the following description, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 55, a center frame 211 surrounding the symbol display device 31 is provided with a main display section 212 that is controlled by the main control device 60 during the progress of each game round. The main display unit 212 is installed at a position adjacent to the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 in the center frame 211, specifically, at a position adjacent to the display screen G above.

  In the main display unit 212, the display of the variation of the pattern is started at the start of the game round, and the display of the variation of the pattern is terminated in a state where the game result of the game round is displayed at the end of the game round. Specifically, the main display unit 212 finally displays that the game result corresponds to any jackpot result, and finally indicates that the game result corresponds to the outage result. The display units are arranged side by side, and the display units are alternately lit to change the display of the picture. Finally, the display unit on the side corresponding to the game result is lit and stopped. .

  In a situation where the variable display of the symbol using the normal symbol can be started, the display control device 100 uses the symbol display device 31 in accordance with the fact that the variable display of the symbol is displayed on the main display unit 212. Normal display with variable design. On the other hand, in a situation immediately after the power supply is turned on and the transfer of the normal symbol data group and the background data group from the character ROM 183 to the reading RAM is not completed, the variation display of the symbols on the main display unit 212 is displayed. In order to draw attention, the image for indicating the position of the main display unit 212 is displayed on the symbol display device 31. Specifically, in the display CPU 102 of the display control device 100, instead of the configuration for executing the change start process with the simple symbol (FIG. 27) and the changing process with the simple symbol (FIG. 28), the main display unit as described above. Processing for displaying an image for indicating the position 212 is executed.

  According to the above configuration, even in a situation where it is not possible to start the variable display of the symbol using the normal symbol, the symbol display device 31 displays an image for causing the main display unit 212 to pay attention, In this situation, the player pays attention to the main display unit 212. As a result, the possibility that the player misunderstands that the winning has been invalidated in spite of the occurrence of winning in the operating ports 23 and 24 is reduced.

  In addition, the data group for displaying the image indicating the position of the main display unit 212 has a data capacity compared to the data group for performing the variable display of the symbols using the simple symbols as in the first embodiment. It will be smaller. Thereby, the data capacity of the data group read from the character ROM 183 to the read RAM when the power is turned on can be suppressed.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the hardware configuration and processing configuration of the display control apparatus 100 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration of the display control apparatus 100 in the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 56, an image data area 222 and a frame area 223 are set in the VDP RAM 221. The image data area 222 is an area in which image data read from the character ROM 106, more specifically, image data transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge RAM 107 and stored in the bridge RAM 107 is written. Some include a service area 137. The entire image data area 222 may be the regular area 137.

  The frame area 223 is an area used when drawing data of one frame at each drawing timing is generated in the VRAM, specifically, the VDP side RAM 221. In the frame area 223, a first frame area 224 and a second frame area 225 are set as a plurality of frame areas (or frame memories). Each of the first frame area 224 and the second frame area 225 includes a large number of unit areas in a one-to-one correspondence with the pixels of the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. Note that the frame area included in the frame area 223 is not limited to two areas, and may be a single area or three or more areas.

  For each frame area 224, 225, drawing data is created by the VDP 226 based on the drawing list information transmitted from the display CPU. In this case, the VDP 226 creates the drawing data using the image data already transferred from the character ROM 106 and stored in the image data area 222 or the bridge-side RAM 107.

  The VDP 226 is provided with a line buffer 227 instead of the drawing area 135 in the first embodiment. The line buffer 227 includes a large number of unit areas in a one-to-one correspondence with the pixels of the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In other words, the line buffer 227 includes the same number of unit areas as the frame areas 224 and 225. The VDP 226 transfers the drawing data from the frame area to be read out of the plurality of frame areas 224 and 225 to the line buffer 227 when the drawing data transfer timing to the line buffer 227 is reached. The line buffer 227 is not limited to a configuration in which only an area for a single frame is set, and a configuration in which areas for a plurality of frames are set may be employed.

  The drawing data transferred to the line buffer 227 is transferred to the image processing device 231 of the symbol display device 31 based on the image drawing timing. The transfer of the drawing data is performed via a harness 232 as a connection member that electrically connects the display control device 100 and the symbol display device 31.

  The image processing device 231 is provided with a storage unit 233 for drawing data. The storage unit 233 for drawing data includes a large number of unit areas in a one-to-one correspondence with the pixels of the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In other words, the drawing data storage unit 233 includes the same number of unit areas as the line buffer 227. The drawing data transferred from the line buffer 227 to the image processing device 231 is written in the storage unit 233 for drawing data. The image processing device 231 displays a predetermined image on the display screen G by drawing the drawing data written in the drawing data storage unit 233 on the liquid crystal display unit 234. The drawing data storage unit 233 is not limited to a configuration in which only an area for a single frame is set, and may have a configuration in which areas for a plurality of frames are set.

  Next, the processing configuration of the VDP 226 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing drawing data setting processing.

  In step S3501, it is determined whether drawing list information is received from the display CPU. If it has not been received, the present setting process is terminated, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S3502. In step S3502, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to read data from the bridge-side RAM 107 when creating drawing data corresponding to the current drawing list information.

  When it is necessary to read data from the bridge-side RAM 107, in step S3503, the data instructed by the drawing list information is read from the currently stored area, and in the subsequent step S3504, the read data is used for the frame. Write to the frame area to be written this time in area 223. Thereafter, in step S3505, it is determined whether or not the creation of the current drawing data has been completed. If it has not been completed, the process returns to step S3503, and if it has been completed, this setting process ends. .

  By executing the processing in steps S3503 to S3505, drawing data for the frame area is created using at least the image data transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107.

  On the other hand, if it is not necessary to read data from the bridge-side RAM 107 (step S3502: NO), the processing from step S3506 is executed. That is, in step S3506, output of a non-access signal is started. The non-access signal may be directly transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109, as in the first embodiment, and is output from the VDP 226 to the display CPU 102 and the non-access signal is input from the VDP 226. In the meantime, a non-access signal may be output from the display CPU 102 to the write control unit 121.

  In subsequent step S3507, data designated by the drawing list is read from the image data area 222 of the VDP RAM 221. In step S3508, the read data is read from the frame area to be written in the frame area 223 at this time. Write. Thereafter, in step S3509, it is determined whether or not the creation of the current drawing data is completed. If not completed, the process returns to step S3507, and if completed, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, output of the non-access signal is stopped. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  By executing the processing in steps S3507 to S3509, drawing data for the frame area is created using the image data transferred to the image data area 222 of the VDP RAM 221.

  Next, drawing signal output processing executed in the VDP 226 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3601, it is determined whether it is the timing for transferring drawing data to the line buffer 227 or not. If it is not the transfer timing, this output processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the transfer timing, the process proceeds to step S3602. In step S3602, output of a non-access signal is started, and in subsequent step S3603, transfer of drawing data stored in the current frame area to be read in the frame area 223 to the line buffer 227 is started. Thereafter, in step S3604, it is determined whether or not the transfer to the line buffer 227 is completed, and the process waits in step S3604 until the transfer is completed.

  If transfer of the current drawing data to the line buffer 227 is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3604, and the flow advances to step S3605. In step S3605, the line buffer 227 is referred to, and a drawing signal corresponding to the referenced data is output to the image processing device 231 through the output port 136 in step S3606. Thereafter, in step S3607, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the current drawing data has been completed. If not completed, the process returns to step S3605. If completed, the process proceeds to step S3608. In step S3608, the output of the non-access signal is stopped. Thereafter, this output process is terminated.

  When the drawing signal output process is performed, the drawing data is transferred to the drawing data storage unit 233 of the image processing device 231, and a predetermined amount of one frame is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data. Is displayed.

  Even in the present embodiment described in detail above, at least when drawing data is transferred from the line buffer 227 to the image processing device 231, the VDP 226 does not reliably access the bridge-side RAM 107, and this period is used. Thus, the data transfer to the bridge-side RAM 107 by the write control unit 121 can be performed.

  Note that the configuration in which the frame area 223 and the line buffer 227 are provided as in the present embodiment may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment, and the read RAM is on the bridge side. You may apply with respect to the structure which is not distinguished by RAM107 and VDP side RAM221.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the display control apparatus 100 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, main processing in the display CPU 102 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S3701, initial setting instruction processing for the bridge LSI 109 (specifically, the write control unit 121) is executed. Specifically, the initial setting command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109.

  By receiving the initial setting command, the bridge LSI 109 executes the normal data group initial setting process (FIG. 19) and the data transfer process (FIG. 20) as in the first embodiment. In this case, in this embodiment, in the initial setting command transmitted from the display CPU 102, the type of data group to be transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107, the transfer order of each unit data constituting each data group, and Information that can specify an address in the bridge-side RAM 107 to which each unit data is to be written is included, and the bridge LSI 109 sequentially reads out the unit data from the character ROM 106 as instructed by the information included in the initial setting command and reads out the unit data. Write the unit data to the specified address area.

  In the bridge LSI 109, in the process of transferring unit data from the character ROM 106 to the bridge RAM 107, the unit data is temporarily held in the cache buffer 123 and transferred to the bridge RAM 107 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. . In this case, in the first embodiment, the unit data is transferred from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge-side RAM 107 when a non-access signal is received from the VDP 105. The configuration is different. Specifically, the VDP 105 transmits an access signal to the display CPU 102 when accessing the bridge-side RAM 107, and when the access signal is received from the VDP 105, the access signal is transmitted from the display CPU 102 to the bridge LSI 109. Note that the above access situation includes not only the situation in which the VDP 105 is actually accessing the bridge-side RAM 107 but also the situation in which there is a possibility of access at an arbitrary timing, but only the former situation is applicable. It is good.

  In the bridge LSI 109, when the access signal is received from the display CPU 102, the unit data is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 without transferring the unit data from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge RAM 107. Do. When no access signal is received from the display CPU 102, unit data is transferred from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge-side RAM 107.

  Furthermore, when the transfer to the bridge RAM 107 is completed for a predetermined type of data group included in the regular data group, the bridge LSI 109 transmits a transfer completion signal corresponding to the data group for which the transfer has been completed to the display CPU 102. To do.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 59), after executing the process of step S3701, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not a predetermined transfer completion signal has been received from the bridge LSI 109. If a predetermined transfer completion signal has been received, in step S3703, a process for grasping the written area is executed. Specifically, the work RAM 104 stores information that allows the display CPU 102 to specify the data group that has been transferred to the bridge RAM 107 and the address of the bridge RAM 107 that stores the data group.

  In the subsequent step S3704, the VDP 105 is instructed to transfer the data group that has been transferred to the bridge RAM 107 to the VDP RAM 108 this time. Specifically, the transfer command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the VDP 105. The transfer command specifies the type of data group to be transferred from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108, the transfer order of each unit data constituting the data group, and the address of the bridge-side RAM 107 in which each unit data is stored. Information that can specify the address in the VDP side RAM 108 to which each unit data is to be written is included.

  The VDP 105 sequentially reads unit data from the bridge-side RAM 107 as instructed by the information included in the transfer instruction command, and writes the read unit data to the designated address area.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, when data is transferred from the bridge RAM 107 to the VDP RAM 108 in the VDP 105, the same data is used regardless of whether the normal data group is initialized or the normal data group is restored. Data transfer processing is executed. In addition, since the data to be transferred already exists in the bridge-side RAM 107 at the timing when the data transfer is performed by the data transfer process, whether or not the data to be transferred exists in the bridge-side RAM 107 in the data transfer process. This is not determined. Further, since the state in which the data transfer process is being performed is a state in which the VDP 105 accesses the bridge-side RAM 107, an access signal is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the display CPU 102. Furthermore, when the transfer from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108 is completed for a predetermined data group, the VDP 105 transmits a transfer completion signal corresponding to the data group for which the transfer has been completed to the display CPU 102.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 59), when a negative determination is made in step S3702, or after the process of step S3704 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3705. In step S3705, it is determined whether an access signal is received from the VDP 105. If an access signal has been received, transmission of the access signal from the display CPU 102 to the bridge LSI 109 is started in step S3706. The transmission of the access signal started to be transmitted here is stopped when the transmission of the access signal from the VDP 105 to the display CPU 102 is stopped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3705 or after the processing in step S3706 has been executed, it is determined in step S3707 whether a predetermined transfer completion signal has been received from the VDP 105. If a predetermined transfer completion signal has been received, in step S3708, a process for grasping the written area is executed. Specifically, the work RAM 104 stores information that allows the display CPU 102 to specify the data group that has been transferred to the VDP RAM 108 and the address of the VDP RAM 108 that stores the data group.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3707 or after the processing in step S3708 is executed, it is determined in step S3709 whether or not drawing of a predetermined image is necessary. If it is necessary to draw a predetermined image, a predetermined image drawing instruction process is executed in step S3710. In this case, drawing list information corresponding to the current drawing instruction timing is transmitted to the VDP 105.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3709 or after the processing in step S3710 is executed, it is determined in step S3711 whether or not the transfer of the regular data group is completed. If the transfer of the regular data group has not been completed, the process returns to step S3702, and if the transfer of the regular data group has been completed, the process proceeds to the normal process.

  Incidentally, in determining whether or not drawing of a predetermined image is necessary in step S3709, it is determined whether or not it is a drawing instruction timing for an inspection image, and whether or not it is a drawing instruction timing for an initial display image. A determination is made. In addition, it is also determined whether or not a variation command has been received. If the variation command is received in a situation where the main process is being executed, the simple symbol data group is returned to the regular area. On the condition that the transfer is completed, a process for starting the variable display with the simple symbol is executed in step S3710. The process for starting the variation display by the simple symbol is the same as the variation start process by the simple symbol (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. Furthermore, from the start to the end of the variation display with the simple symbol, the drawing list information for advancing the variation display with the simple symbol is displayed at the drawing instruction timing in the main process or the normal process. It is transmitted from the CPU 102 to the VDP 105.

  Next, drawing data setting processing in the VDP 105 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3801, it is determined whether drawing list information has been received. Here, the drawing list information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing list information. As shown in FIG. 61, the drawing list information includes information on the data to be written, information on the address of the area in the drawing area 135 where the data is to be written, and the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108. And address information of an area where the data to be written is currently stored.

  Specifically, the data to be written in one-to-one correspondence with the address information (WA (1), WA (2),... WA (n),...) Of each area in the drawing area 135. Information (KD (1), KD (2),... KD (n),...) And address information (RA (7), RA ( 108),... RA (m),. By referring to the drawing list information in the VDP 105, it is possible to uniquely identify the type of data to be written, the area where the data to be written is currently read, and in which area the data to be written should be written. Can do.

  Incidentally, when transmitting the drawing list information, the display CPU 102 grasps the contents of the image to be rendered and the area in which the image data necessary for displaying the image is stored, and the rendering list information corresponding to the grasped result Send. In this case, the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 stores a large number of drawing list information corresponding to all the assumed patterns, and the display CPU 102 selects one drawing list information from among them. It transmits to VDP105. In the pachinko machine 10, the common data group may be simultaneously stored in both the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108. In this case, the display CPU 102 stores the common data group in the VDP-side RAM 108. As a result, the drawing list information is selected. However, the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and the display CPU 102 may generate the drawing list information.

  Note that, as in the eighth embodiment, a frame area for creating drawing data is provided in the VDP-side RAM 108, and drawing data is transferred from a predetermined frame area of the frame area to the line buffer of the VDP 105. The configuration of the drawing list information may be applied to the configuration to be transferred. In this case, the drawing list information includes information on which frame area of the frame area is to be written, information on the address of each area in the frame area, information on data to be written to the area of the address, The address information of the area where the data to be written is currently read out may be included.

  In the eighth embodiment, when displaying a predetermined image on the display screen G, the display CPU 102 issues a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 before the display timing of the predetermined image. In response to the drawing instruction, the VDP 105 creates drawing data corresponding to the drawing instruction in the predetermined frame area of the frame area by the display timing and stores the created drawing data in the line buffer corresponding to the display timing. Let it be transferred. In this case, since it is necessary to grasp the display timing or the timing corresponding thereto in the VDP 105, it is preferable that the information on the timing is included in the drawing list information.

  Returning to the description of the drawing data setting process (FIG. 60), if it is determined in step S3801 that the drawing list information has not been received, the present setting process is terminated, and the drawing list information is received in step S3801. If it is determined that it is, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, by referring to the drawing list information received this time, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to read data from the bridge-side RAM 107 when creating drawing data corresponding to the current drawing list information.

  If it is necessary to read data from the bridge-side RAM 107, output of an access signal is started in step S3803. The access signal is not transmitted to the bridge LSI 109 but is transmitted to the display CPU 102. As described above, when the display CPU 102 receives an access signal from the VDP 105, the display CPU 102 transmits the access signal to the bridge LSI 109.

  In subsequent step S3804, data designated by the drawing list information is read out from the area indicated by the drawing list information. In subsequent step S3805, the read data is read into the area indicated by the drawing list information. Write against. Thereafter, in step S3806, it is determined whether or not the creation of the current drawing data has been completed. If not completed, the process returns to step S3804. If completed, the process proceeds to step S3807. In step S3807, the output of the access signal is stopped. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  By executing the processing in steps S3804 to S3806, drawing data for the drawing area 135 is created using at least the image data transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107.

  On the other hand, if it is not necessary to read data from the bridge-side RAM 107 (step S3802: NO), the processing from step S3808 is executed. In step S3808, the data indicated by the drawing list information is read from the area indicated by the drawing list information, and in the subsequent step S3809, the read data is read from the area indicated by the drawing list information. Write. Thereafter, in step S3810, it is determined whether or not the creation of the current drawing data is completed. If not completed, the process returns to step S3808. If completed, the setting process is terminated. .

  By executing the processing in steps S3808 to S3810, drawing data for the drawing area 135 is created using only the image data transferred to the VDP RAM 108.

  Next, data transfer instruction processing in the display CPU 102 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3901, it is determined whether it is a transfer instruction timing of a predetermined data group. The predetermined data group corresponds to various data groups included in the change data group in the first embodiment. Further, whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing is determined by referring to the display table and information on the elapsed time of game times. The same applies to the case where it is determined whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing for another data group in this data transfer instruction process. If it is the transfer instruction timing for the predetermined data group, the transfer instruction process for the predetermined data group is executed in step S3902. Specifically, a transfer command corresponding to the data group to be transferred this time is read from the program ROM 103, and the read transfer command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109.

  By receiving the transfer command, the bridge LSI 109 executes the data transfer setting process (FIG. 40) and the data transfer process (FIG. 20) as in the first embodiment. In this case, in this embodiment, in the transfer command transmitted from the display CPU 102, the type of data group to be transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107, the transfer order of each unit data constituting each data group, and each Information that can specify an address in the bridge-side RAM 107 to which unit data is to be written is included. The bridge LSI 109 sequentially reads unit data from the character ROM 106 as instructed by the information included in the transfer command, and the read unit. Write data to the area at the specified address. The configuration for such data transfer is as described in the description of the main processing in the display CPU 102.

  In addition, when the transfer to the bridge RAM 107 is completed for the predetermined data group to be transferred this time, the bridge LSI 109 transmits a transfer completion signal corresponding to the data group for which the transfer has been completed to the display CPU 102. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S3901 or after the processing in step S3902 is executed, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not a transfer completion signal for a predetermined data group has been received from the bridge LSI 109. If the transfer completion signal for the predetermined data group has been received, the written area grasping process is executed in step S3904. Specifically, the work RAM 104 stores information that allows the display CPU 102 to specify the data group that has been transferred to the bridge RAM 107 and the address of the bridge RAM 107 that stores the data group.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3903 or after the processing of step S3904 is executed, it is determined in step S3905 whether it is the transfer instruction timing of the data group to be overwritten to the regular area 137. If it is the transfer instruction timing, in step S3906, a transfer instruction process for the data group to be overwritten is executed. Specifically, a transfer command corresponding to the data group to be transferred this time is read from the program ROM 103, and the read transfer command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109. The specific contents of the information included in the transfer command and the processing contents in the bridge LSI 109 based on the reception of the transfer command are as described above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3905, or after the processing in step S3906 is executed, it is determined in step S3907 whether a transfer completion signal for the data group to be overwritten is received from the bridge LSI 109. If a transfer completion signal for the data group has been received, in step S3908, processing for grasping the written area is executed. The processing contents are as described above.

  In a succeeding step S3909, an overwriting instruction process for the VDP 105 is executed. Specifically, the VDP 105 is instructed to transfer the data group that has been transferred to the bridge RAM 107 to the VDP RAM 108 this time. In the overwrite instruction process, the transfer command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the VDP 105. The specific content of the transfer command transmitted to the VDP 105 and the processing content in the VDP 105 based on the reception of the transfer command are as described in the description of the main processing in the display CPU 102. However, the VDP 105 transmits an overwrite completion signal to the display CPU 102 when the overwrite is completed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3907 or after the processing in step S3909 is executed, it is determined in step S3910 whether an overwrite completion signal is received from the VDP 105. If the overwriting completion signal has been received, the process of grasping the written area is executed in step S3911. Specifically, the work RAM 104 stores information that allows the display CPU 102 to specify the data group that has been transferred to the VDP RAM 108 and the address of the VDP RAM 108 that stores the data group.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3910 or after the process of step S3911 is executed, it is determined in step S3912 whether it is the restoration instruction timing of the regular data group. If it is the restoration instruction timing for the regular data group, it is determined in step S3913 whether or not the saving is to be executed. The situation in which saving is to be executed is a situation in which a data group that cannot be erased is stored in the regular area 137 and the regular data group cannot be restored, as in the first embodiment.

  If it is the situation where the save should be executed, the return instruction process for saving is executed for the bridge LSI 109 in step S3914. Specifically, the save correspondence return command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109. The save corresponding return command includes the type of data group to be transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge RAM 107, the transfer order of the unit data constituting each data group, and the address in the bridge RAM 107 to which each unit data is to be written. The bridge LSI 109 sequentially reads unit data from the character ROM 106 as instructed by the information contained in the save correspondence return command, and reads the unit data into the area of the designated address. Write against. When the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed, a return completion signal is transmitted from the bridge LSI 109 to the display CPU 102.

  Further, the save correspondence return command includes information instructing not to erase the normal data group transferred to the bridge RAM 107 at the time of transfer of another data group. In the bridge LSI 109, when the normal data group is transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 based on the reception of the save corresponding return command, the normal data group is not erased until the save cancel command is received from the display CPU 102. .

  On the other hand, if the situation is not such that saving is to be executed (step S3913: NO), normal return instruction processing for the bridge LSI 109 is executed in step S3915. Specifically, the normal return command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109. This normal return command includes information excluding information for instructing not to erase the normal data group transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 in the save corresponding return command. The bridge LSI 109 sequentially reads unit data from the character ROM 106 as instructed by the information included in the normal return command, and writes the read unit data to the designated address area. When the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed, a return completion signal is transmitted from the bridge LSI 109 to the display CPU 102.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3912, after the process of step S3914 is executed or after the process of step S3915 is executed, it is determined whether a return completion signal is received from the bridge LSI 109 in step S3916. . If the return completion signal has been received, in step S3917, the written area is grasped. The processing contents are as described above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3916, or after the processing in step S3917 is executed, it is determined in step S3918 whether the normal data group can be restored to the normal area 137. Specifically, the situation where the normal data group cannot be restored to the regular area 137 has been resolved and the restoration completion signal has been received from the bridge LSI 109 when the save correspondence restoration command has been transmitted. It is determined whether or not. If it is after the normal return command is transmitted, it is determined whether a return completion signal is received from the bridge LSI 109.

  If the normal data group can be returned to the normal area 137 (step S3918: YES), a return instruction process for the VDP 105 is executed in step S3919. Specifically, this time, the VDP 105 is instructed to transfer the common data group that has been transferred to the bridge RAM 107 to the VDP RAM 108. In the return instruction process, the transfer command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the VDP 105. The specific content of the transfer command transmitted to the VDP 105 and the processing content in the VDP 105 based on the reception of the transfer command are as described in the description of the main processing in the display CPU 102. However, the VDP 105 transmits a restoration completion signal to the display CPU 102 when the restoration of the regular data group is completed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3918 or after the processing in step S3919 is executed, it is determined in step S3920 whether a return completion signal is received from the VDP 105. If the return completion signal has not been received, the data transfer instruction process is terminated as it is. If the return completion signal has been received, the process of grasping the written area is executed in step S3921. The processing contents are as described above.

  In a succeeding step S3922, the save cancellation instruction process is executed. In the evacuation cancellation instruction process, the evacuation cancellation command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109 on the condition that the evacuation recovery return command has been transmitted. When the bridge LSI 109 receives the save release command, the bridge LSI 109 handles the area where the regular data group is stored in the bridge RAM 107 as the area to be written in the future data transfer. After executing the process of step S3922, the data transfer instruction process is terminated.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, the display CPU 102 grasps in which area of the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108 the image data read from the character ROM 106 is stored, and sends it to the VDP 105 and the bridge LSI 109. In this data transfer instruction, an instruction is given including information relating to the address of the read source area and the address of the write destination area. In addition, when a drawing instruction is given to the VDP 105, an instruction including information related to the address of the read source area is given. As a result, the VDP 105 and the bridge LSI 109 only need to perform processing in accordance with an instruction from the display CPU 102, so that the configuration of the VDP 105 and the bridge LSI 109 can be simplified.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the hardware configuration of the display control device 100 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of the display control apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 63, unlike the first embodiment, the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108 are not provided, and the RAM for reading image data from the character ROM 106 in advance is the read RAM 241. It has been aggregated. Further, the bridge LSI 109 is not provided, and functions in the bridge LSI 109 are integrated into the VDP 242.

  The VDP 242 in the present embodiment is electrically connected to the display CPU 102, the character ROM 106, and the reading RAM 241 via the I / F 243, and a predetermined processing based on an instruction from the display CPU 102 in the arithmetic processing unit 244 provided in the VDP 242. The process is executed. The predetermined processing includes drawing processing on the symbol display device 31 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 102. The contents of the drawing process are the same as those in the eighth embodiment, and briefly described. In the arithmetic processing unit 244, the frame processing provided in the read RAM 241 is based on the drawing list information received from the display CPU 102. Drawing data is created for the area 241a. The created drawing data is transferred to the line buffer 245 of the VDP 242, and a drawing signal is sent to the symbol display device 31 via the output port 136 of the display control board 101 in accordance with the drawing data transferred to the line buffer 245. Output.

  Further, the predetermined processing in the arithmetic processing unit 244 includes image data transfer processing from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM 241 based on a transfer instruction from the display CPU 102. In the transfer process, the data transfer unit 244 provided in the VDP 242 is set for data transfer from the arithmetic processing unit 244, and the data transfer unit 246 is set for data transfer so that it is read from the character ROM 106. The image data is transferred to the RAM 241.

  In this case, the data transfer unit 246 transfers the image data in parallel with the drawing processing by the arithmetic processing unit 244, but the VDP 242 includes the cache buffer 247 provided in the bridge LSI 109 in the first embodiment. The image data read from the character ROM 106 is temporarily stored in the cache buffer 247 and then transferred to the read RAM 241. As a result, the timing at which the arithmetic processing unit 244 accesses the read RAM 241 for performing the drawing process and the timing at which the data transfer unit 246 transfers the image data to the read RAM 241 can be adjusted so as not to overlap.

  Incidentally, the read RAM 241 is provided with a regular area 241b and a change area 241c. A regular data group is basically written in the regular area 241b, and a change data is written in the change area 241c. A group is written. In this case, when the normal data group is transferred to the normal area 241b, the transfer to the normal area 241b is performed without the transfer to the change area 241c. However, as described above, each area of the read RAM 241 is not limited to the configuration in which the area for the frame 241a, the normal area 241b, and the change area 241c are distinguished in advance. The group and the change data group may be written to an arbitrary area. In this case, the display CPU 102 or the arithmetic processing unit 244 is configured to grasp the contents of the data stored in each address area in the read RAM 241 so that the necessary data is not erased. Is preferred.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the bridge LSI 109 can be omitted although the configuration of the VDP 242 is more complicated than that of the first embodiment.

  The data transfer from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM 241 and the drawing process to the symbol display device 31 may not be performed in parallel. In this case, it is necessary to adjust the data transfer timing and the drawing process timing. Therefore, the cache buffer 247 may be omitted.

<Eleventh embodiment>
An eleventh embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a spinning cylinder type gaming machine which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 64 is a perspective view of the slot machine 300, and FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the slot machine 300 with the front door 312 opened.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the slot machine 300 includes a housing 311 that forms an outer shell thereof. The casing 311 is formed in a box shape with the front surface opened as a whole by combining a plurality of wooden plates. A front door 312 is attached to the front surface side of the housing 311 so as to be opened and closed with the left side as a rotation axis.

  The front door 312 is locked so as not to be opened by a locking device provided on the back surface. In addition, a key cylinder 313 serving as an unlocking operation unit is provided on the upper right side of the front door 312. The key cylinder 313 is integrated with a locking device, and is configured such that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 313.

  A game panel 314 for notifying the player of the game state is provided above the center of the front door 312. On the game panel 314, three vertically long display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R are formed side by side. The display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 300 is visible through the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the inside of the housing 311 is divided into two vertically by a partition plate 315, and a reel unit 316 is attached to the upper portion of the partition plate 315. The reel unit 316 includes a left reel 317L, a middle reel 317M, and a right reel 317R formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). The rotation axes of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R correspond to the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R on a one-to-one basis. . Accordingly, part of the surface of each of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R is visible through the corresponding display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R. When the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R are projected as if moving from top to bottom through the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R.

  On each belt of each of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R, a plurality of, specifically, 21 symbols are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). Therefore, 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) are required to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position. Based on the number of pulses from when a detection signal of a reel index sensor (not shown) provided in the reel unit 316 is output, it is recognized which symbols are visible from the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R. In addition, it is possible to perform control to make any symbol visible from the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R.

  Of the symbols attached to the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R, the number of symbols that can be visually recognized through the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R is mainly determined by the vertical length of the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R. Is limited to a predetermined number. In this embodiment, three reels are provided. For this reason, when all the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible to the player.

  A total of five combination lines are attached to the game panel 314, with three display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R connected in parallel in the horizontal direction and two in the diagonal direction. Of course, the maximum number of combined lines may be 6 or more, or less than 5, and the maximum number of combined lines may be changed according to a predetermined condition. A combination line activated based on bets on medals and virtual medals, that is, when a symbol is stopped in a predetermined combination on the effective line, a prize is awarded, and a predetermined medal number payout process or a special game state A transition process to a bonus game is executed.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 314, a start lever 321 that is operated to start rotation of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R all at once (not necessarily simultaneously) is provided. The start lever 321 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotation of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R, that is, to start variable display. When the start lever 321 is operated while a medal or virtual medal is betted, the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R start to rotate all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 321, button-like stop switches 322, 323, and 324 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 317L, 317M, and 317R are provided. Each of the stop switches 322, 323, and 324 is disposed directly below the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R corresponding to the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 322 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 317L is stopped. When the middle stop switch 323 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 317M is stopped and the right stop switch 324 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 317R is stopped. The stop switches 322, 323, and 324 constitute stop operation means that are operated to stop variable display based on the rotation of the reels 317L, 17M, and 17R.

  Incidentally, the rotation of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R is started based on the operation of the start lever 321, and the game is performed until the rotation of all the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R is stopped based on the operation of the stop switches 322, 323, and 324. It corresponds to one time.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R, a medal slot 325 for inserting medals is provided. The medal inserted from the medal slot 325 is guided to either the hopper path 327 or the dish path 328 by a selector 326 as path switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 312. When the medal cannot be received, the selector 326 guides the inserted medal to the tray passage 328 side, and the guided medal is discharged to the medal tray 329 provided at the lower front portion of the front door 312.

  On the other hand, in a state where medals can be received, the selector 326 guides the inserted medals to the hopper passage 327 side, and the guided medals are guided to the hopper device 331 housed in the housing 311. The hopper passage 327 is provided with a medal detection device (not shown), and the inserted medal is detected by the medal detection device.

  The hopper device 331 includes a storage tank 332 that stores medals and a payout device 333 that pays out medals to the player. The payout device 333 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medal to the opening 334 provided in the central right part of the tray passage 328 and to the medal tray 329 through the tray passage 328. To come out. Note that a spare tank (not shown) is provided on the side of the hopper device 331 to discharge surplus medals when a predetermined amount or more of medals are stored in the storage tank 332.

  A button-like return switch 335 is provided below the medal slot 325. The return switch 335 is a switch that is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal slot 325 is jammed in the selector 326. When this switch is pressed, the selector 326 is mechanically operated to operate the selector 326. The medals packed in 326 are discharged to the medal tray 329.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R, a button-shaped first credit insertion switch 336 for inserting three credited virtual medals as virtual game media at a time is provided. Further, on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 336, a second credit insertion switch 337 and a third credit insertion switch 338 are provided as button switches smaller than the switch 336. The second credit insertion switch 337 is for inserting two credited virtual medals at a time, and the third credit insertion switch 338 is for inserting one virtual medal.

  A button-like settlement switch 339 is provided on the left side of the start lever 321. That is, the slot machine 300 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and winning medals as virtual medals. The virtual medal is ejected as an actual medal when the settlement switch 39 is pressed while being stored and stored.

  Below the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R of the game panel 314, there are a credit display unit 341 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored and stored, and an acquired number display unit 342 for displaying the number of medals acquired at the time of winning. Is provided.

  The upper part of the front door 312 has an upper lamp part 344 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right sounds that sound various effects as the game progresses and inform the player of the game state. Speaker unit 345 and a display device 346 for providing various information to the player.

  The display device 346 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The display device 346 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  A display control device 370 is provided on the back surface of the display device 346 as shown in FIG. The display control device 370 controls the upper lamp unit 344, the speaker unit 345, and the display device 346, and various effects are executed in the upper lamp unit 344, the speaker unit 345, and the display device 346 as the game progresses. In this case, in the display device 346, a display effect is executed in accordance with the operation for one game time being executed in the reel unit 316.

  A power supply box 347 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 331 inside the housing 311. The power supply box 347 includes a power switch 347a, a reset switch 347b, a setting key insertion hole 347c, and the like. The power switch 347a is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 350. The reset switch 347b is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 300. The setting key insertion hole 347c is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the appearance of medals. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability of the slot machine 300 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 347c and performing an ON operation. A main controller 350 is attached to the back plate of the housing 311 above the reel unit 316.

  Here, symbols attached to the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R will be described. FIG. 66 shows a symbol arrangement drawn on the belt wound around each of the left reel 317L, the middle reel 317M, and the right reel 317R. As shown in the figure, each reel 317L, 317M, 317R is provided with 21 symbols in a row. In addition, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R. These numbers are used for recognizing symbols that are visible to the main controller 350 from the display window. It is a number and is not actually attached to the reels 317L, 317M, 317R. However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  As symbols, “bell” symbol (for example, 20th for left belt), “replay” symbol (for example, 19th for left belt), “youth” symbol (for example, 18th for left belt), “cherry” symbol (For example, 17th for left belt), “chance” symbol (for example, 16th for left belt), “watermelon” symbol (for example, 13th for left belt), “7” symbol (for example, 12th for left belt) There are seven types. As shown in FIG. 66, in the belt wound around each of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are different.

  There is a bonus prize as a state transition prize in which the game state transitions. If the game is stopped alongside the “7” symbol, “7” symbol, and “7” symbol from the left on the active line, the bonus game is changed from the normal game in the normal gaming state to the bonus game in the special gaming state as a bonus prize. Transition. However, even if such a combination of bonus winning symbols stops on the active line, no medal is paid out. That is, when the combination of the “7” symbols is established on the active line, the game only shifts to the bonus game. In other words, it can be said that the “7” symbol is a state transition symbol for shifting the gaming state to the bonus game.

  As the small role winning in which medals are paid out, there are a watermelon winning, a bell winning and a cherry winning. When the “watermelon” symbol, “watermelon” symbol, and “watermelon” symbol are stopped from the left on the active line, 10 medals are paid out as a watermelon winning prize.

  Also, if the “Bell” symbol, “Bell” symbol, and “Bell” symbol are stopped from the left on the active line, a Bell role prize is awarded. This Bell role winning occurs not only when the game state is a normal game but also in a bonus game. In any gaming state, when a bell winning combination occurs, 15 medals are paid out.

  Also, if the “cherry” symbol on the left reel 317L stops on the active line, a cherry role win is awarded. That is, in the case of winning the cherry role, any symbol may be used that stops on the active line of the middle reel 317M and the right reel 317R. Therefore, when the “cherry” symbol stops at a position where the plurality of effective lines of the left reel 317L overlap (specifically, the upper stage or the lower stage), a cherry winning prize is established on each effective line. When a cherry winning combination is generated, five medals are paid out, and when a cherry winning combination is established at a position where a plurality of effective lines overlap as described above, ten medals are paid out. This cherry role winning occurs not only when the game state is a normal game but also in a bonus game. In any gaming state, when a cherry winning combination occurs, 5 medals are paid out (when a cherry winning a prize is established at a position where the active lines overlap, 10 medals are paid out). )

  Further, when the “replay” symbol, the “replay” symbol, and the “replay” symbol are stopped along the active line from the left, a replay prize is awarded. When a re-game winning is established, no medals are paid out or state transition is made, but the player starts the next game round (hereinafter also referred to as a game for convenience) without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. It becomes possible to do.

  In other cases, that is, when the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 317L does not stop on the active line, and the combination of the symbols described above does not stop on the active line, Not done at all. That is, the “youth” symbol of the left reel 317L and the right reel 317R, the “cherry” symbol of the middle reel 317M and the right reel 317R, and the “chance symbol” are not involved in any winnings. In other words, it can be said that each of the symbols is a no-benefits symbol unrelated to the privilege given to the player. In the following, a combination of symbols corresponding to each prize is also referred to as a combination of winning symbols.

  However, even if the winning combination is made, depending on the timing when the stop switch is pressed, the “watermelon” symbol may not stop on the active line, and so-called missing may occur. This is because the range that can be slid is pre-determined within 190 msec from the timing when the stop switch is pressed (up to 4 symbols than when the arrival symbol is stopped), and the “watermelon” symbol that has reached the lower line This is because a section of 5 or more symbols (a section in which 5 or more symbols exist) is set between the “watermelon” symbol that reaches the lower line.

  Regarding this omission, in this slot machine 300, there are two patterns in the case where omission occurs. Of these, the first pattern can occur when a section of 5 symbols or more is set between the same types of symbols. Specifically, as described above, even if a winning combination other than the cherry role is won in the lottery process, the winning combination is not made unless the winning symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination are arranged on one active line. In addition, at the stage where two of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R are stopped, the effective lines (hereinafter, these lines are also referred to as successful lines) where the combinations of winning symbols corresponding to the winning combination are limited. In such a situation, if more than 5 symbols are set between the same symbols that make up the winning symbol combination in the remaining reels, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, the winning symbol combination is formed on the winning line. The pattern to be stopped does not stop and may be missed. In addition, the failure of the first pattern aspect is limited to the stage where the effective line (hereinafter also referred to as priority line) for stopping the combination of winning symbols corresponding to the winning combination is the first stop or the second stop. May also occur.

  The second pattern may occur when a section of 7 symbols or more (a section in which 7 or more symbols exist) is set between the same types of symbols. More specifically, in the slot machine 300, as described above, the number of symbols that can be visually recognized through the display windows 314L, 314M, and 314R is three for each reel, and each effective line is for each of these three symbols. Is set so that it passes straight through any three of the nine positions. In such a situation, if a section of 7 symbols or more is set between the same kind of symbols constituting the winning symbol combination in any of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R, the reel is first stopped. Even if it is a case, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination may not stop on any of the active lines, and the missing may occur at the first stop stage.

  For the “watermelon” symbol, for example, in the left reel 317L, a section corresponding to 12 symbols is set between the “watermelon” symbol of the 0th to the “watermelon” symbol of the thirteenth. For this reason, for example, if the left stop switch 322 is pressed at the timing when the “replay” symbol No. 3 on the left reel 317L has reached the lower line, even if the left reel 317L is slid by four symbols, the “watermelon” "The symbol cannot be stopped on the active line." That is, for the watermelon combination, both the first and second patterns may be missed.

  Here, not only the missing of the watermelon role, but also whether or not another small role has been missed will be described. As for the cherry role, if the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 317L stops on the active line as described above, the cherry role is won. Therefore, the miss of the first pattern mode does not occur. On the other hand, in the left reel 317L, an interval of 11 symbols is set between the 5th “cherry” symbol and the 17th “cherry” symbol. Therefore, the miss of the aspect of the second pattern can occur.

  As for replays, in each reel 317L, 317M, 317R, the “replay” symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, neither of the first and second patterns is lost. That is, even if each stop switch 322, 323, 324 is operated at any timing, the combination of the re-game winning symbols can be stopped on the active line as long as the re-game winning flag is set.

  As for the bell role, in the middle reel 317M and the right reel 317R, the “bell” symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. On the other hand, in the left reel 317L, a section corresponding to five symbols is set between the second “bell” symbol and the eighth “bell” symbol. Also, a section corresponding to 5 symbols is set between the 14th “bell” symbol and the 20th “bell” symbol. However, the section more than 7 symbols is not set. In the symbol arrangement, the second pattern mode is not missed, but the first pattern mode may be missed depending on the stop order of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R. For example, when the left reel 317L is stopped as the third stop, the first pattern mode may be missed. More specifically, if the left stop switch 322 is stopped when the 14th “bell” symbol or the 2nd “bell” symbol reaches the lower line when the established line is the middle line, Missing of the first pattern mode occurs. Also, when the priority line is set, the first pattern may be missed. That is, when the priority line is the middle line and the left stop switch 322 is stopped at the timing when the 14th “bell” symbol or the 2nd “bell” symbol reaches the lower line, the first pattern In this case, the loss of the mode occurs.

  For the “7” symbol corresponding to the bonus combination, for example, in the left reel 317L, a section corresponding to 10 symbols is set between the first “7” symbol and the twelfth “7” symbol. For this reason, for example, if the left stop switch 72 is pressed at the timing when the “replay” symbol No. 3 on the left reel 317L has reached the lower line, even if the left reel 317L is slid by four symbols, “7 "The symbol cannot be stopped on the active line." That is, for the bonus combination, both the first and second patterns may be missed.

<Basic Electrical Configuration of Slot Machine 300>
Next, the basic electrical configuration of the slot machine 300 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 350 includes a main control board 351 that controls the main game. In the main control device 350, a substrate box that accommodates the main control substrate 351 or the like is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is attached by peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 352 is mounted on the main control board 351. The MPU 352 includes a ROM 353 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 352 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 353 is executed. A RAM 354, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  Note that the ROM 353 is a storage unit (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage and retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 353 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 353, and the RAM 354 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be configured as separate chips. It is good also as a structure currently mounted.

  The MPU 352 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 352, in addition to the power supply device 361 provided in the power supply box 347, a random number counter 355 for generating a random number within a predetermined upper limit value and appropriately updating it is connected. Further, on the input side of the MPU 352, a start detection sensor 321a that detects the operation of the start lever 321, stop detection sensors 322a, 323a, and 324a that individually detect operations of the stop switches 322, 323, and 324, and a medal slot 325 are provided. Inserted medal detection sensor 326a for detecting the inserted medal, credit insertion detection sensors 336a, 337a, 338a for individually detecting the operation of each of the credit insertion switches 336, 337, 338, and settlement adjustment for detecting the operation of the settlement switch 339. A sensor 339a, a payout detection sensor 331a for detecting medals paid out from the hopper device 331, a reset detection sensor 362 for detecting an operation of the reset switch 347b, and a setting key being inserted into the setting key insertion hole 347c and being turned ON. Various sensors such as setting the key detection sensor 363 to output is connected, and the signal from these various sensors are outputted through the input port to MPU352.

  Further, a power failure monitoring circuit 361 b provided in the power supply device 361 is connected to the input side of the MPU 352. The power supply device 361 includes a power supply unit 361a that supplies driving power to the electronic devices of the slot machine 300 including the main control device 350, the power failure monitoring circuit 361b described above, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 361b is for monitoring the power-off state and generating a power failure signal not only at the time of power failure but also at the time of power-off by the power switch 347a. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 361b monitors the stabilized driving voltage of 12 VDC in this example output from the power supply unit 361a, and determines that the power supply is shut off when the driving voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. Power outage signal is output. The power failure signal is supplied to the MPU 352, and the MPU 352 recognizes this power failure signal and executes a power failure process described later.

  The power supply unit 361a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 350 even when the output voltage is reduced to less than 10 volts. As a time for outputting the stabilization voltage, a sufficient time for executing the power failure process by the main controller 350 is secured.

  On the output side of the main controller 350, a credit display unit 341, an obtained number display unit 342, stepping motors 364 for rotating the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R, a medal path switching solenoid 326b provided in the selector 326, An external concentration terminal board 365 that can transmit information to a hopper device 331, a display control device 370, a hall management device (not shown), and the like are connected.

  The display control device 370 is a control device for controlling the upper lamp unit 344, the speaker unit 345, and the display device 346. Then, after receiving a command from the main controller 350, the display controller 370 independently controls the upper lamp unit 344, the speaker unit 345, and the display device 346.

<Processing executed by MPU 352 of main controller 350>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 352 of the main controller 350 will be described. The MPU 352 is roughly classified into a normal process that is repeatedly executed after the start-up process is executed after the power is turned on, and a timer interrupt process that is periodically started (in a cycle of 1.49 msec in the present embodiment). And NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal).

  Among these processes, in the NMI interrupt process, the data of the used register provided in the MPU 352 is saved to the backup area provided in the RAM 354, and the power failure flag is provided in the various flag storage areas 371 of the RAM 354. Set in the storage area. Thereafter, the data saved in the backup area of the RAM 354 is restored to the use register of the MPU 352 again. With this return processing, the NMI interrupt processing ends.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in the register saving process shown in step S4001, the values of all the registers in the MPU 352 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 354. In step S4002, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure flag is set. If the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4003 to execute a power failure process.

  In the power failure process, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to terminate the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 352 is stored in the backup area in the RAM 354. Thereafter, the RAM determination value is cleared as a stop process, the output state of the output port is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Further, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  If it is determined in step S4002 that the power failure flag is not set, various processes after step S4004 are performed.

  That is, in step S4004, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S4005, an end-of-interrupt declaration process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the MPU 352 itself. In step S4006, in order to rotate the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R, a stepping motor control process for driving the stepping motor 364, which is a rotating drum driving motor, is performed. In step S4007, the state of various sensors is read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether the reading result is normal is performed.

  In step S4008, a timer calculation process for subtracting the value of each timer is performed. In step S4009, counter processing for outputting the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the external concentration terminal board 365 is performed. In step S4010, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the display control device 370 is performed. In step S4011, segment data setting processing for setting segment data is performed. In step S4012, segment data display processing is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting processing is supplied to a predetermined display unit and corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like are displayed. In step S4013, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device is performed. In step S4014, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S4001 is restored to the corresponding register in the MPU 352. Thereafter, in step S4015, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

  Next, normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S4101, a medal settlement process for discharging the stored virtual medal or bet medal as an actual medal is executed.

  In a succeeding step S4102, a demonstration display process is executed. In the demonstration display process, whether or not a predetermined demonstration start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round effect. Execute the judgment process. In addition, since a power supply to the MPU 352 is started or the slot machine 300 is reset, a predetermined demonstration start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed without newly starting a game game. A process for determining whether or not the process has been performed is executed. If it is determined that the time has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the display control device 370.

  The demonstration display refers to a start waiting effect displayed on the display screen of the display device 346 when a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed. In the demonstration image, a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be arbitrarily changed.

  In a succeeding step S4103, it is determined whether or not a medal is bet. That is, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 and bet settings have been made, or whether or not virtual medals have been inserted and bet settings have been made by operating the credit insertion switches 336 to 338.

  If a medal is bet, subsequently, an effective line setting process is executed in step S4104. In the effective line setting process, the current bet number is grasped, and an effective line is set according to the grasped bet number. Incidentally, as the number of bets increases, it becomes easier to win a winning combination in a lottery process described later.

  In a succeeding step S4105, it is determined whether or not there is a start command. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the start lever 321 has been operated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4105, a command indicating that a start command has been issued is output to the display control device 370.

  If both step S4103 and step S4105 are YES, a bet non-permission process is executed in step S4106. Specifically, the ON signal from the credit insertion detection sensors 336a to 338a is invalidated. Further, the medal passage switching solenoid 326b is de-energized, and even if a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 325, the medal for the player is returned through the tray passage 328. Further, the ON signal from the settlement detection sensor 339a is invalidated.

  Thereafter, a lottery process is executed in step S4107. In a succeeding step S4108, a reel control process is executed. Thereafter, in step S4109, a medal payout process is executed. When the medal payout process is executed, a bonus game process is executed in step S4110. Each process of step S4107 to step S4110 will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S4111, a bet permission process is executed. In this process, the invalidation state of the ON signal from the credit insertion detection sensors 336a to 338a and the payment detection sensor 339a is canceled. Further, the medal passage switching solenoid 326b is excited, and when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion port 325, the medal passage switching solenoid 326b is guided to the hopper passage 327.

  After performing the above processing, the process returns to step S4101. On the other hand, if no medal is bet in step S4103 or if the start lever 321 is not operated in step S4105, the process returns to step S4101.

<Lottery processing>
The lottery process in step S4107 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the lottery process, first, in step S4201 to step S4203, a lottery table selection process for selecting a lottery table for determination of success / failure is executed. That is, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a bonus setting flag is stored in the bonus setting flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 371 of the RAM 354. If no bonus setting flag is stored in step S4201, the process advances to step S4202. In step S4202, the base game lottery table is selected. If the bonus setting flag is stored in step 4201, the process advances to step S4203. In step S4203, a bonus game lottery table is selected.

  Here, the base game lottery table and the bonus game lottery table will be described. First, the base game lottery table will be described. The normal game lottery table is provided corresponding to the current setting state of the slot machine 300. Therefore, in the process in step S4202, the base game lottery table corresponding to the current setting state is selected. Incidentally, the setting state of the slot machine 300 is any one of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. When “setting 1”, the base game lottery table with the lowest bonus winning probability is selected, and “setting 6” is selected. ”, The base game lottery table having the highest bonus winning probability is selected. A plurality of lottery tables are provided according to the number of bets on medals, and a lottery table having a higher winning probability is selected as the BET number increases.

  FIG. 71A illustrates an example of a base game lottery table selected under the “setting 1” state. In the regular game lottery table, the same number of index values IV as the number of winning combinations is set. In other words, five index values IV of 1 to 5 are set because five types of winnings such as replay, cherry, bell, watermelon, and bonus can occur under the normal game. Each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination, and a point value PV is set.

  Incidentally, when the base game lottery table shown in FIG. 71A is selected, the probability of winning the Bomas combination is about 1/327. On the other hand, the replay and small role winning probabilities are set higher than the bonus winning probability, the replay winning probability is about 1 / 7.3, the cherry winning probability is 1/128, and the Bell winning probability is About 1/48, the watermelon winning probability is 1/128.

  Next, the bonus game lottery table will be described. Unlike the base game lottery table, the bonus game lottery table has only one pattern. That is, the bonus game lottery table is provided regardless of the current setting state of the slot machine 300.

  A bonus game lottery table is illustrated in FIG. In the bonus game lottery table, two index values IV are set. As in the normal game lottery table, each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination, and a point value PV is set.

  By the way, the winning probability in the bonus game is about 1.18 of the bell winning probability and 1/8 of the watermelon winning probability. Therefore, in the bonus game, the winning of the bell combination occurs with a relatively high probability, and the fact that no winning combination is won occurs with a low probability.

  After executing the processing of step S4202 or step S4205, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S4204, and in the subsequent step S4205, a determination value DV used for determining whether or not the winning combination is determined. In the determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value latched by the random number counter 355 when the start lever 321 is operated is set as the current determination value DV, and this random value corresponds to 1 that is the current index value IV. The point value PV is added to obtain a new determination value DV. Here, the random number counter 355 will be briefly described. In the slot machine 300, a random number of “0 to 65535” is generated using two 8-bit shift registers. Each shift register is updated one by one periodically (for example, every 100 ns), and a value obtained by switching the upper and lower bits of each shift register is input to the MPU 352 and the start lever 321 is operated (that is, the start detection sensor 321a). (When the ON signal is received) is latched as a random value. This is a device for making the random value used in the initial determination value setting process irregular. For example, a value obtained by randomly replacing the bits of each shift register is latched as a random value. Also good.

  Thereafter, in step S4206, whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined. In the combination determination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S4207, and in the subsequent step S4208, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a role to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a winning combination to be determined, the process returns to step S4205 to continue the determination of winning combination. At this time, in step S4205, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether or not the previous winning combination is a new determination value DV. In step S4206, the winning combination determination is performed based on the determination value DV.

  If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 in step S4206, the winning flag of the combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time is stored in the corresponding winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 371 in step S4209. Store.

  In a succeeding step S4210, it is determined whether or not the determined combination is a bonus combination. If it is a bonus combination, a bonus winning command is output to the display control device 370 in step S4211. If the determined combination is not a bonus combination in step S4210, a winning command corresponding to the determined combination is output to the display control device 370 in step S4212. By outputting each winning command, the display control device 370 can grasp which role is won.

  Here, when the winning flag is a small role winning flag (cherry flag, bell flag, watermelon flag) or a re-game winning flag, these winning flags are cleared at the end of the game round in which the corresponding winning flag is stored. On the other hand, when the winning flag is a bonus winning flag, the bonus winning flag is cleared on condition that a combination of bonus symbols is established on the active line. That is, the bonus winning flag may be valid over a plurality of game times. It should be noted that, in the determination of whether or not a winning combination is made after the next game round when the bonus winning flag is carried over, whether or not the winning combination is different from the bonus winning combination is determined, but the determination of whether or not the bonus winning combination is performed is not performed.

  If it is determined in step S4208 that there is no winning combination, the process proceeds to step S4213 if the process in step S4211 is performed, or if the process in step S4212 is performed. In step S4213, a slip table setting process for setting a slip table (stop table) for reel stop control is executed. In the slip table setting process, a slip table for reel stop control is determined and stored in the slip table storage area of the RAM 354. Here, the slip table is a predetermined symbol to be stopped when the symbol on the predetermined effective line at the timing when the stop switches 322 to 324 are pressed differs from the symbol to be stopped on the effective line. It is a table that defines how much the reel slides so as to stop on the active line. When the slip table setting process is executed, the lottery process is terminated.

<Reel control processing>
The reel control process executed in step 4108 of the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, in step S4301, a rotation start process for starting rotation of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R is performed. In the rotation start process, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the start of reel rotation in the previous game round is checked, and a wait process is performed to wait until the time elapses. Later, rotation of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R is started. Therefore, even if the player bets a medal and operates the start lever 321, the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R may not immediately start rotating.

  In the subsequent step S4302, whether one of the stop switches 322 to 324 is pressed to generate a reel stop command, more specifically, whether or not an ON signal is received from the stop detection sensors 322a to 324a. If no stop command is generated, the system waits until a stop command is generated. However, in this embodiment, the period from the start of rotation of each reel 317L, 317M, 317R to the constant speed rotation at a predetermined speed is set as an invalid period, and the stop switches 322 to 322 are set within this invalid period. Even if 324 is pressed, the ON signals from the stop detection sensors 322a to 324a are invalidated. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, a period from when each reel 317L, 317M, 317R starts to rotate until 0.5 second elapses is set as an invalid period.

  If any stop switch 322 to 324 is pressed in step S4302 and a stop command is generated, the process proceeds to step S4303, and the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the lower line is confirmed. In step S4304, a slip amount corresponding to the reaching symbol is calculated from the slip table, and in step S4305, a symbol number of a stop symbol to be actually stopped on the lower line is determined. In subsequent step S4306, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. If they are equal, a reel stop process for stopping the reel is performed in step S4307.

  In step S4308, a command corresponding to the operation switch and the operation order is output to the display control device 370. The command includes information indicating which one of the stop switches 322 to 324 is the currently operated stop switch, and information indicating what order the operation was performed. . As a result, the display control device 370 can grasp the stop switch operated this time and the order of the current operation.

  In a succeeding step S4309, it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped. If all the reels are not stopped, the process returns to the step S4302. If all reels are stopped in step S4309, the process advances to step S4310 to execute a payout determination process and output a winning command.

  In the payout determination process, the number of medals to be paid out is set on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the active line. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small role winning is established on the active line, and when the small role winning is not established on the active line, the small winning combination flag is cleared and the expected payout amount stored in the RAM 354 is stored. “0” is set in the area 373. When the small combination winning is established on the active line, the small combination winning flag is cleared, and the payout number corresponding to the established combination is set in the payout planned number storage area 373 of the RAM 354. Further, when the re-game winning is established on the active line, the re-game winning flag is cleared and “0” is set in the payout planned number storage area 373, and the re-game process enabling the re-game is performed. In the re-game process, the medal is betted so that the game can be played again. Therefore, when a re-game winning is established, the player can start the next game round without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals.

  The winning command is output to the display control device 370. The winning command includes information on the winning combination that has been won this time. Even if no winning combination is established, a winning command including information indicating that no winning combination is established is output. Thereby, the display control device 370 can grasp the winning combination this time and can recognize that one game round has ended.

<Medal payout processing>
The medal payout process in step S4109 in the normal process will be described based on the flowchart in FIG.

  In the medal payout process, first, in step S4401, the payout completion number counted by the payout completion number counter in the various counter areas 375 provided in the RAM 354 matches the planned payout number stored in the payout planned number storage area 373. It is determined whether or not. If the payout completion number does not match the planned payout number, it is determined in step S4402 whether the number of virtual medals stored and stored has reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50). The number of virtual medals is stored in a credit counter provided in various counter areas 375 of the RAM 354.

  If the number of virtual medals has not reached the upper limit in step S4402, the virtual medal number and the payout completion number of the payout completion number counter are each incremented by 1 in steps S4403 and S4405. Thereafter, in step S4406, display unit change processing is performed in which the credit display unit 341 and the acquired number display unit 342 are each incremented by one. In other words, in the present embodiment, there are cases where medals are paid out when a medal is actually given to the player and when a virtual medal is given to the player.

  On the other hand, when the count value of the credit counter in the various counter areas 375 has reached the upper limit in step S4402, the medal payout rotating plate is driven in step S4404 and the medal is passed from the hopper device 331 via the dish passage 328. The medal tray 329 is paid out. In subsequent step S4405, 1 is added to the payout completion number of the payout completion number counter in accordance with the medal detection signal of the payout detection sensor 91a attached to the hopper device 331. After that, in step S4406, a display unit changing process for adding 1 to the number of acquired number display unit 342 is performed. After performing a display part change process in step S4406, it returns to step S4401 again.

  If it is determined in step S4401 that the number of payout completions matches the number of payouts, the process advances to step S4407. In step S4407, it is determined whether or not a bonus setting flag is stored in a bonus setting flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 371. If the bonus setting flag is stored, the current payout completion number is subtracted from the count value of the remaining payout number counter in the RAM 354 in step S4408.

  If the bonus setting flag is not stored in step S4407, or if the process of step S4408 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4409. In step S4409, the payout end process is performed, and then this process ends. In the payout end process, the values of the payout planned number storage area 373 and the payout completion number counter are cleared to “0”. Note that the value of the acquired number display portion 342 is cleared when a medal is bet to start the next game round.

<Bonus game processing>
The bonus game process in step S4110 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the bonus game process, it is first determined in step S4501 whether or not a bonus setting flag is stored in the bonus setting flag storage area. If the gaming state is a normal game, no bonus setting flag is stored, so a negative determination is made in step S4501 and the process proceeds to step S4502.

  In step S4502, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning flag is stored in the bonus winning flag storage area. If the bonus winning flag is not stored, the bonus game process is terminated as it is. If the bonus winning flag is stored, it is determined in step S4503 whether or not a bonus winning is established on the current active line. If the bonus winning is not established, the bonus game process is terminated as it is. If a bonus winning is established, the bonus game process is terminated after the bonus game start process is executed in step S4504.

  In the bonus game start processing, the bonus winning flag set in the bonus winning flag storage area is cleared, and the bonus setting flag is stored in the bonus setting flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 371 of the RAM 354. Further, “345” is set as a specified number of total payout numbers of medals in the bonus game in a remaining payout number counter provided in various counter areas 375 of the RAM 354. In the bonus game start process, a start command is output. This start command is output to the display control device 370. In the display control device 370, by inputting a start command from the main control device 350, the display device 346 is controlled to start display for the bonus game.

  If the bonus setting flag is stored in step S4501, the gaming state is a bonus game, and the process proceeds to step S4505. In step S4505, it is determined whether the remaining payout number counter is “0”. If it is determined that the remaining payout number counter is not “0”, the bonus game process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4505 that the value of the remaining payout number counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S4506, and after the bonus game end process is executed, the bonus game process is ended.

  In the bonus game end process, the bonus setting flag set in the bonus setting flag storage area is cleared. In the bonus game end process, an end command is output. This end command is output to the display control device 370. In the display control device 370, by inputting an end command from the main control device 350, the display device 346 is controlled to end the display for the bonus game.

  The bonus game process is executed after the medal payout process. Therefore, even when the remaining payout number counter becomes “0” during the payout of medals, the payout of medals related to winning of the game times is completed. In other words, the payout of medals related to winning in the bonus game is not canceled halfway based on the total number of medals paid out reaching a specified number.

<Electrical Configuration Related to Display Control of Display Device 346>
The electrical configuration of the display control device 370 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The display control device 370 includes the display control board 101 described in the first embodiment. The display CPU 102 provided on the display control board 101 receives the command output from the main control device 350 at the input port 111. Then, the display CPU 102 controls the upper lamp unit 344, the speaker unit 345, and the display device 346 based on the received command. The configuration of the display control board 101 is the same as that of the first embodiment except that the upper lamp unit 344, the speaker unit 345, and the display device 346 are controlled (that is, the controlled object is different). It is the same as described.

  Here, display contents on the display device 346 will be described. In the display device 346, an effect is executed in accordance with the execution of the game times. As the effects, a normal effect, a teaching effect, a special effect, and an effect for a bonus game are set, and a moving image display is appropriately executed on the display device 346.

  The normal performance includes a production that suggests the winning small role. The normal performance is executed based on the operation of the start lever 321 regardless of the progress of the game so far. For this reason, the normal performance has high arbitraryness of the execution timing. Therefore, in this slot machine 300, the normal effect is set as a regular data group, and the data related to the normal effect is read to the regular area 137 in the main process. As a normal effect, a demonstration screen displayed on the display device 346 when a game is not being performed is set in addition to what is executed in accordance with the execution of the game times. Is read to the regular area 137 in the main process.

  The normal performance proceeds regardless of the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324. As described above, in the slot machine 300, the game proceeds by operating the stop switches 322 to 324. If the stop switches 322 to 324 are operated in a state where the normal effect is not finished and all the reels 317L to 317R are stopped, the normal effect is continuously executed until a new bet is bet. In the normal effect, the last display in the normal effect is maintained on the display device 346 until a new medal is bet. In other words, the display of the normal effect is ended at the timing when the game round ends and a new medal is bet.

  The teaching effect is an effect that can be executed when the bonus combination is won, and is an effect that teaches the player that the bonus combination is won. The teaching effect is an effect that can be executed from the end of the first game round won for the bonus combination until the transition to the bonus game, and is an effect that is not executed unless the bonus combination is selected. If a bonus winning is established between the winning of the bonus combination and the execution of the teaching effect, the process shifts to the bonus game without executing the teaching effect.

  The teaching effect proceeds regardless of the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324. As described above, in the slot machine 300, the game proceeds by operating the stop switches 322 to 324. When the stop switches 322 to 324 are operated in a state where the teaching effect is not ended and all the reels 317L to 317R are stopped, the last image in the teaching effect is displayed on the display device 346 at the timing when a new medal is bet. Is done. The display of the image is maintained until the bonus combination winning is established. That is, the teaching effect is maintained until the last image of the teaching effect is displayed at the timing when the game round ends and a medal is newly betted, and the image is maintained until the bonus game is entered. The last image of the teaching effect teaches the player that the bonus combination has been won, and the player can grasp that the bonus combination has been won by viewing the image.

  The special effect is executed when a bonus combination is won in the first game after the bonus game ends. In the present embodiment, the special effect is always executed if the bonus combination is won in the first game round when the bonus game is finished, and is not executed unless it is the first game round after the bonus game is finished. In addition, the period during which the effect is executed is longer than the teaching effect (for example, 40 sec). The special effect includes an effect instructing the player that the bonus combination has been won, and when the special effect is executed, the teaching effect is not executed.

  When the special effect is executed, the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 is disabled until an image for ending the special effect is displayed, and the player is prompted to pay attention to the special effect. ing. When the special effect ends, as in the case of the teaching effect, the image when the special effect ends is maintained until the bonus game shifts.

  The effect for the bonus game is an effect that is executed when the bonus combination winning is established and the game is shifted to the bonus game. For this reason, it is an effect that is not executed unless a bonus combination winning is established. The effect for the bonus game is executed over a plurality of game times from the start to the end of the bonus game. One cycle of the effect for the bonus game is about the same as when the bonus game is completed in the shortest time (for example, 100 sec cycle), and the effect for the bonus game (for the bonus game is completed) until the bonus game ends. Part of the production) is repeatedly executed. The period of one cycle of the effect for the bonus game is longer than the period during which the special effect is being executed.

  The effect for the bonus game is executed over a plurality of game times, and proceeds regardless of the progress of the game times and the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 in each game time.

  As described above, the teaching effect is an effect that is not executed unless the bonus combination is won, and the special effect is an effect that is not executed unless the bonus combination is won in the first game after the bonus game ends. Furthermore, the bonus game effect is an effect that is not executed unless a bonus combination is won and a bonus combination prize is established. For this reason, each of the teaching effect, the special effect, and the effect for the bonus game has a lower timing of execution than the normal effect. Therefore, in the slot machine 300, the teaching effect, the special effect, and the effect for the bonus game are set as change data, and are transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 each time a predetermined condition is satisfied. Yes.

  The special effect and the effect for the bonus game have a longer execution period or cycle than the teaching effect. Therefore, in the slot machine 300, the special effect and bonus game effect data are set as a data group divided into a plurality of data.

  Specifically, the first data to the third data corresponding to the special effect are set in the special effect. In the bonus game effect, data for starting the bonus game, first data to third data corresponding to the bonus game, and data for ending the bonus game are set. In the data for starting the bonus game, image data corresponding to the opening when the bonus game is started is set. In the first data to the third data corresponding to the bonus game, image data displayed when the game times are progressing in the bonus game is set. In the bonus game end data, image data corresponding to the ending when the bonus game ends is set.

  In the bonus game, after the display of the image corresponding to the opening is completed, the image of the first data corresponding to the bonus game is continuously displayed. In addition, when the bonus game is ended and an image corresponding to the ending is displayed, when a medal is newly bet, the display of the image corresponding to the ending is ended.

<Processing Configuration Related to Display Control of Display Device 346>
Next, a processing configuration relating to display control of the display device 346 will be described. In the display control device 370, various processes are executed by the display CPU 102, and various processes are executed by the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 based on instructions from the display CPU 102, whereby the display device 346 is display-controlled. .

  The processes executed by the display CPU 102 include a main process executed when the slot machine 300 is turned on, a normal time control process, a bonus time control process, and an effect progress process executed after the main process. In each process, a predetermined instruction is executed to the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105 of the bridge LSI 109. Since the main processing of the display CPU 102, the processing of the write control unit 121, and the VDP 105 are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

<Normal control processing>
Next, the normal control process executed by the display CPU 102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal time control process is executed after the main process is completed, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) after the main process is completed. The normal time control process is set so as not to be executed during the bonus game.

  The normal control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4601, it is determined whether a start command has been issued. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command indicating that a start command has been issued from main controller 350 (the command has been affirmed in step S4105 in the normal process of main controller 350). Output in case). If it is determined that there is no start command, the normal control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4601 that there is a start command, the process advances to step S4602. In step S4602, it is determined whether there is a display-side bonus winning flag. The display-side bonus winning flag is set in a display-side bonus winning flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104 when a bonus winning command is received from the main controller 350. Whether or not a bonus combination is won can be grasped by the display CPU 102 based on whether or not the display-side bonus winning flag is set.

  If the display-side bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined whether or not the 1 game times flag is set in the 1 game times flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 104d. The 1 game number flag is a flag that is set for the first game number after the bonus game ends. If the 1 game number flag is set in step S4603, the process proceeds to step S4604. In step S4604, the 1 game round flag is cleared.

  In a succeeding step S4605, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning command is received. If a bonus winning command has been received, the process advances to step S4606. In step S4606, a special effect display pattern setting process is executed. In this display pattern setting process, an effect pattern from the start of the special effect until the end is set. From this effect pattern, the timing for outputting the drawing list information after the start of the special effect and the information for specifying the type of the drawing list information can be specified.

  In subsequent step S4607, information on a drawing list for starting a special effect is output. Specifically, information on the drawing list for starting the special effect is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, an image at a timing when the special effect is started is displayed on the display device 346.

  The VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) described in the first embodiment, and displays a special effect image on the display device 346.

  If the drawing list is output in step S4607, the process advances to step S4608. In step S4608, the display-side bonus winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104. In step S4608, the special effect execution flag is set in the special effect execution flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas. The special effect execution flag indicates that the special effect has been executed. In the slot machine 300, when the special effect is executed, the teaching effect is not executed. The special effect execution flag is a flag for preventing the teaching effect from being executed even if the bonus combination is won.

  In a succeeding step S4609, a bonus medium data transfer instruction process is executed. The bonus data transfer instruction process is for transferring the bonus game image data stored in the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107. Specifically, a transfer command corresponding to the data group to be transferred this time is read from the program ROM 103, and the read transfer command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109.

  By receiving the transfer command, the bridge LSI 109 executes the data transfer setting process (FIG. 40) and the data transfer process (FIG. 20) as in the first embodiment. In this case, in this embodiment, in the transfer command transmitted from the display CPU 102, the type of data group to be transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107, the transfer order of each unit data constituting each data group, and each Information that can specify an address in the bridge-side RAM 107 to which unit data is to be written is included. The bridge LSI 109 sequentially reads unit data from the character ROM 106 as instructed by the information included in the transfer command, and the read unit. Data is written to the area of the designated address.

  As described above, the effect for the bonus game has a longer cycle, and the image data for the effect for the bonus game is stored in a plurality of data groups. When the transfer instruction process of step S4609 is executed, bonus game start data, which is the first data among the plurality of data groups, is read. As a result, the amount of data stored in the bridge RAM 107 at a time can be reduced, and the storage capacity of the bridge RAM 107 can be reduced. When the data transfer instruction process during the bonus is executed, the normal control process is terminated.

  Data transfer when bonus bonus data transfer processing is executed is completed before the game round is completed. Specifically, the reel control process rotation start process (step S4301) by the main controller 350 is executed, and the transfer is completed before the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R start the constant speed rotation. .

  On the other hand, if the 1-game times flag is not set in step S4603, the process proceeds to step S4610. In step S4610, it is determined whether a bonus winning command has been received. If a bonus winning command has been received, the process advances to step S4611. In step S4611, a data transfer instruction process for teaching effect is executed. The instruction processing is for transferring the teaching effect image data stored in the character ROM 106 to the bridge-side RAM 107. Specifically, a transfer command corresponding to the data group to be transferred this time is read from the program ROM 103, and the read transfer command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109.

  In the subsequent step S4612, the display-side bonus winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area. In the subsequent step S4613, the bonus medium data transfer instruction process described above is executed.

  The instruction transfer data transfer instruction and the bonus data transfer instruction are continuously performed. The data transfer based on these transfer instructions is executed until the reel control process rotation start process (step S4301) by the main controller 350 is executed and the reels 317L, 317M, 317R start the constant speed rotation. It has become.

  If a bonus winning command is not received in step S4605, a bonus winning command is not received in step S4610, or a bonus data transfer instruction process is executed in step S4613, the process proceeds to step S4614. . In step S4614, a display pattern setting process for normal performance is executed. In this display pattern setting process, the contents of the normal effect are set. When this process is executed, a drawing list corresponding to the set display pattern is output. As a result, the normal effect is displayed on the display device 346. When the pattern setting process for normal performance is executed, the normal control process is terminated.

  If the display-side bonus winning flag is already set in step S4602, the process proceeds to step S4615. In step S4615, it is determined whether or not the special effect execution flag is set in the special effect execution flag storage area. If the special effect execution flag is set, the normal effect control process is terminated, assuming that the special effect is executed and the player is instructed that the bonus combination is won.

  If the special effect execution flag is not set in step S4615, the process proceeds to step S4616. In step S4616, a teaching effect execution lottery process is executed. In the teaching effect execution lottery process, a teaching effect execution lottery is performed as to whether or not the game time is to execute the teaching effect. When the teaching effect execution lottery process is executed, the process proceeds to step S4617. In step S4617, it is determined whether or not the game time is to execute the teaching effect. Specifically, it is determined in step S4616 whether or not the teaching effect execution lottery has been won. When the teaching effect execution lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S4614, the above-described normal effect display pattern setting process is executed, and the normal control process is terminated. In the teaching effect execution lottery, a random number for the lottery is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value of the random number corresponds to executing the teaching effect. In the slot machine 300, when the teaching effect execution lottery is performed, the teaching effect execution lottery is won at about 70%.

  When the teaching effect execution lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S4618. In step S4618, a display pattern setting process for teaching effect is executed. In this display pattern setting process, an effect pattern from the start to the end of the teaching effect is set. From this effect pattern, timing for outputting drawing list information after the teaching effect is started, information for specifying the type of the drawing list information, and the like can be specified.

  In the subsequent step S4619, information on the drawing list for starting the teaching effect is output. Specifically, the drawing list information for starting the teaching effect is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, an image at the timing when the teaching effect is started is displayed on the display device 346. When the process of step S4619 is executed, the normal control process is terminated.

  Here, after the effect pattern is determined, the effect progress process for executing the process of updating the effect image will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect progress process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec).

  In step S4801, it is determined whether it is the output timing of the drawing list. If it is the drawing list output timing, the process advances to step S4802. In step S4802, a drawing list is selected and output. Specifically, the drawing list information to be output is specified based on the set production pattern and the elapsed time information, and the drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105. By outputting according to the period during which the drawing list has elapsed, the image on the display device 346 is updated so that the special effects and the teaching effects proceed as a series of flows. Hereinafter, the processing in steps S4803 to S4806 will be described later.

  Next, the bonus time control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the bonus time control process, a process based on a command output from the main controller 350 when the game round is ended is mainly executed. The bonus time control process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec). Specifically, in the bonus time control process, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been started (step S4701). If the bonus has been started, a process of starting a bonus game is performed. In addition, it is determined whether or not a bonus game is in progress. If a bonus game is being played, processing related to the bonus game is performed.

  In step S4701, it is determined whether a start command is received from main controller 350. If a start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4702. In step S4702, a flag erasing process is executed. In the flag erasing process, it means that a start command has been received and the game has shifted to a bonus game, so the display-side bonus winning flag storage area and the special effect execution flag storage area are cleared. When the special effect execution flag is not set, the state where the special effect execution flag storage area is not set is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S4703, a bonus game flag indicating that the game has shifted to the bonus game is set in a bonus game flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104. Accordingly, the display control device 370 can grasp that the current gaming state is a bonus game. In step S 4703, “345” is set in the display side calculation payout counter provided in the various counter areas 104 c of the work RAM 104.

  Thereafter, in step S4704, a bonus game display pattern setting process is executed. In this display pattern setting process, an effect pattern from the start to the end of the bonus game is set. From this effect pattern, timing for outputting drawing list information after the bonus game is started, information for specifying the type of the drawing list information, and the like can be specified.

  In a succeeding step S4705, information on a drawing list for bonus start is output. Specifically, the information of the drawing list for starting bonus is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, the display for starting bonus is started on the display device 346. When the process of step S4705 is executed, the bonus time control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the start command has not been received in step S4701, the process proceeds to step S4706. In step S4706, it is determined whether a bonus game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the bonus game flag is set in the bonus game flag storage area. If the bonus game flag is not set, the bonus time control process is terminated.

  If the bonus game flag is set, the process advances to step S4707. In step S4707, it is determined whether an end command has been received from main controller 350.

  If it is determined in step S4707 that an end command has not been received, the process advances to step S4708. In step S4708, it is determined whether a winning command has been received. If the winning command has not been received, it means that the game is not started or is in the middle of the game, and this bonus time control process is terminated as it is.

  If a winning command is received in step S4708, the process proceeds to step S4709. In step S4709, the current payout amount is subtracted from the display-side remaining payout number counter provided in the various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104. As described above, the winning command includes information on the winning combination that has been won this time. The display control device 370 stores in advance the number of medals to be paid out when a winning combination is established, and the number of medals paid out can be grasped by grasping the winning combination.

  In a succeeding step S4710, it is determined whether or not the value of the display side remaining payout counter is 15 or less. As described above, in this slot machine 300, the maximum number of medals to be paid out when one game is completed is 15 (when a bell winning is established). For this reason, in step S4710, it is determined whether or not the next game round can be the final game round of the bonus game. If the value of the display-side remaining payout counter is greater than 15, the bonus game is not terminated at the next game round, and the bonus control process is terminated as it is.

  If the value of the display-side remaining payout counter is 15 or less in step S4710, the process proceeds to step S4711. In step S4711, a bonus transfer data transfer instruction process is executed. The bonus end data transfer instruction process is for transferring bonus end data, which is part of the bonus game image data, to the bridge-side RAM 107. Specifically, a transfer command corresponding to the bonus end data is read from the program ROM 103 and the read transfer command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109.

  In the slot machine 300, in the bonus game, even if the value of the display side remaining payout counter becomes 15 or less in step S4711, if the winning combination of watermelon or any combination is not won, The bonus game may not end at the next game round, such as when the above-mentioned loss occurs. For this reason, it may be continuously determined that the value of the display side remaining payout counter is 15 or less. When the bonus CPU ending data transfer instruction process has already been executed, the display CPU 102 is set not to execute the bonus ending data transfer instruction process again in the bonus game. Specifically, when the process of step S4711 is executed, a transfer instruction execution flag is set. When the flag is set, even if an affirmative determination is made in step S4710, the process in step S4711 is not executed. The transfer instruction execution flag is cleared when the bonus game ends.

  Here, data transfer in the bonus game will be described with reference to steps S4803 and S4804 in the effect progress process (FIG. 78).

  If it is determined in step S4801 that it is not the drawing list output timing, or if the drawing list information is output in step S4802, the process advances to step S4803. In step S4803, it is determined whether it is the first to third data transfer timing for the bonus game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the data transfer timing for the bonus game based on information on the effect pattern and the elapsed time. If it is the first to third data transfer timing for the bonus game in step S4803, the process proceeds to step S4804. In step S4804, the corresponding data transfer instruction process for the bonus game is executed.

  The transfer timing of the first to third data for the bonus game is the timing when the display based on the data that has already been transferred is started. In the corresponding data transfer instruction process for the bonus game, a command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109 so as to transfer data that is continuous with the data that has already been transferred. For example, when the display for starting the bonus is started, it is determined that it is the first to third data transfer timing for the bonus game. Then, a transfer instruction of the first data for the bonus game is performed as data continuous to the data for starting the bonus. Thereafter, when the display for starting the bonus ends, the transfer of the second data for the bonus game is started. Here, the second data for the bonus game is overwritten in the area where the data for starting the baud is stored. This is a device for reducing the amount of information stored in the bridge-side RAM 107, and the storage capacity of the bridge-side RAM 107 can be reduced.

  In step S4804, when the bonus game data is transferred, the capacity of the bonus game first data to the third data is set so that the capacity for storing the bonus end data remains in the bridge-side RAM 107. ing. The bonus end data is transferred based on the transfer instruction in step S4711 of the bonus control process, and the display of the first to third data for the bonus game is executed. Forwarded when In the bonus game, leaving a capacity capable of storing bonus ending data in the bridge-side RAM 107 means that the bonus game first data to third data (specifically, the first data to the third data are 2 And the bonus end data can be stored simultaneously.

  Returning to the description of the bonus time control process (FIG. 77), if the end command is received in step S4707, the process proceeds to step S4712. In step S4712, it means that the end command is received and the bonus game is ended, so that one game number flag is set in the one game number flag storage area. In a succeeding step S4713, the bonus game flag is cleared. In step S4714, a bonus end drawing list is output. Specifically, information on the drawing list for ending the bonus is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the display device 346 starts displaying an image for ending the bonus. If the process of step S4714 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4715. In step S4715, a special effect data transfer instruction process is executed. In the special effect data transfer instruction process, the special effect image data is transferred to the bridge RAM 107. Specifically, a transfer command corresponding to the first data for special effects is read from the program ROM 103, and the read transfer command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109.

  The amount of data to be transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 at a time as compared with the configuration in which all the image data related to the special effect is transferred at a time by transferring the first data of the image data for the special effect in step S4715. Can be reduced. As a result, the storage capacity of the bridge RAM 107 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, when the bonus end image is displayed, the operation of the start lever 321 is invalid. The transfer of the first data for special effects ends in a period in which the operation of the start lever 321 is invalid.

  Here, step S4805 in the effect progress process (FIG. 78) and data transfer when the bonus effect is won in the first game after the bonus game ends and the special effect is executed after the special effect is executed. This will be described using step S4806.

  In the effect progress process, if it is not the first to third data transfer timing for the bonus game in step S4803, or if the corresponding data transfer instruction process for the bonus game is executed in step S4804, the process proceeds to step S4805. In step S4805, it is determined whether it is the second and third data transfer timings for special effects. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the data transfer timing for the special effect based on the information of the effect pattern and the elapsed time. If it is the second and third data transfer timings for special effects in step S4805, the process proceeds to step S4805. In step S4806, a corresponding data transfer instruction process for special effects is executed.

  The transfer timing of the second and third data for special effects is the timing at which display based on data that has already been transferred is started. In the data transfer instruction process corresponding to the special effect, a command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109 so as to transfer the second data or the third data for the special effect. Here, when the second data or the third data for special effects is transferred, each of the data is already overwritten and stored in an area in which data used for display on the display device 346 is stored. It has become so. For example, when display based on the second data for special effects is started, it is determined that it is the transfer timing of the third data for special effects. In this case, the third data for special effects is overwritten in the area in which the first data for special effects already referenced for display execution is stored. As a result, it is not necessary to store all of the first to third data at the same time, and the storage capacity of the bridge RAM 107 can be reduced.

  If it is determined in step S4805 that it is not the second and third data transfer timings for the special effect, or if the corresponding data transfer instruction process for the special effect is executed in step S4806, the effect progress process is terminated. To do.

  Here, when the transfer of the special effect data is started, the display for the bonus end is started, and the display related to the first data to the third data for the bonus game is ended. For this reason, the special effect data is overwritten in the area where the first data to the third data for the bonus game are stored. As a result, the storage area of the bridge RAM 107 can be used efficiently, and the storage capacity of the bridge RAM 107 can be reduced.

  Note that the data transfer according to the transfer instruction in step S4804 and step S4806 ends before the display of the data is started.

<Display control when winning a bonus role>
A state of display control when a bonus combination is won by executing the above-described processing will be described. FIG. 79 is a timing chart for explaining the state of display control when a bonus combination is won. FIG. 80 is a timing chart for explaining the state of display control when the remaining payout amount is 15 or less in the bonus game.

  By winning the bonus combination at the timing of tb1 in FIG. 79, the data transfer instruction process for teaching effect and the data transfer instruction process for bonus are executed in the normal control process by the display CPU. Thereby, the transfer of the teaching effect data is started at the timing of tb1. Then, the transfer of the data for starting the bonus is started at the timing tb2 when the transfer of the data for teaching effect is completed.

  Thereafter, the transfer of bonus start data ends at the timing of tb3. Each of the teaching transfer data transfer end timing and the bonus start data transfer end timing ends before the timing tb4 when the bonus game winning is completed. . Specifically, as described above, the transfer is completed before the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R start the constant speed rotation in the game times in which the bonus combination is won.

  At the timing of tb5, the next game round won for the bonus combination is started. If the teaching effect execution lottery is won in step S4616 and step S4617, the teaching effect is started at the timing tb5 when the game round is started. Then, an image when the teaching effect ends at the timing of tb6 is displayed on the display device 346.

  When the game play in which the teaching effect is started at the timing of tb7 ends, the display of the image when the teaching effect ends is maintained. Specifically, when the teaching effect is executed, the image display when the teaching effect ends is maintained until the transition to the bonus game. For this reason, even if the next game round is started at the timing of tb8, the display device 346 is in a state where an image when the teaching effect is ended is displayed.

  When the bonus combination winning is established at the timing of tb9, the bonus flag is cleared and the bonus game is started. When the bonus game is started, display based on bonus start data is started. In this case, it is determined in step S4803 of the effect progression process (FIG. 78) that it is the transfer timing of the first to third data for the bonus game, and the first data for the bonus game is determined based on the transfer instruction process in step S4804. Transfer starts. Then, the transfer of the first data for the bonus game is finished at the timing of tb10.

  After that, when display based on the first data for the bonus game is started at the timing of tb11, it is the transfer timing of the first to third data for the bonus game in step S4803 of the effect progress process (FIG. 78). Determination is made, and transfer of the second data for the bonus game is started based on the transfer instruction process in step S4804. Then, the transfer of the second data for the bonus game is finished at the timing of tb12.

  Thereafter, similarly, the transfer of the third data for the bonus game is started based on the start of the display based on the second data for the bonus game. The effect for the bonus game is performed over a plurality of game times and proceeds regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 322 to 324 in each game time. Therefore, the transfer timing and end timing of each data for the bonus game are generated independently without being synchronized with the start timing and end timing of the game times. The effect for the bonus game is repeatedly executed until the bonus game is completed. In the bonus game, the effect based on each data in the order of first data → second data → third data → first data. Is executed. Therefore, when the display based on the third data for the bonus game is started, the transfer of the first data for the bonus game is set to start.

  Based on the fact that the game time is ended at the timing of tc1 in FIG. 80 and the value of the display side remaining payout counter becomes 15 or less in step S4710 of the bonus time control process, the data transfer instruction process for the bonus end is executed. Executed. The writing control unit 121 preferentially performs bonus transfer data transfer among bonus transfer data transfer and special effect data transfer. This is a device for ending the transfer of data to be used first because the bonus end display is performed first in the bonus end display and the special effect display. .

  Specifically, the data transfer for bonus termination is started at the timing of tc1. At the timing tc2, the transfer of bonus end data is completed. The transfer of the bonus end data is completed before the time tc3, which is the timing before the next game round when the remaining payout on the display side becomes 15 or less, is completed. Specifically, the transfer of the bonus end data ends before the invalid period of the stop detection sensors 322a to 324a in the next game time when the display side remaining payout becomes 15 or less ends. .

  At the timing of tc3, when the game round is ended and the bonus game is ended, the bonus end effect is executed based on the bonus end data. At the timing of tc3, the data transfer instruction process for special effects is executed, and the transfer of the first data for special effects is started. The transfer of the first data for special effects ends at the timing of tc4 before the image is displayed when the effect for ending the bonus ends at the timing of tc5. The bonus end image is maintained until the next game round is started at timing tc6.

  Here, in the slot machine 300, when an end command is output, the slot machine 300 waits for a predetermined period. Specifically, when the bonus command process is completed by outputting the end command, the process waits for a predetermined period without performing the bet permission process. This is to secure a period for the player to fully recognize the bonus game end image displayed on the display device 346 and to ensure a period for ending the data transfer for special effects. It is.

  When the bonus combination is won in the game times started at the timing of tc6, the special effect is started based on the first data for the special effect. At the timing of tc6, the bonus middle data transfer instruction process is executed in step S4609 of the normal time control process, and it is determined in step S4805 of the effect progression process that it is the second and third data transfer timings. The second data transfer instruction process for special effects is executed. Based on each data transfer instruction process, the writing controller 121 transfers second data for special effects after transferring bonus start data. Specifically, at the timing tc7, the transfer of the bonus start data is completed, and the transfer of the second data for the special effect is started. Thereafter, the transfer of the second data for special effects is finished at the timing of tc8.

  When the display based on the second data for special effects is started at the subsequent timing tc9, it is the transfer timing of the second and third data for special effects in step S4805 of the effect progress process (FIG. 78). Determination is made, and the transfer of the third data for special effects is started based on the transfer instruction process in step S4806. Then, the transfer of the third data for special effects is finished at the timing of tc10. After the effect based on the third data for the special effect is ended at the timing of tc11, the image when the special effect ends is maintained until the bonus game is started. As described above, the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 is invalid when the special effect is being executed (when the special effect is in progress). For this reason, when the special effect is started, the game times are not ended by the player until the image when the special effect ends at the timing of tc10 is displayed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  After winning the bonus combination, the teaching effect can be executed. When the bonus combination is won, by transferring the data for teaching effects, it is possible to secure the period for transferring the data for teaching effects before the teaching effects are executed. Further, in the game times won for the bonus combination, the display effect pattern is set in step S4614, so that the teaching effect is not executed and the normal effect is executed. Thereby, it is only necessary to end the transfer of the data for teaching effects until the game times won for the bonus combination are completed, and the effect of securing the period for transferring the data for teaching effects can be enhanced.

  When a bonus combination is won, bonus game data is transferred. Thus, it is possible to secure a period for transferring bonus game data before a bonus combination winning is established. When a bonus combination is won, the bonus combination is reserved until a bonus combination is won. In the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is won, the bonus game data is transferred in advance, so that the effect of executing the bonus game effect can be obtained. In addition, even if the data of the performance executed in response to the bonus combination winning is transferred in advance based on the fact that the bonus combination is won, the transferred data is not referred to, and the transfer of the data is unnecessary. It will not be a difficult process.

  A special effect is executed based on the fact that the bonus combination is won in the first game after the bonus game ends. When the bonus end display is executed, the special effect data is transferred to the special effect data when the bonus combination is won in the first game after the bonus game ends. 1 data) can be prevented from being transferred. Further, when the bonus end display is executed, the operation of the start lever 321 is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bonus combination from being won at the timing before the transfer of the special effect data ends.

  When the bonus combination is won, the teaching effect data is preferentially transferred out of the teaching effect data and the bonus start data. The teaching effect is executed before the bonus combination winning is established, and the bonus game effect is executed when the bonus winning combination is established. By preferentially transferring the teaching effect data, it is possible to suppress the transfer of the teaching effect data not being completed when the teaching effect is executed. As a result, even if a plurality of data is transferred continuously, it is difficult to cause a problem.

  The period in which the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 is invalidated when the effect for ending the bonus game is being executed or when the special effect is being executed. In a period in which the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 is invalid, the game does not proceed at the pace at which the player operates the stop switches 322 to 324. By transferring data during the period in which the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 is invalidated, the data transfer may be terminated during a preset period in which the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 is invalidated. It is easy to secure a period for performing the transfer.

  In addition, you may change the timing which transfers the data for each production. For example, the timing of transferring bonus effect data is selected as a bonus combination, and one of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R is stopped, and the remaining one reel is stopped. It may be a case. In this case, data transfer is performed based on the reel control processing for the two reels. That is, the one process when the specific process is executed based on the execution of the one process can be arbitrarily changed.

  Although the effect is executed as the specific control, the specific control to be executed may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the control program or the like in the bonus game may be transferred based on the fact that the bonus combination is won. In this case, the control program or the like in the bonus game may be stored in the NAND flash memory, and the control program or the like may be transferred to the read RAM each time a bonus combination is won. By using a NAND flash memory as a storage means for a control program or the like, the capacity can be increased while suppressing the manufacturing cost as compared with a configuration using a NOR flash memory.

  The timing for transferring bonus game end data and special effect data may be changed. For example, data transfer may be started when the value of the display side remaining payout counter becomes smaller than twice the maximum payout number of medals in one game time.

  The bonus game effect data is transferred based on the bonus combination winning, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, in a gaming machine that can establish a bonus prize when a predetermined number of games have elapsed, it is before a predetermined period (before a predetermined number of games) that allows a bonus prize to be established. In such a case, or when it is possible to establish a bonus prize, bonus game effect data may be transferred.

  When a bonus combination is won, the bonus transfer flag is displayed and the bonus data transfer instruction process is executed after the bonus win flag is set. However, before the bonus win flag is set, the bonus transfer data transfer instruction is executed. Processing may be executed. That is, the bonus game effect data may be transferred when the bonus combination is won or when the bonus combination winning is established. That is, it is not necessary to transfer data when the first control is executed, and data may be transferred when the first control is executed.

  Even if the bonus combination is won, the bonus winning is not established if the stop switches 322 to 324 are not operated at a predetermined timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. When a bonus combination is won, a bonus winning may be established at the game times won for the bonus combination regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 322 to 324. Even in this case, the transfer in the case where the data transfer process for the bonus medium is executed is completed before the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R start the constant speed rotation, so that the effect for the bonus medium can be performed well. it can.

  Although the bonus game is set as the special game state, the type of the special game state may be arbitrarily changed. For example, as a special gaming state, a gaming state in which the probability of winning a re-game is higher than the normal state (so-called replay time), or a gaming state that teaches an established combination or stop switch operation order to establish a winning (So-called assist time) can be considered. In this case, based on the fact that the game state can be shifted to or the state of the predetermined period for shifting to the game state, the data for performance relating to the game state may be transferred.

  Although the normal effect is set as a regular data group, at least a part of the normal effect may be transferred to the bridge RAM 107 each time. In this case, it is preferable to transfer a normal performance having a low execution option to the bridge-side RAM 107 each time. For example, in the case where an effect is executed across a plurality of game times and a series of effects is advanced as the game times progress, a series of effects executed across a plurality of game times Of these, when an effect corresponding to the first game time is executed, the data for the effect executed in the next game time may be transferred.

  The conditions for ending the bonus game may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the bonus game may be ended when a predetermined number of games have elapsed since the transition to the bonus game. Further, the bonus game may be ended when a predetermined combination is won a predetermined number of times in the bonus game. In this case, when the bonus game ends before the predetermined number of games, or when the remaining number of times to win a predetermined role until the bonus game ends becomes a predetermined number of times, transfer of data for ending the bonus May be performed.

  You may change the timing which the transfer of each production | generation data is complete | finished. For example, the data transfer may be completed before the rotation of the reels 317L, 317M, and 317R is started and the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 becomes valid. Further, for example, the transfer may be completed by the time the game times that have been started are completed. In the slot machine 300, a wait period is set, and one game time does not become shorter than a predetermined period. For this reason, the data transfer may be completed in a period shorter than the cycle of one game. In addition, for example, when one stop switch is operated, an invalid period in which the operation of the stop switch is invalid before the operation of the other stop switch is valid. The data transfer may be completed within the accumulated period. Specifically, as an ineffective period, an acceleration period until each reel 317L, 317M, 317R rotates at a constant speed, a stop switch 322-324 is operated, and a reel 317L, 317M, 317R corresponding to the operation is stopped. At least one of the periods until the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 becomes effective after any of the stop switches 322 to 324 is operated and the corresponding reels 317L, 317M, 317R are stopped is set. Then, the data transfer may be completed in the shortest game time period which is the cumulative period of the set invalid period.

  Although the invalid period during which the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 is invalid is set, the invalid period may be set as a period during which the stop switches 322 to 324 cannot be operated. For example, the stop switch 322 to prevent the player from touching the stop switches 322 to 324 such as the stop switches 322 to 324 being shielded during the invalid period, or the stop switch 322 so that the stop switches 322 to 324 cannot be operated during the invalid period. The thing etc. to which -324 is locked can be considered.

  The timing at which the bonus data transfer instruction process in the normal control process is executed may be changed. For example, when a bonus winning command is received, a bonus data transfer instruction process may be executed before the special effect display pattern setting process is executed. In this case, the bonus data transfer instruction process can be performed at an early timing, and a longer period of data transfer can be secured.

  The following can be considered as effects for transferring data when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, an effect is set that is executed across a plurality of game times and proceeds in accordance with the progress of the game times. Data related to display in the first game round is set as regular data. Data related to display in the remaining game times is transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 when display in the first game time is started or started. In this configuration, if the display at the first game time is not executed unless the display at the first game time is executed, the data transfer is performed when the display at the first game time is started or started. As a result, the storage capacity can be reduced. In addition, after the display in the first game round is started, if the display in the remaining game rounds differs depending on the player's game operation (operation timing of the stop switches 322 to 324) and the winning combination, When display related to the game times is executed, display data related to effects that can be executed in the remaining game times may be transferred in advance. In this case, even if any of the display patterns is selected when the display of a plurality of patterns can be executed after the display related to the first game time, the display in the remaining game times can be favorably performed.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied alone to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments in a predetermined combination. Moreover, you may apply the following each structure to embodiment which is not illustrated as an application object of the structure.

  (1) In the first embodiment, the bridge-side RAM 107 may not store a plurality of types of data groups at the same time. In this case, one type of data group is alternately stored in the bridge side RAM 107. Even with this configuration, it is possible to satisfactorily display an image for a predetermined period using the data group transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107. However, in this configuration, a data group transfer waiting time occurs between one production range and the next production range, and the progression of production is likely to be interrupted. A configuration in which a plurality of types of data groups are simultaneously stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 as in the embodiment is preferable.

  (2) Instead of the configuration in which the VDP 105 and the write control unit 121 are connected to the bridge-side RAM 107 via the input / output driver circuit 122 of the bridge LSI 109, the VDP 105 and the write control unit 121 are individually connected to the bridge-side RAM 107, respectively. It is good also as a connected structure. Further, a relay board may be provided instead of the bridge LSI 109, and the VDP 105, the bridge RAM 107, and the bridge LSI 109 may be connected to the relay board. In this case, the input / output driver circuit 122 is unnecessary in the bridge LSI 109.

  When image data is transferred from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108, a data transfer instruction is issued from the display CPU 102 or VDP 105 to the bridge LSI 109, and the bridge LSI 109 reads the image data from the bridge-side RAM 107 and The read image data may be transmitted to the VDP 105, and the VDP 105 may be configured to write the transmitted image data to the VDP RAM 108. In this case, since the VDP 105 does not need to directly access the bridge-side RAM 107, the input / output driver circuit 122 is unnecessary.

  The bridge LSI 109 may not be provided with the write control unit 121, and the function of the write control unit 121 may be mounted on the bridge LSI 109 as a hardware circuit. That is, the bridge LSI 109 may have a configuration in which data transfer is performed based on a circuit configuration instead of data transfer based on a programmed control process.

  (3) The function of the display CPU 102, the function of the program ROM 103, the function of the work RAM 104, the function of the VDP 105, the function of the character ROM 106, the function of the bridge side RAM 107, the function of the VDP side RAM 108 and the function of the bridge LSI 109 It may be made into a chip, or all may be made into one chip.

  (4) The configuration for adjusting the access timing of the VDP 105 and the write control unit 121 to the bridge-side RAM 107 is not limited to the configuration in the first embodiment, and the VDP 105 and the write control unit 121 are simultaneously This is optional as long as the bridge RAM 107 is not accessed. For example, the VDP 105 may output an access signal during a period in which the bridge RAM 107 is accessed, and the write control unit 121 may access the bridge RAM 107 in a state where no access signal is input from the VDP 105. In this case, the chance that the write control unit 121 can access the bridge-side RAM 107 is higher than that in the first embodiment.

  Further, the VDP 105 may output a non-access signal or an access signal to the display CPU 102 and adjust the period during which the write control unit 121 accesses the bridge-side RAM 107 in the display CPU 102. Further, the display CPU 102 may be configured to be able to grasp the situation in which the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge-side RAM 107 without receiving a signal from the VDP 105.

  (5) When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is necessary to use the normal data group in a situation where the transfer of the normal data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed but the transfer to the VDP side RAM 108 is not completed. In this case, the common data group may be read from the bridge RAM 107 without waiting for the transfer to the VDP RAM 108 to be completed. In this case, the timing at which control using the regular data group can be started can be advanced.

  (6) A data group other than the regular data group may be appropriately transferred and stored in an area other than the regular area 137 in the VDP RAM 108. In this case, a change data group such as a normal reach data group and a super reach data group is transferred to the VDP RAM 108. In this configuration, when the change data group is transferred, it is necessary to give a transfer instruction from the display CPU 102 not only to the write control unit 121 but also to the VDP 105.

  (7) The regular area 137 is set as an area of a predetermined address in the read RAM, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area functioning as the regular area 137 may be appropriately changed. Good. In this case, it is necessary for the display CPU 102 or the VDP 105 to grasp the address information of the area currently set as the regular area 137. According to this configuration, for example, in a configuration in which an area other than the regular area 137 in the VDP-side RAM 108 functions as a change area, the degree of freedom in area allocation when simultaneously storing and holding a plurality of types of data groups is increased. .

  (8) In addition to the character ROM 106, non-volatile storage means for storing a data group in advance may be provided. Specifically, a NOR flash memory is provided as the other nonvolatile storage means, and the normal data group is stored in the NOR flash memory. Then, by connecting a NOR flash memory to the drawing means such as the VDP 105, when displaying an image corresponding to the regular data group, the regular data group may be read from the NOR flash memory. According to this configuration, it is necessary to provide a plurality of types of non-volatile storage means, but it is possible to display an image corresponding to the regular data group without transferring the regular data group when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. To be able to do that. Even in this configuration, only the regular data group is stored in the NOR type flash memory, and the change data group whose data capacity is likely to increase with the diversification of effects is stored in the character ROM 106. As a result, it is sufficient to use a NOR flash memory having a small storage capacity, so that the above-described effects can be achieved while reducing costs.

  (9) In the first embodiment, when the backup power is not supplied to the read RAM and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data group that has been stored in the read RAM until then. Instead of a configuration that is destroyed or erased, a backup power for reading may be supplied. In this configuration, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the read RAM at the time of the power interruption is destroyed, and if it is not destroyed, the common data group is initialized. It is good also as a structure which initializes a common data group when not destroying and destroying. This reduces the frequency with which the common data group is initialized when the power is turned on.

  As the means for supplying the backup power, a power supply unit for power interruption for supplying backup power to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 in the power supply and launch control device 80 may also be used. An intermediate power supply unit may be provided.

  (10) The cache buffer 123 is not limited to a configuration in which only one unit data is temporarily stored, and a plurality of unit data may be temporarily stored at the same time. In this case, when data read from the character ROM 106 is transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107, the degree of freedom in adjusting the transfer timing is increased.

  (11) The storage means for reading is not limited to the volatile storage means RAM as long as the speed required for reading data is faster than that of the character ROM 106 and can be overwritten by the write control unit 121.

  (12) It is not essential that both the inspection image and the initial display image are displayed when the power is turned on, and only one or both of the images may be displayed. However, in order to prevent a situation in which nothing is displayed on the symbol display device 31 until the standby image can be displayed, it is preferable to display at least one of the inspection image and the initial display image.

  (13) The transfer order of a plurality of types of data groups at power-on is not limited to that in the first embodiment. For example, the abnormality notification data group may be transferred with the highest priority. In this case, an early transition is made to a state in which abnormality notification can be performed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the abnormality notification data group is transferred next to the test data group. Alternatively, the normal symbol data group may be transferred after the transfer of each background data group is completed.

  (14) The data group included in the regular data group is not limited to those exemplified in the above embodiments. For example, in a configuration in which a demo image is displayed when a standby image continues for a predetermined period, the demo image may be included in the regular data group. Further, in the configuration that switches to a state in which an image of the model explanation is displayed in accordance with the operation of the effect operating device 58, the data group for displaying the switching destination image is set as the regular data group. Also good.

  In addition, the abnormality notification data group may not be included in the regular data group, and the normal symbol data group and each background data group may not be included in the regular data group. In the configuration in which the abnormality notification data group is not included in the regular data group, the abnormality is notified by the audio lamp control device 90 by the display lamp unit 54 or the speaker unit 55 when an abnormality occurs. It is preferable. In this case, even if the abnormality notification in the symbol display device 31 is delayed with respect to the occurrence of the abnormality, the abnormality notification is performed by a notification means different from the symbol display device 31. Therefore, the occurrence of the abnormality in the pachinko machine 10 as a whole. In contrast, the abnormality notification can be started at an early stage.

  Further, when attention is paid to the configuration other than the regular data group, the regular data group may not be present. However, for the occurrence of a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing, it is preferable that a common data group is set in order to display an image corresponding to the specific event at an early stage.

  (15) In the situation where the initial setting process at the time of power-on in the main controller 60 is being executed, that is, before the execution of the process for advancing the game is started in the main controller 60, at least one in the regular data group It may be configured to complete the transfer of the data group of the copy. For example, the configuration may be such that the transfer of the initial display data group is completed in the situation where the initial setting process is being executed in the main controller 60.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which completes transfer of the data group for abnormality notification in the condition where the initial setting process is performed in the main controller 60. In this case, when the occurrence of an abnormality is identified in main controller 60, early abnormality notification can be always performed.

  Further, the configuration may be such that the transfer of the simple symbol data group is completed in the situation where the initial setting process is being executed in the main controller 60. In this case, when the game times start condition is satisfied, the symbol display device 31 surely immediately displays the variation of the symbol by either the simple symbol or the normal symbol.

  Further, when attention is paid to a configuration other than the symbol variation display using the simple symbols, the following configurations are also conceivable. In other words, the configuration may be such that the transfer of the initial variation display data group such as the normal symbol data group and the background data group is completed in a situation where the initial setting process is being executed in the main controller 60. In this case, when the game times start condition is satisfied, the symbol display by the symbol display device 31 is surely performed immediately by the symbol display.

  (16) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball can be launched even if the transfer of the simple symbol data group has not been completed, and the start condition of the game times can be satisfied. The game ball may not be fired until the transfer of the simple symbol data group is completed. In this case, when the game times start condition is satisfied, the symbol display device 31 surely immediately displays the variation of the symbol by either the simple symbol or the normal symbol.

  Further, when attention is paid to a configuration other than the symbol variation display using the simple symbols, the following configurations are also conceivable. That is, it may be configured such that the game ball cannot be fired until the transfer of the initial variation display data group such as the normal symbol data group and the background data group is completed. In this case, when the game times start condition is satisfied, the symbol display by the symbol display device 31 is surely performed immediately by the symbol display. In addition, when the game symbol start condition is satisfied in the situation where the simple symbol data group is not set in the character ROM 106 and the normal symbol data group and the background data group have not been read, the symbol display The device 31 may be configured such that the display of the image so far is maintained and the display of the image corresponding to the game times is not performed.

  (17) When attention is paid to a configuration other than the configuration in which the change data group can be overwritten in an area including at least a part of the area in which the regular data group is stored, the operation to the read RAM is performed. An area in which the regular data group is stored may not be overwritten when transferring the system data group or the all-round effect data group. In this case, it is necessary to make the storage capacity of the read RAM larger than that in each of the above embodiments, or make the data capacity of the operation system data group and the all-round effect data group smaller than in each of the above embodiments. The processing load is reduced because there is no need to perform processing related to overwriting or restoration of the regular data group. In this case, the common data group is stored and held at least during power-on.

  (18) When the change data group such as the operation system data group or the all round effect data group is overwritten on the area in which the regular data group is stored, the bridge of the data group of the first half in the change data group The first half completion signal is output from the write control unit 121 to the VDP 105 or the display CPU 102 at the timing when the transfer to the side RAM 107 is completed, and based on this, the data group of the first half is transferred from the bridge side RAM 107 to the VDP RAM 108 It is good.

  (19) When overwriting the change data group such as the operation system data group or the all-round effect data group in the area where the common data group is stored, the first half portion from the bridge side RAM 107 to the VDP side RAM 108 A configuration in which an overwrite completion signal is output from the VDP 105 to the write control unit 121 or the display CPU 102 at the timing when the transfer of the data group is completed, and based on this, the transfer of the latter half of the data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is started in the write control unit 121 It is good.

  (20) Of the operation system data group, a data group different from the data group corresponding to each production range selected as the branch destination may be overwritten on the common area 137.

  (21) In the super reach B display, the production range of the destination is changed according to the number of times the production operation device 58 is operated. Instead, when the production operation device 58 is long pressed. In the case where a continuous pressing operation is performed, the destination production range may be changed according to the operation. Even in this case, it is preferable to transfer a data group corresponding to the effect range of each destination to the RAM for reading in advance. In addition, when the production operation device 58 is operated or when the production operation device 58 is operated in a predetermined manner, the production in the production range of the destination may be immediately started.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the effect range of advancing destination is changed by conditions other than operation of the operation device 58 for effects. For example, the effect range of the destination may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through a predetermined ball entering part during a predetermined period during reach display. It is good also as a structure by which the production | presentation range of advancing destination is changed according to the number of spheres entering. Even in this case, it is preferable to transfer a data group corresponding to the effect range of each destination to the RAM for reading in advance.

  (22) In the configuration in which the destination production range is changed in accordance with a predetermined condition such as the number of operations of the production operation device 58, the destination production range is not limited to two types and is set to three or more types. May be. For example, a plurality of reference times are set as the number of operations of the effect operation device 58, and one of the three or more types of branch effect ranges depends on which of the plurality of reference times corresponds to the destination effect. A configuration selected as the range is conceivable. Even in this case, it is preferable to transfer a data group corresponding to the effect range of each destination to the RAM for reading in advance. In this configuration, the data capacity of the data group to be read in advance is larger than that in each of the above embodiments. Therefore, the configuration in which the change data group is overwritten on the area including at least a part of the area in which the common data group is stored becomes more effective.

  (23) At the time of switching the display mode, not only the background image but also the type of symbols to be displayed in a variable manner may be switched. In addition to the background image and the type of design, the type of reach display that can be selected or the type of reach display that can be easily selected may be changed. Further, the display modes are not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. Further, the display mode may not be switched.

  (24) A configuration in which the destination production range is changed according to a predetermined condition such as the number of operations of the production operation device 58 may be set as a big hit production instead of a reach display. Further, the player may select a destination production range based on the operation of the production operation device 58. Even in these cases, it is preferable to transfer a data group corresponding to the effect range of each destination to the RAM for reading in advance.

  (25) When the variable display by the simple symbol is performed, the variable display time may be shorter or longer than the variable display time determined by the main controller 60. However, in order to make the variable display time of each game time match between the main control device 60 and the display control device 100, even if the variable display by simple symbols is performed, the variable display time is the main control device. The variable display time determined at 60 is preferable.

  (26) When transfer to the RAM for reading out a data group that enables variable display with a normal symbol such as a normal symbol data group and a background data group is completed while the variable symbol is displayed with a simple symbol. In this case, the display may be switched to the variable display based on the normal symbol at that time. In this case, it is necessary to create a display table for variable display using the normal symbols at the start of the game times even if the game times are displayed using the simple symbols. According to this configuration, although the processing load increases, the timing at which the variable display with the normal symbol can be performed can be advanced.

  (27) By giving a special notification such as a variation display with a simple symbol in a situation where the variation display with the normal symbol cannot be performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning to the operation ports 23 and 24 has not been invalidated. When paying attention to the remarkable effect, the configuration relating to the special notification may be applied to the configuration not including the RAM for reading.

  As the said structure, the alerting | reporting means different from the symbol display apparatus 31 is connected to the display control apparatus 100, for example. Then, the display CPU 102 determines whether or not the symbol display device 31 is normal and whether or not the signal path to the symbol display device 31 is normal, and if any abnormality is specified, the notification is made. Special notification such as change display with simple symbols is performed by means. In this case, even if any of the above-described abnormalities occur, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning to the operating ports 23, 24 has not been invalidated.

  Further, for example, in the sound lamp control device 90, whether the display control device 100 is functioning normally, whether the signal path between the display control device 100 and the symbol display device 31 is normal, the symbol display device 31 Is determined to function normally, and if any abnormality is identified, a sound indicating that the winning is not invalidated is output from the speaker unit 55. In this case, even if any of the above-described abnormalities occur, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning to the operating ports 23, 24 has not been invalidated.

  (28) In the big hit effect, instead of a configuration in which a data group corresponding to the effect range for all rounds is collectively transferred to the read-out RAM as a data group for all round effects, an effect range for a plurality of rounds It is also possible to set a plurality of data groups including and sequentially transfer them when the reference round starts or ends. In this case, when the data group corresponding to the round production range is transferred to the RAM for reading, it is not necessary to overwrite the area in which the regular data group is stored.

  (29) The area to which the data group corresponding to each effect range is transferred in the reading RAM may be uniquely defined in advance.

  (30) Instead of a configuration in which a display table is created by combining a plurality of variable display tables, a display table is prepared in advance in a one-to-one correspondence with each of a series of effects from the start to the end. It is good also as a structure. In this case, the storage capacity required to store the table information in the program ROM 103 is larger than in the above embodiments, but it is not necessary to create a display table at the start of the game round, and it is prepared in advance. Since it is only necessary to select one display table from the displayed display tables, the processing executed at the start of the game round can be simplified.

  (31) In the variation display table and the jackpot presentation table, not only the transfer start timing of the corresponding data group but also information on the transfer destination area may be set in advance. Further, after the display table is created by the display CPU 102, information related to the transfer destination area of each data group may be written into the created display table. In this case, it is possible to simplify the process of specifying the transfer destination of the data group in the middle of the game times or jackpot effects.

  (32) In each of the above-described embodiments, the notification display is surely generated when the reach display occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification display is performed even when the reach display occurs. It is good also as a structure which may not generate | occur | produce. In this case, since the combination pattern of the type and presence of the notice display and the type and presence of the reach display is larger than in the above embodiments, the storage capacity for the table is larger in the configuration in which the display table is prepared in advance. turn into. Therefore, such as a variable display table and a jackpot effect table, a table is individually set for each effect range, and a display table is created by acquiring these tables as necessary. Is preferred.

  (33) The normal reach display image may be displayed by processing the normal symbol data group and the background data group. Further, the measurement counter may be either an addition type or a subtraction type. In addition, the types of the notice display and the super reach display are not limited to those in the above embodiments and are arbitrary. Further, an infrared or radio wave receiving unit may be provided instead of the production operation device 58, and display mode switching or operation system production may be executed based on the reception result of the receiving unit.

  (34) Determining whether or not the hold information acquired based on winning at the operation ports 23 and 24 corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, determining the type of the hold, etc. Pachinko that is performed at a timing prior to the start of the game times related to the information and performs a hold notice (or hold notification) reflecting the determination result at a timing prior to the start of the game times related to the hold information. A configuration in which a NAND flash memory is used as the character ROM 106 or a configuration in which data transferred from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM is processed to display an image may be applied to the machine.

  (34-1) As an aspect of the hold notice, for example, a series from a game time before the game information related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice to a game time related to the hold information that triggered the execution. A mode in which the effect is displayed on the symbol display device 31 is conceivable. In other words, when it is determined that the predetermined advance information is to be held and the predetermined hold information is set as a trigger for the execution of the hold advance, the first game after the execution of the processing related to the setting is performed. It can be considered that a series of effects are displayed on the symbol display device 31 including the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution.

  Specifically, for the above-described aspect, a series of movies such as a story progressing over time spans a plurality of game times and until the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice (the relevant A configuration to be executed (including game times) is conceivable. In this case, each pattern of multiple game times assumed within the range of the upper limit number of hold information that can be stored (for example, if the upper limit number is “4”, each of four game times, three game times, and two game times) A series of movies corresponding to the number of hold information stored on hold when a decision is made to make a hold notice for predetermined hold information. It may be configured to start.

  Incidentally, a first working port and a second working port are provided, and holding information is acquired separately for each of the first and second working ports and can be stored for each first and second working port. In the configuration in which the upper limit number is set, a series of movies may be prepared individually for each pattern of a plurality of game times assumed within the range of the sum of the upper limit numbers related to both operation ports, A series of movies may be individually prepared for each pattern of a plurality of game times assumed within the range of the upper limit number related to one of the operation ports.

  In addition, when one of the first working port and the second working port is preferentially digested, the storage information is stored in the case where the holding information related to the priority working port is stored. In the configuration in which the hold information related to the priority side operation port is the start target of the game times even if the hold information related to the non-priority side operation port acquired at a timing earlier than the held information is stored Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-described series of hold notices are executed only on either the priority side or the non-priority side. For example, in a situation where a plurality of hold information related to the priority side is stored, when the hold information newly acquired on the priority side is set as the trigger for the execution of the hold notice, the hold notice by the series of movies as described above is issued. It may be configured to be executed, and when the hold information newly acquired on the non-priority side is set as the trigger for the execution of the hold notice in a situation where a plurality of hold information on the non-priority side is stored, as described above It may be configured to execute a hold notice by a series of movies. In this case, in the latter configuration, when the hold information is newly acquired on the priority side while the hold notice by the series of movies is being executed, the hold information is preferentially digested. Therefore, the hold notice by a series of movies may be interrupted.

  As described above, a series of effects related to the hold notice are executed so as to straddle a plurality of game times, thereby performing a continuous effect over a long period of time that is not set in the individual effects of each game time. This makes it possible to diversify the production. Moreover, even if such an effect that is continued over a long time is executed, since it spans a plurality of game times, there is an inconvenience that it takes a long time to digest each game time. Does not occur.

  In addition, a configuration in which a NAND flash memory is used as the character ROM 106 or a configuration in which data transferred from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM is processed to display an image is applied to the gaming machine that makes the reservation notice. If the game times included in the series of effects are to be read in advance, the data group processed at the start of the game times to be executed in the game times prior to the game times to be executed It is good to transfer to RAM. Thereby, since no waiting time for data transfer occurs at the boundary between game times included in the series of effects, the series of effects can proceed smoothly.

  In addition, it is possible to perform a continuous effect over a long time that is not set in the individual effects of each game time by executing a series of effects related to the hold notice so as to straddle a plurality of game times When attention is paid to the remarkable effect of diversifying the production, a NOR type flash memory is used as the character ROM 106 in a configuration in which a series of productions related to the hold notice is executed across a plurality of game times. The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a configuration in which the data is preliminarily transferred from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM.

  (34-2) As another aspect of the reservation notice, the series of effects as described above are not executed, but the execution is performed from the game times before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the reservation notice. In each game time up to the game time related to the hold information that has been triggered by the above, there may be a mode in which an effect different from the normal symbol variation display is started from the start of the game time. In this case, the same effect may be executed in each game time related to the hold notice, or a different effect may be executed for each game time related to the hold notice.

  When a configuration in which a NAND flash memory is used as the character ROM 106 or a configuration in which data transferred from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM is processed to display an image is applied to the gaming machine that makes the reservation notice. In the game times related to the pending notice, a data group processed at the start of the game times to be executed in the game times before the game times to be executed is transferred in advance to the RAM for reading. It is necessary to keep. Thereby, since there is no data transfer waiting time at the boundary between game times related to the hold notice, it is possible to smoothly start the effects of each game time related to the hold notice.

  (35) The object of abnormality notification is not limited to magnetic detection, for example, an act of abnormally vibrating the pachinko machine 10, opening of the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11, opening of the front door frame 14 to the inner frame Alternatively, insertion of foreign matter from the upper plate 56a or the lower plate 57a can be considered. Further, it may be a detection target whether or not the ball trays such as the upper plate 56a and the lower plate 57a are full, or whether or not the tank is in a ball-free state. Regardless of the detection target, it may be configured such that abnormality notification is performed as in the case of magnetic detection. The detection sensor for detecting the abnormality is not limited to the configuration connected to the main control device 60, and may be connected to the sound lamp control device 90 or the display control device 100.

  (36) A configuration in which a NAND flash memory is used as the nonvolatile storage means, a configuration in which data is transferred in advance from the nonvolatile storage means to the read RAM, and a configuration related to these configurations are displayed on the symbol display device 31. In this case, the present invention may be applied to a control unit that handles data different from image data processed in the process. For example, the above configuration may be applied to control data in the display CPU 102. Further, the above configuration may be applied to audio data and light emission data in the audio lamp control device 90. In addition, the above configuration may be applied to control data in the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, the power source and launch control device 80, or the sound lamp control device 90. In addition, in the configuration in which a movable object that performs an operation for playing a game is provided instead of the symbol display device 31, the above configuration may be applied to control data of the movable object.

  (37) The sound lamp control device 90 determines the presence / absence and type of the notice display and the presence / absence and type of the reach display in each game round, and the display control device 100 creates a display table according to the determination result. It is good also as composition to do. Further, a display table may be created by the audio lamp control device 90, and information on the created display table may be transmitted to the display control device 100.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the display control device 100 is controlled by the sound lamp control device 90 based on the command output from the main control device 60, the display control device is based on the command output from the main control device 60. 100 may be configured to control the sound lamp control device 90. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100 are provided separately, the control devices 90 and 100 may be provided as a single control device. One function of 100 may be integrated into the main controller 60, and both functions of both the controllers 90 and 100 may be integrated into the main controller 60. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 60 to the sound lamp control device 90 is also arbitrary.

  (38) In the first embodiment, the data transfer instruction to the bridge LSI 109 is not directly issued from the display CPU 102, but the VDP 105 may give an instruction to the bridge LSI 109 based on the instruction from the display CPU 102. . In this case, the display CPU 102 and the bridge LSI 109 do not need to be directly electrically connected, so that the number of wirings can be reduced.

  (39) When the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge-side RAM 107 instead of the configuration in which the bridge LSI 109 is instructed by a predetermined signal output such as a non-access signal or an access signal that the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge-side RAM 107 The flag may be stored on the circuit of the bridge LSI 109 so that the write control unit 121 cannot access the bridge-side RAM 107. In addition, when the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge-side RAM 107, the configuration may be such that the write control unit 121 cannot access the bridge-side RAM 107 on the circuit of the bridge LSI 109. With these configurations, in a situation where the VDP 105 is not accessing the bridge-side RAM 107, the write control unit 121 can access the bridge-side RAM 107 at an arbitrary timing, and the period during which the write control unit 121 can access the bridge-side RAM 107. Can be ensured longer than in the first embodiment.

  (40) In the first embodiment, the capacity of drawing data for one frame stored in the drawing area 135 and the capacity of an area for storing drawing data for one frame transmitted from the VDP 105 in the symbol display device 31 However, it is good also as a structure which exceeds the capacity | capacitance corresponding to the number of pixels of the display screen G of the symbol display apparatus 31. FIG. According to this configuration, the time required to complete the output of the drawing signal corresponding to the image for one frame is lengthened, and accordingly, the period during which the write control unit 121 can access the bridge-side RAM 107 is lengthened. . Note that data in the drawing data exceeding the capacity corresponding to the number of pixels of the display screen G is not used for displaying an image on the display screen G.

  (41) The display CPU 102 does not set the image data transfer instruction timing as a flag in the display table, but sets elapsed time counter information for specifying the transfer instruction timing according to each data group. A configuration in which a transfer instruction is performed based on the counter information may be employed.

  (42) In the first embodiment, when the temporary data group is temporarily deleted from the normal area 137, the normal symbol data group is also deleted. Instead, the normal symbol data group is replaced with the normal symbol data group. It is good also as a structure which is not erased. The background data group corresponding to the current display mode is not erased, but the background data group not corresponding to the current display mode may be erased. In addition, in the configuration in which the normal symbol data group is individually set corresponding to the display mode, the normal symbol data group corresponding to the current display mode is not erased, but the normal symbol not corresponding to the current display mode. The data group for use may be deleted.

  (43) In the first embodiment, the VDP RAM 108 may be built in the VDP 105. Further, a VDP RAM 108 electrically connected to the VDP 105 is provided, and a video RAM may be built in the VDP 105 separately. In these configurations, the bridge RAM 107 and the bridge LSI 109 may be omitted.

  (44) In the first embodiment, the VDP 105 may access the character ROM 106. In this case, the VDP 105 and the character ROM 106 may be electrically connected, or the VDP 105 may be connected to the character ROM 106 via the bridge LSI 109, and the VDP 105 may access the character ROM 106 via the bridge LSI 109. .

  (45) It is good also as a mode different from the said 1st Embodiment for the display mode of the image in performing abnormality alert | reporting. For example, it may be configured to display abnormality notification characters superimposed on an effect image, and when displaying an abnormality notification image, unlike a normal game time effect, without displaying a background image or the like. It is good also as a structure which performs only the change display of a symbol in a part of display screen G. That is, in the case where abnormality notification is performed in the middle of the production, the execution of the production may be performed while the state is changed and the abnormality notification is performed. However, even in this case, it is possible to satisfactorily return to the normal performance after canceling the abnormality notification by continuing the advance transfer of the data group corresponding to the normal game time performance without interruption. Can do.

  (46) In the first embodiment, the display CPU 102 or the VDP 105 may switch the input / output driver circuit 122.

  Further, the character ROM 106 is not limited to the configuration in which the controller 141 is integrated with the NAND flash memory, and the character ROM 106 is only the NAND flash memory. Alternatively, the writing control unit 121 may be used.

  (47) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which drawing data for one frame is created using only image data read to either the bridge-side RAM 107 or the VDP-side RAM 108; The drawing data for one frame may be created using both the output image data and the image data read to the VDP RAM 108.

  (48) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 has priority. The structure digested may be applied, and conversely, the structure in which the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 is preferentially digested may be applied.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 23 and the second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 24 are arranged on the left and right. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, It is good also as a structure in which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launch handle 51.

  Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 43 is acquired based on the first display area for displaying the determination result of the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 and the winning to the lower operating port 24. A second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the held information is correct may be provided. In this case, the change display of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 24 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of the variation of one game time is ended.

  (49) A player in the case where the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 is a target of the determination of the success / failure and in the case where the hold information related to winning a prize in the lower operating port 24 is the target of the determination of the success / failure It is good also as a structure from which the profit which is obtained differs. For example, in the configuration in which the hold information related to the winning to the lower working port 24 is preferentially digested as in (38) above, the holding information related to the winning to the lower working port 24 is the target of the success / failure determination. The case may be configured to be more advantageous for the player than the case where the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 23 in which the execution of the determination is not prioritized is the target of the determination.

  In setting the advantageous state in this way, for example, the probability of winning a big hit when the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 24 is the target of the success / failure determination is set as the holding related to winning in the upper operating port 23. A configuration may be adopted in which the information is set to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the case where the information is determined to be a winner. In addition, when the hold information related to the winning to the lower operating port 24 is a jackpot winning, the distribution destination of the jackpot result is the jackpot result when the holding information related to the winning to the upper operating port 23 is a jackpot winning It is good also as a structure set so that it may become more advantageous than the distribution destination of.

  More specifically, the jackpot result that is not set in the distribution destination of the jackpot result related to winning in the upper working port 23 is set in the distribution destination of the jackpot result related to winning in the lower working port 24. It is possible that the jackpot result is set so that the former is more advantageous than the latter, and the lower action is applied to the distribution destination of the jackpot result related to the winning to the upper working port 23. A jackpot result that is not set is set in the distribution destination of the jackpot result related to winning in the mouth 24, and the latter is more advantageous than the former because the jackpot result is set. It is good. Furthermore, the type of the jackpot result allocation destination relating to the winning to the upper working port 23 and the type of jackpot result allocation destination relating to the winning to the lower operating port 24 are set to be the same. At the same time, the winning to the lower working port 24 may be configured such that the probability of allocating an advantageous jackpot result is set higher than the winning to the upper working port 23.

  According to the above configuration, the advantage of generating a prize for the lower working port 24 is enhanced as compared to the case where a prize for the upper working port 23 is generated. In the configuration in which the hold information acquired by winning the winning of the lower operating port 24 is preferentially determined whether or not the winning is made to the lower operating port 24, the advantage set for the lower operating port 24 is determined. Sex will be given to the player with priority. As a result, a clear difference is provided in the functions of the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24, and the player is expected to win a prize for the lower operating port 24 rather than a prize for the upper operating port 23. As a result, diversification of games is achieved.

  In the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in each of the above embodiments, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (50) It is possible to adopt a configuration in which only a single success / failure lottery mode is set, and a plurality of types of jackpot value information are set for the success / failure lottery mode, instead of a plurality of stages of the success / failure lottery mode. .

  (51) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game time is started in the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 based on the determination of whether or not the main control device 60 performs the determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, when the condition for determining whether or not the main control device 60 is determined is satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the determination is actually made, and then the determination is made. Based on this, the subsequent variation display pattern, variation display time, and stop result in the game time may be determined. In this case, the main control device 60 first transmits a change command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the change display time, and determines the type. The type command may be transmitted, and the transmission timing of the variable time command and the type command may be shifted. However, the timing at which the variation time command and the type command are transmitted needs to be the timing until the symbol variation display is switched from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation in the symbol display device 31.

  (52) When the NAND flash memory is used as the non-volatile storage means such as the character ROM 106 and a read RAM is provided, the configuration of the non-volatile storage means can be favorably increased. Other configurations are optional.

  (53) If the cache buffer 123 is provided, the configuration is indispensable when attention is paid to the remarkable effect that the read timing from the read RAM and the transfer timing to the read RAM can be adjusted. Other configurations are arbitrary.

  (54) When attention is paid to the remarkable function and effect that the normal data group can be satisfactorily dealt with the occurrence of the specific event by storing and holding it in the read RAM during the period in which the specific event can occur, the configuration Other configurations are optional.

  (55) When paying attention to the remarkable effect of giving priority to predetermined control by transmitting a plurality of data groups according to a predetermined priority order when power is turned on, the configuration may be made indispensable. Other configurations are optional.

  (56) The player is informed that the establishment of the game start condition has not been invalidated in a situation where the normal display cannot be changed by performing special notification such as simple display when the normal display cannot be changed. Is recognized, and attention is paid to the remarkable effect of suppressing the confusion of the game, the other configuration is optional as long as the configuration is essential.

  (57) By setting a plurality of data groups corresponding to a plurality of production ranges and transferring a data group corresponding to the rear production range in a situation where the production of the predetermined production range is being executed, When paying attention to the remarkable effect that the transition from the predetermined production range to the rear production range is performed smoothly, the configuration may be made indispensable, and other configurations are arbitrary.

  (58) In the configuration including the effect operation device 58, a data group to be processed when displaying an image corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 58 is read in advance in the read RAM. When paying attention to the remarkable function and effect of being able to display an image in response to the operation of the effect operation device 58 at an early stage, the configuration may be made indispensable and other configurations are arbitrary.

  Note that, as in the above (53) to (58), when attention is paid to the configuration other than the configuration using the NAND flash memory as the character ROM 106, the type of memory used as the character ROM 106 is arbitrary. For example, EPROM or EEPROM may be used.

  (59) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, non-ballistic gaming machines, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels as a plurality of rotating bodies with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, start rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and stop Slot that gives a player a privilege such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by operating the switch The present invention can also be applied to a machine. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various types of control of the slot machine, and the present invention is applied to control related to image display in the display control device in a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in addition to the reel. Can be applied.

  In addition, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that have a take-in device and start rotation of a reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which is integrated.

  Here, in the gaming machine in which the start and stop of the laps are performed by the player's active operation as described above, even if the result of the internal lottery results in the big win, the big hit on the effective line If the symbol combination corresponding to the win is not established, the jackpot state is not achieved, and the jackpot winning result is carried over a plurality of game times until the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot winning is established. As for the case where it is carried over over this plurality of game times, the case where it occurs accidentally because the player can not establish a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot winning than the combination of the jackpot symbols It is conceivable that it may inevitably occur by setting in the program so that the winning probability of the lottery combination that is established with priority is increased in the case of a jackpot winning result.

  In the above configuration, in a gaming machine equipped with a display device in addition to the circuit device of the circuit body, a series of effects is executed so as to straddle a plurality of game times on the display screen of the display device in the case of a big win In the case where the winning combination result or the winning combination result is achieved, an effect having a low appearance frequency is executed in each game time until the combination of the jackpot symbol is established, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, when a configuration using a NAND flash memory as a character ROM or a configuration in which data transferred from the character ROM to the read RAM is processed to display an image is applied to such a configuration. The following configuration is preferable. In other words, when a big win winning result is obtained, a pre-transfer indicating that the big win winning result has been obtained from the main control device that performs the internal lottery process and the circulation control of the rotating body to the display control device that controls the display device. It may be configured to transmit a trigger command (command information). In this case, in the display control device, a data group for displaying a continuous effect of each game time corresponding to the jackpot winning result can be read in advance from the character ROM to the reading RAM. Continuous production can be displayed smoothly.

  The pre-transfer trigger command may be transmitted as information (signal) dedicated to data pre-transfer, and also functions as information for recognizing that the display control device has won the big win. May be transmitted as information (signal). Further, in a configuration in which a continuous effect is executed across a plurality of game times at a predetermined timing other than when a big win is won, the above-mentioned pre-transfer trigger is used for data transfer for executing the continuous effect. A configuration related to a command may be applied.

  (60) The characteristic configurations of the first to tenth embodiments and the configurations of the other embodiments may be combined with each other in any combination.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.
<Feature A group>
Feature A1. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on the information stored in the first storage means (function for executing processing related to drawing instructions in the display CPU 102) , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105),
The first storage means is a NAND type storage means,
Furthermore, the second storage means (bridge side RAM 107) that stores the information read from the first storage means, and the speed required for reading the information is faster than when reading from the first storage means,
Transfer means for reading out the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means ( A function of transferring a data group to the VDP RAM 108 in the VDP 105, a write control unit 121),
With
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means executes the specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the feature A1, since the NAND type storage unit is used as the first storage unit, the capacity can be easily increased as compared with the configuration in which the NOR type storage unit is used. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage means, which is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage means, at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. The specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when the NAND type storage means having a relatively low reading speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be performed smoothly. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a large capacity of the first storage unit.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

Feature A2. The first storage means executes first specific information used by the control means when executing the first specific control and second specific control that can be executed after the first specific control. And the second specific information used by the control means,
When the second specific control is executed after the first specific control, the transfer unit performs the first specific control using the first specific information stored in the second storage unit. After the execution, the second specific information is overwritten on an area including at least a part of the area in which the first specific information is stored in the second storage unit. Game machines.

  According to the feature A2, since it is not necessary to store the first specific information and the second specific information in the second storage means at the same time, the first specific information and the second specific information can be stored more simultaneously than the first storage means that stores the first specific information and the second specific information. The storage capacity of the second storage means can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the capacity of the first storage unit while reducing the cost of the second storage unit.

Feature A3. The first storage means executes first specific information used by the control means when executing the first specific control and second specific control that can be executed after the first specific control. Storing second specific information used by the control means and third specific information used by the control means when executing third specific control that can be executed after the second specific control. And
The transfer means uses the first specific information stored in the second storage means in the situation where the first specific control is executed or executed by the control means. The second specific information read from the means is stored in an area different from the area where the first specific information is stored in the second storage means, and then the second information stored in the second storage means is stored in the second storage means. In a situation where the second specific control is executed or executed by the control means using the specific information, the third specific information read from the first storage means is stored in the second storage means. An area that is different from an area in which the second specific information is stored and that overwrites an area including at least a part of the area in which the first specific information is stored The gaming machine according to the symptoms A1.

  According to the feature A3, since it is not necessary to store all of the first specific information, the second specific information, and the third specific information in the second storage unit at the same time, the first specific information, the second specific information, and the third specific information The storage capacity of the second storage means can be made smaller than that of the first storage means for simultaneously storing information. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the capacity of the first storage unit while reducing the cost of the second storage unit.

  In the above configuration, when the second specific control is executed after the first specific control and the third specific control is executed after the second specific control, the first specific control is executed. The second specific information is transferred so as not to erase the first specific information in the situation where the second specific information is stored, and the first specific information is stored so as not to erase the second specific information in the situation where the second specific control is executed. The third specific information is transferred so as to overwrite the area that has been stored. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the second storage unit while enabling the advance transfer of each specific information and the execution of each specific control to be performed satisfactorily.

  Feature A4. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein a storage capacity of the second storage unit is smaller than a storage capacity of the first storage unit.

  According to the feature A4, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a large capacity of the first storage unit while reducing the cost of the second storage unit.

Feature A5. The control means can access all areas of the second storage means at the read timing, and the transfer means can access all areas of the second storage means at the transfer timing,
Features A1 to A4 comprising adjustment means (functions for executing data transfer processing in the cache buffer 123 and the write control unit 121) for adjusting the read timing and the transfer timing so as not to overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to feature A5, the control means can access all areas of the second storage means at the read timing and the transfer means can access all areas of the second storage means at the transfer timing, The degree of freedom increases with respect to the capacity of a group of information that can be stored in the second storage means at one time. Further, when a plurality of types of information are stored in the second storage unit at the same time as in the configuration of the feature A3, for example, the degree of freedom in selecting the combination of information stored simultaneously is increased.

  In the above configuration, since the read timing by the control means and the transfer timing by the transfer means are adjusted so as not to overlap, for example, the transfer means overwrites predetermined information on the area being read by the control means. The occurrence of inconveniences such as this is suppressed.

  In place of the configuration of the feature A5, “adjustment is made so that the timing for reading information from the second storage means by the control means and the timing for transferring information to the second storage means by the transfer means do not overlap. It is also possible to apply a configuration that “adjustment means is provided”. In this case, since the read timing by the control means and the transfer timing by the transfer means are adjusted so as not to overlap, for example, the transfer means overwrites predetermined information on the area being read by the control means. Such an inconvenience is suppressed.

Feature A6. The adjusting means includes
When the information is read at a higher speed than when reading from the first storage unit, and when the specific information is transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, at least one of the specific information is stored. Intermediate storage means (cache buffer 123) for storing a part before writing to the second storage means;
Based on transferring the information stored in the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, storage execution means for storing the specific information in the second storage means (executes data transfer processing in the write control unit 121) Function)
The gaming machine according to Feature A5, comprising:

  According to the feature A6, when the specific information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, at least a part of the specific information is temporarily stored in the intermediate storage means, and the information once stored is then stored in the second storage means. The specific information can be stored in the second storage unit based on the transfer to the storage unit. According to this configuration, in the situation where information cannot be transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, such as when the control means is accessing the second storage means, the intermediate storage means At least a part of the specific information can be read out. Then, when it becomes possible to transfer information to the second storage unit, the information stored in the intermediate storage unit is transferred to the second storage unit, whereby the specific information is stored in the second storage unit. be able to. In this case, the transfer of the specific information is completed as compared with the configuration in which the specific information is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means after the situation where the information can be transferred to the second storage means. The time required is shortened.

Feature A7. A relay unit (bridge LSI 109) connected to the second storage unit via a relay path;
The transfer of the specific information to the second storage unit by the transfer unit and the reading of the specific information from the second storage unit by the control unit are performed through the same relay path,
Further, adjustment means (cache buffer 123, write operation) for adjusting the read timing of information from the second storage means by the control means and the transfer timing of information to the second storage means by the transfer means so as not to overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, further comprising a function of executing a data transfer process in the control unit 121).

  According to the feature A7, the number of paths that follow from the second storage unit can be suppressed. Even in this case, since the read timing from the second storage means by the control means and the transfer timing to the second storage means by the transfer means are adjusted so as not to overlap, the transfer of information on the relay route is performed. Done well.

Feature A8. The adjusting means includes
When the information is read at a higher speed than when reading from the first storage unit, and when the specific information is transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, at least one of the specific information is stored. Intermediate storage means (cache buffer 123) for storing a part before writing to the second storage means;
Based on transferring the information stored in the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, storage execution means for storing the specific information in the second storage means (executes data transfer processing in the write control unit 121) Function)
The gaming machine according to Feature A7, comprising:

  According to feature A8, when the specific information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, at least a part of the specific information is temporarily stored in the intermediate storage means, and then the temporarily stored information is stored in the second storage section. The specific information can be stored in the second storage unit based on the transfer to the storage unit. According to this configuration, in the situation where information cannot be transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, such as when the control means is accessing the second storage means, the intermediate storage means At least a part of the specific information can be read out. Then, when it becomes possible to transfer information to the second storage unit, the information stored in the intermediate storage unit is transferred to the second storage unit, whereby the specific information is stored in the second storage unit. be able to. In this case, the transfer of the specific information is completed as compared with the configuration in which the specific information is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means after the situation where the information can be transferred to the second storage means. The time required is shortened.

  Feature A9. The transfer unit is mounted on the relay unit, and the control unit, the first storage unit, and the second storage unit are connected to the relay unit via respective signal paths. A gaming machine according to A7 or A8.

  According to feature A9, in a configuration in which both the transfer means and the control means need to access the second storage means, the control means, the first means via the respective signal paths to the relay unit on which the transfer means is mounted. By connecting the storage unit and the second storage unit, the hardware configuration can be made compact.

Feature A10. Comprising display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen;
The control means includes
Drawing information creation means (function for executing drawing data setting processing in the VDP 105) for creating drawing information using the specific information stored in the second storage means;
Drawing signal output means for displaying a specific image on the display screen by outputting a drawing signal to the display means based on the drawing information created by the drawing information creation means (execution of the drawing signal output processing in the VDP 105 is executed) Function)
With
The adjusting unit prevents the transfer unit from transferring information to the second storage unit in a situation where the drawing information is generated by the drawing information generating unit, while the drawing signal output In a situation where the drawing signal is being output by the means, a means for permitting transfer of information to the second storage means by the transfer means (function to execute the process of step S1005 in the write control unit 121) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A9, wherein:

  According to the feature A10, it is possible to transfer the information to the second storage unit without interfering with the control for creating the drawing information in the control unit, and the period during which the control unit performs the control for outputting the drawing signal. It is possible to transfer the information to the second storage means by effectively using.

Feature A11. The second storage means includes first information storage means (first bridge RAM 171) and second information storage (second bridge RAM 172),
In a situation where control by the control means is performed using information read from one of the first information storage means and the second information storage means, the information of the transfer means to the other storage means Any one of features A1 to A4, further comprising switching means (input / output driver circuit 173) that permits transfer and alternately switches between the storage means to be read and the storage means to be transferred. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to feature A11, between the first information storage means and the second information storage means, the storage means to be read information by the control means and the storage means to be transferred information by the transfer means are alternately switched. Therefore, it is possible to read information in the control unit and transfer information in the transfer unit in parallel. Therefore, there is no need to wait for information transfer by the transfer means after the information is read by the control means, and the control speed can be increased.

Feature A12. The second storage means (VDP side RAM 108) stores the information read and transferred from the first storage means, and the speed required for reading the information is higher than that when reading from the first storage means. It is provided separately from the storage means, and the control means executes predetermined control using information stored in the separate storage means,
The transfer means transfers information read from the first storage means to the second storage means in a situation where the control means executes the predetermined control using information stored in the separate storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, further comprising means for performing (a function of executing initial transfer processing, overwriting processing, and return processing in the VDP 105).

  According to the feature A12, information can be transferred to the second storage unit in parallel in a situation where the control unit executes predetermined control using information stored in the separate storage unit. Therefore, it becomes difficult to generate a situation of waiting for information transfer by the transfer means after the information is read by the control means, and the progress of control can be increased.

  Feature A13. When the information stored in the first storage unit is transferred to the separate storage unit, the information transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit is transferred to the separate storage unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A12.

  According to the feature A13, in the configuration in which the second storage unit and the separate storage unit are provided as the transfer destinations of the information stored in the first storage unit, the number of transfer paths continuing from the first storage unit can be suppressed. It becomes.

Feature A14. The first storage means stores optional information (common data group) used by the control means to execute arbitrary response control when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation. And
The separate storage means stores the optional information read and transferred from the first storage means, and stores and holds the optional information when a situation in which the specific event can occur is continued. A gaming machine according to Feature A12 or A13, wherein

  According to the feature A14, the arbitrary correspondence control is executed using the arbitrary information transferred from the first storage means to the other storage means, thereby shortening the time required for reading the arbitrary information in the control means. Thus, it is possible to smoothly execute voluntary response control for occurrence of a specific event. In particular, since the optional information transferred to the separate storage means is stored and held when the situation in which the specific event can occur is continued, in the configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, Arbitrary response control for occurrence can be performed smoothly.

  Assuming a configuration in which the information for arbitrary use is stored in the second storage unit, the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, so that the transfer unit can adapt to the arbitrary timing while adapting to the event. 2 It becomes necessary to transfer specific information to the storage means. On the other hand, since the optional information is stored in the separate storage unit as described above, it is possible to simplify the configuration for transferring the information in the transfer unit.

Feature A15. Effect mode determining means (a function for executing variation start processing in the main control device 60, a variation starting process using normal symbols in the display CPU 102) for determining a series of modes for effects to be executed in the notification means (symbol display device 31) Function)
An abnormality determining means for determining whether an abnormality has occurred (a function of executing reading processing for abnormality monitoring in the main control device 60);
With
The first storage means, as the specific information, effects information (normal symbol) used by the control means when an effect corresponding to a series of aspects determined by the effect aspect determination means is executed by the notification means. Data group, each background data group, each notice data group, each reach data group) and the notification means based on the fact that the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred And storing at least abnormality information (abnormality notification data group) used by the control means when executing
The production information includes division information (initial division data group, intermediate division data group, final division data group, etc.) corresponding to each of a plurality of continuous production ranges in the series of aspects,
The control means includes
As the specific control, based on the information determined by the effect mode determining means, using the respective pieces of division information transferred in advance to the second storage means, effects in the effect range corresponding to each piece of division information are sent to the notification means. Production control means (a function for executing the game time control process and the jackpot control process in the display CPU 102) for performing the control to be executed,
As the specific control, an abnormality control means (performs an abnormality notification control process in the display CPU 102) for performing control to cause the notification means to execute abnormality notification based on the fact that the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred. Function to execute)
If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determining means in a situation where the effect is being executed by the notification means by the control by the effect control means, the execution of the effect is interrupted or changed and the abnormality Abnormality notification priority means (function for executing processing based on the fact that the abnormality notification state is set in step S3103 in the display CPU 102) for executing abnormality notification under the control of the control means;
With
The effect control means is a case where the effect is interrupted or changed by the abnormality notification priority means and the abnormality notification is executed, and after the abnormality notification ends, the series of effects determined by the effect mode determination means. Among the aspects, the production is resumed from the timing at which the abnormality notification has continued for the time at which the interruption or change was made,
The transfer means transfers division information according to a series of modes determined by the effect mode determination means, even in a situation where the effect is interrupted or changed by the abnormality notification priority means and the abnormality notification is being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein:

  According to the feature A15, when an abnormality occurs in a situation where an effect is being executed by the notification means, the effect is interrupted or changed and the abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, the abnormality notification is given priority over the execution of the effect. be able to. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can cope with the occurrence of the abnormality well. In addition, after the end of the abnormality notification, the effect is resumed from the timing at which the abnormality notification has continued for the interrupted or changed timing, so the execution of the effect initially set in conjunction with the occurrence of the abnormality Time fluctuation can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the division information is transferred even when the abnormality notification is executed and the effect is interrupted or changed, the effect is successfully restarted after the abnormality notification ends.

  Feature A16. The control unit includes a command unit (display CPU) that gives an instruction to transfer the specific information to the transfer unit and gives an instruction to execute the specific control to the control unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A16, the transfer means and the control means are integrated by the command means, so that the transfer timing of information to the second storage means by the transfer means and the read timing of information from the second storage means by the control means Can be adjusted satisfactorily.

Feature A17. The transfer means reads specific information for a control period over a predetermined period from the first storage means, transfers the read specific information to the second storage means, and stores it.
Any one of the features A1 to A16, wherein the control means performs the specific control for a control period over the predetermined period using the specific information stored in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to 1.

  By including the configuration of the feature A1, the specific control for the control period over the predetermined period can be executed satisfactorily.

Feature A18. An effect execution means (symbol display device 31), a first storage means (character ROM 106) storing information in advance, and an execution of the effect in the effect execution means based on the information stored in the first storage means In a gaming machine provided with control means (a function for executing processing related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102 and a function for executing processing for displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105)
The first storage means is a NAND type storage means,
Furthermore, the second storage means (bridge side RAM 107) that stores the information read from the first storage means, and the speed required for reading the information is faster than when reading from the first storage means,
At a timing prior to the start of the control by the control means that causes the execution of the specific effect, the specific information used for the control is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. Transfer means for storing (a function of transferring a data group to the VDP RAM 108 in the VDP 105, the write control unit 121);
With
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the control means causes the effect execution means to execute the specific effect using the specific information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the feature A18, since the NAND-type storage unit is used as the first storage unit, the capacity can be easily increased as compared with the configuration in which the NOR-type storage unit is used. Further, at a timing before the control means starts the control for causing the effect executing means to execute the specific effect in the second memory means that is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first memory means. The specific information is stored, and the control means causes the effect execution means to execute a specific effect using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when the NAND type storage means having a relatively low reading speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for reading out the specific information in the control means can be shortened and a specific effect can be smoothly executed. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a large capacity of the first storage unit.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

  In addition, the configuration limited in any one of the features A2 to A17 may be applied to the feature A18. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

Feature A19. By using display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen, first storage means (character ROM 106) storing information in advance, and information stored in the first storage means, the display screen is used. In a gaming machine provided with control means for displaying an image on the display CPU 102 (a function for executing processing related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102, a function for executing processing for displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105),
The first storage means is a NAND type storage means,
Furthermore, the second storage means (bridge side RAM 107) that stores the information read from the first storage means, and the speed required for reading the information is faster than when reading from the first storage means,
The specific information used when displaying the specific image is read from the first storage unit at a timing before the control for displaying the specific image on the display screen is started by the control unit. Transfer means for storing in the second storage means (function to transfer a data group to the VDP RAM 108 in the VDP 105, the write control unit 121)
With
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the control means displays the specific image on the display screen using the specific information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the feature A19, since the NAND type storage unit is used as the first storage unit, the capacity can be easily increased as compared with the configuration in which the NOR type storage unit is used. In addition, the second storage means that is faster than the speed required for reading information from the first storage means is specified at a timing before the control means starts to display a specific image on the display screen. Information is stored, and the control unit displays a specific image on the display screen using the specific information stored in the second storage unit. Therefore, even when the NAND type storage means having a relatively low reading speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and a specific image can be displayed smoothly. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a large capacity of the first storage unit.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

  In addition, the configuration limited in any one of the features A2 to A17 may be applied to the feature A19. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. .

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Also, in recent years, the degree of attention to images has been increased by diversifying the presentation mode of images or using complex moving images or live-action images as images, and accordingly, attention to games has been increased. Attempts have been made.

  As described above, in order to increase the degree of attention to an image, more image data is required than before. Then, it is necessary to use a memory having a larger capacity than the conventional memory for storing and holding image data in advance. A technique using a NAND type memory is conceivable as a technique to cope with such a large capacity while reducing the cost.

  However, NAND-type memories generally have a slower data transfer rate than NOR-type memories. When the data transfer speed is slow, the processing speed of the image processing is reduced, and the image cannot be displayed satisfactorily.

  Note that the above problem is also a problem that occurs in the same way in increasing the capacity of a memory that stores data different from image data.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features A1 to A19, the following features B1 to B11, the following features C1 to C26, the following features D1 to D19, the following features E1 to E15, the following features F1 to F18, and the following features G1 The structure limited in any one of -G19, the following features H1-H12, the following features I1-I4, and the following features J1-J19 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on the information stored in the first storage means (function for executing processing related to drawing instructions in the display CPU 102) , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105),
Storing the information read from the first storage means, and a second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage means;
Transfer means for reading out the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means ( A function of transferring a data group to the VDP RAM 108 in the VDP 105, a write control unit 121, a cache buffer 123),
With
The control means executes the specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means,
The transfer means includes
When the information is read at a speed higher than that when reading from the first storage unit, and when the specific information is stored in the second storage unit from the first storage unit, at least one of the specific information is stored. Intermediate storage means (cache buffer 123) for storing a part before writing to the second storage means;
Based on transferring the information stored in the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, storage execution means for storing the specific information in the second storage means (executes data transfer processing in the write control unit 121) Function)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit that is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. The control means is configured to execute specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be performed smoothly.

  When the specific information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, at least a part of the specific information is temporarily stored in the intermediate storage means, and then the temporarily stored information is stored in the second storage means. The specific information can be stored in the second storage unit based on the transfer. According to this configuration, the intermediate storage means in a situation where information cannot be transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, for example, while the control means is accessing the second storage means. At least a part of the specific information can be read out. Then, when it becomes possible to transfer information to the second storage unit, the information stored in the intermediate storage unit is transferred to the second storage unit, whereby the specific information is stored in the second storage unit. be able to. In this case, the transfer of the specific information is completed as compared with the configuration in which the specific information is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means after the situation where the information can be transferred to the second storage means. The time required is shortened.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

Feature B2. The information stored in the intermediate storage means is a part of the specific information,
The transfer means repeatedly performs transfer of information from the first storage means to the intermediate storage means and transfer of information transferred to the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, thereby The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the specific information is stored in a means.

  According to the feature B2, the intermediate storage unit does not need to store all of the specific information at the same time, and may have a storage capacity for sequentially storing a part of the specific information. Therefore, the storage capacity of the intermediate storage means can be made smaller than that of the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time required to complete the transfer of the specific information while reducing the cost of the intermediate storage means.

  Further, compared to a configuration in which all of the specific information is transferred to the intermediate storage means and all of the transferred specific information is transferred from the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, the information from the second storage means by the control means It becomes easy to adjust the read timing and the transfer timing of information to the second storage means by the transfer means.

Feature B3. The specific information is composed of a plurality of unit information, and the first storage means stores the plurality of unit information individually,
The transfer unit reads one unit information from the first storage unit and stores the unit information in the intermediate storage unit, and the transfer of the one unit information to the second storage unit is completed. After that, the next unit information is read out and stored in the intermediate storage means.

  According to the feature B3, since information is transferred from the intermediate storage unit to the second storage unit for each unit information, the time required for the transfer is shortened. Thereby, it is possible to transfer information to the second storage means aiming at a slight gap where the control means does not access the second storage means, and there is a degree of freedom in setting the timing for transferring information to the second storage means. Enhanced.

  Further, since the transfer target is for each unit information individually stored in the first storage means, it is not necessary to adjust the capacity of information when transferring information from the first storage means to the intermediate storage means. . Thereby, simplification of the configuration for transferring information to the intermediate storage means can be achieved.

  Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein a storage capacity of the intermediate storage unit is smaller than a storage capacity of the second storage unit.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to reduce the time required to complete the transfer of the specific information while reducing the cost of the intermediate storage unit.

  Feature B5. The storage executing means transfers the information stored in the first storage means to the intermediate storage means in a situation where the control means reads information from the second storage means, and The features B1 to B4 are characterized in that the information stored in the intermediate storage means is transferred to the second storage means in a situation where the means does not read out information from the second storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B5, information is transferred to the intermediate storage means using a situation where the control means reads information from the second storage means, and the information transferred to the intermediate storage means is controlled by the control means. Is transferred to the second storage means using a situation in which the information is not read from the second storage means. Thereby, even if the waiting time for waiting for the completion of the transfer of information from the first storage means to the second storage means is not set in the control of the control means, the information is transferred to the second storage means. It can be performed.

Feature B6. Comprising display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen;
The control means includes
Drawing information creation means (function for executing drawing data setting processing in the VDP 105) for creating drawing information using the specific information stored in the second storage means;
Drawing signal output means for displaying a specific image on the display screen by outputting a drawing signal to the display means based on the drawing information created by the drawing information creation means (execution of the drawing signal output processing in the VDP 105 is executed) Function)
With
The storage execution means transfers the information stored in the first storage means to the intermediate storage means and outputs the drawing signal in a situation where the drawing information is created by the drawing information creation means. Any one of the characteristics B1 to B5, characterized in that, in a situation where the drawing signal is output by the means, the information stored in the intermediate storage means is transferred to the second storage means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B6, it is possible to transfer the information to the second storage unit without interfering with the control for creating the drawing information in the control unit, and the period during which the control unit outputs the drawing signal. It is possible to transfer the information to the second storage means by effectively using.

Feature B7. Separately from the second storage means, the information read from the first storage means is stored, and another storage means (VDP side) whose speed required to read the information is faster than that read from the first storage means RAM 108), and the control means executes predetermined control using information stored in the separate storage means,
The storage executing means transfers the information stored in the first storage means to the intermediate storage means in a situation where the control means reads information from the second storage means, and Any of the features B1 to B6, characterized in that in a situation where the means reads information from the separate storage means, the information stored in the intermediate storage means is transferred to the second storage means The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature B7, information is transferred to the intermediate storage means using a situation in which the control means reads information from the second storage means, and the information transferred to the intermediate storage means is controlled by the control means. Is transferred to the second storage means using the situation where information is read from the separate storage means. Thereby, even if the waiting time for waiting for the completion of the transfer of information from the first storage means to the second storage means is not set in the control of the control means, the information is transferred to the second storage means. It can be performed.

  Feature B8. When the information stored in the first storage unit is transferred to the separate storage unit, the information transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit is transferred to the separate storage unit. The gaming machine according to Feature B7.

  According to the feature B8, in the configuration in which the second storage unit and the separate storage unit are provided as the transfer destination of the information stored in the first storage unit, it is possible to reduce the number of transfer paths that follow from the first storage unit. It becomes.

Feature B9. The first storage means stores optional information (common data group) used by the control means to execute arbitrary response control when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation. And
The separate storage means stores the optional information read from the first storage means, and stores and holds the optional information when a situation where the specific event can occur continues. The gaming machine according to Feature B7 or B8, which is characterized in that it exists.

  According to the feature B9, by executing the arbitrary correspondence control using the arbitrary information transferred from the first storage unit to the other storage unit, the time required for reading the arbitrary information in the control unit can be shortened. Thus, it is possible to smoothly execute the arbitrary response control for the occurrence of the specific event. In particular, since the optional information transferred to the separate storage means is stored and held when the situation in which the specific event can occur is continued, in the configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, Arbitrary response control for occurrence can be performed smoothly.

  Assuming a configuration in which the information for arbitrary use is stored in the second storage unit, the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, so that the transfer unit can adapt to the arbitrary timing while adapting to the event. 2 It becomes necessary to transfer specific information to the storage means. On the other hand, since the optional information is stored in the separate storage unit as described above, it is possible to simplify the configuration for transferring the information in the transfer unit.

  Feature B10. The control means can access all areas of the second storage means at the read timing, and the transfer means can access all areas of the second storage means at the transfer timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

  According to the feature B10, the control means can access all areas of the second storage means at the read timing and the transfer means can access all areas of the second storage means at the transfer timing. The degree of freedom increases with respect to the capacity of a group of information that can be stored in the second storage means at one time. Further, for example, when a plurality of types of information separated from each other are stored in the second storage unit at the same time, the degree of freedom in selecting the combination of information stored simultaneously is increased.

  Further, since the configuration of the feature B1 is provided, the intermediate storage means is used, so that the control means waits for the control until the information transfer to the second storage means is completed, and the read timing by the control means is reduced. And the transfer timing by the transfer means can be adjusted so as not to overlap.

Feature B11. A relay unit (bridge LSI 109) connected to the second storage unit via a relay path;
The transfer of the specific information to the second storage unit by the transfer unit and the reading of the specific information from the second storage unit by the control unit are performed through the same relay path. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

  According to the feature B11, the number of paths that follow from the second storage unit can be suppressed. Even in this case, since the configuration of the feature B1 is provided, the intermediate storage unit is used, so that the control unit can reduce the time for waiting for the control until the information transfer to the second storage unit is completed. However, the read timing by the control means and the transfer timing by the transfer means can be adjusted so as not to overlap.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group B is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. .

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Also, in recent years, the degree of attention to images has been increased by diversifying the presentation mode of images or using complex moving images or live-action images as images, and accordingly, attention to games has been increased. Attempts have been made.

  Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable to display the image at an early stage. As a method for displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of a memory for image data can be considered. As another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of a CPU that performs image processing is conceivable. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom of memory selection decreases at the gaming machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed increases.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to image display, and similarly occurs in configurations related to other controls.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A19, the following features C1 to C26, the following features D1 to D19, the following features E1 to E15, the following features F1 to F18, and the following features G1 The structure limited in any one of -G19, the following features H1-H12, the following features I1-I4, and the following features J1-J19 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on the information stored in the first storage means (function for executing processing related to drawing instructions in the display CPU 102) , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105),
The first storage means stores optional information (ordinary data group) used for executing arbitrary response control in the control means when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation. And
Transfer means (in the VDP 105) for storing arbitrary information read out from the first storage means in the second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) whose speed required for reading out the information is faster than when reading out from the first storage means. A function of transferring a data group to the VDP RAM 108, a write control unit 121, and a cache buffer 123)
The second storage means stores the optional information read from the first storage means, and stores and holds the optional information when a situation in which the specific event can occur continues. And
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein when the specific event occurs, the control means executes the arbitrary correspondence control using the optional information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the feature C1, by performing arbitrary correspondence control using the arbitrary information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the time required for reading the arbitrary information in the control means can be shortened. As shown, it is possible to smoothly execute voluntary response control for occurrence of a specific event. In particular, since the optional information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held when the situation in which the specific event can occur is continued, each specific event in the configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing Thus, it is possible to shorten the time until the voluntary response control for the occurrence of the occurrence is started.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

  Feature C2. The transfer unit is configured to read the optional information from the first storage unit and store the information in the second storage unit until the specific event can occur. Game machines.

  According to the feature C2, since information for arbitrary use is transferred and stored in the second storage means in a situation where a specific event can occur, even if the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, It is possible to shorten the time until the voluntary response control is executed.

Feature C3. The configuration is such that the specific event can occur after the start time period has elapsed since the start of power supply.
The transfer means reads the optional information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means until the start period elapses after the power supply is started. The gaming machine according to feature C2.

  According to the feature C3, since the optional information is transferred to the second storage unit from the start of power supply until the start time period elapses, the optional information is stored in the second storage in a situation where a specific event may occur. Is stored in the means.

  Note that “power supply starts” refers to the start of supply of operating power from the supply unit in a configuration including a supply unit that receives operating power from a commercial power source and supplies operating power to the electrical equipment of the gaming machine. Including the configuration. The same applies to the following.

Feature C4. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen is provided, and the control means uses the optional information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means to display the display screen. This is optional control that displays an optional image.
Furthermore, it has a start correspondence control means (a function for executing a main process in the display CPU 102) for displaying a start correspondence image on a display screen until at least the start period elapses after the power supply is started. A gaming machine according to feature C3.

  According to the feature C4, in a situation where the transfer of the optional information to the second storage unit is not completed and the optional corresponding image by using the optional information cannot be displayed on the display screen, An initial corresponding image is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that it is not possible to inspect whether or not the display means is normal until the arbitrarily corresponding image is displayed after the start of power supply.

Feature C5. A display unit having a display screen and controlled by the control unit (the symbol display device 31);
The first storage means further stores start correspondence information which is necessary when displaying a start correspondence image on the display means and whose information capacity is smaller than the information for arbitrary use,
When the power supply is started, the transfer unit reads the initial correspondence information from the first storage unit and stores it in the second storage unit, and then reads the arbitrary information from the first storage unit. Information stored in the second storage means and used when displaying another image after the display of the initial corresponding image is a region different from the region in which the optional information is stored, The initial correspondence information is stored in an area including at least a part of the area,
The control means includes
Arbitrary correspondence control means (in the display CPU 102) that performs arbitrary correspondence control for displaying an arbitrary correspondence image on the display screen by using the information for arbitrary use read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. A function for executing a variation start process by a normal design), and
Using the start correspondence information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, the display screen is started until at least the start time period elapses after the power supply is started. Start corresponding control means for displaying an image (function for executing main processing in the display CPU 102);
The gaming machine according to Feature C3, comprising:

  According to the feature C5, when the transfer of the optional information to the second storage unit is not completed and the optional corresponding image by using the optional information cannot be displayed on the display screen, the display screen An initial corresponding image is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that it is not possible to inspect whether or not the display means is normal until the arbitrarily corresponding image is displayed after the start of power supply.

  Also, since the initial correspondence information for displaying the initial correspondence image has a smaller capacity than the information for arbitrary use, the transfer of the optional information is completed even if the initial correspondence information is transferred prior to the transfer of the optional information. The time to do is not extremely slow. Furthermore, since the initial correspondence information is stored in the change storage means in the optional storage means, the above-described effects can be achieved while suppressing the storage capacity of the optional storage means.

Feature C6. The first storage means includes first specific information used by the control means when executing the first specific control, and second specific information used by the control means when executing the second specific control. , And remember more
When the control unit executes any one of the first to second specific controls, the control unit corresponds to the first to second specific information read from the first storage unit and stored in the second storage unit. The specific control is executed using the information obtained,
In the case where the second specific control is executed after the first specific control is executed, the transfer means stores the first specific information read from the first storage means in the second storage means. After the first specific control is executed, the second specific information is stored in the second storage means in the second storage unit after the first specific control is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the gaming machine is an area that is different from an area and that overwrites an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the first specific information is stored. .

  According to the feature C6, the first specific control and the second specific control are executed because the arbitrary information is prevented from being erased when the first specific control and the second specific control are executed. Even if a specific event occurs in a certain situation, it is possible to execute voluntary response control. On the other hand, since it is not necessary to store the first specific information and the second specific information in the second storage means at the same time, the storage of the second storage means compared to the configuration in which the first specific information and the second specific information are stored simultaneously. The capacity can be reduced.

Feature C7. The first storage means executes first specific information used by the control means when executing the first specific control and second specific control that can be executed after the first specific control. Storing second specific information used by the control means and third specific information used by the control means when executing third specific control that can be executed after the second specific control. And
When the control means executes any one of the first to third specific controls, the control means corresponds to the first to third specific information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. The specific control is executed using the information obtained,
When the first to third specific controls are sequentially executed, the transfer means stores the first specific information read from the first storage means and the optional information in the second storage means. In a situation where the first specific control is executed or executed by the control means using the first specific information stored in the area different from the area and stored in the second storage means The second specific information is stored in an area different from the area in which the optional information and the first specific information are stored in the second storage unit, and then stored in the second storage unit In the situation where the second specific control is executed or executed by the control means using the second specific information, the optional information in the second storage means is used as the third specific information. Any one of the characteristics C1 to C5 is characterized in that it is an area different from the area that is stored and that overwrites an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the first specific information is stored. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C7, since the information for arbitrary use is prevented from being deleted when the first to third specific controls are executed, the specific event occurs in the situation where the first to third specific controls are executed. Even if it occurs, it is possible to execute arbitrary response control on it. On the other hand, since it is not necessary to store the first specific information, the second specific information, and the third specific information in the second storage means at the same time, the first specific information, the second specific information, and the third specific information are stored simultaneously. Compared to the configuration, the storage capacity of the second storage means can be reduced.

Feature C8. Informing means (symbol display device 31) and abnormality determining means for determining whether or not an abnormality that is the specific event has occurred (function to execute reading processing for abnormality monitoring in the main control device 60). ,
The arbitrary information includes abnormality information used by the control means when the abnormality notification is executed by the notification means based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein:

  According to the feature C8, the abnormality notification control is executed using the abnormality information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, thereby reducing the time required for reading the abnormality information in the control means. Therefore, abnormality notification can be executed smoothly. In particular, the abnormality information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held when a situation in which an abnormality can occur is continued, so that in the configuration in which an abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, The time until the abnormality notification is started can be shortened.

Feature C9. The first abnormality and the second abnormality are set as the abnormality,
The abnormality determining means determines whether or not the first abnormality has occurred, and determines whether or not the second abnormality has occurred,
The first storage means uses, as the abnormality information, common notification information (initially used by the control means when the notification means executes common notification common to both the first abnormality and the second abnormality). (Notifying data group), and separately performing the type correspondence notification corresponding to each of the first abnormality and the second abnormality in the notification means separately from the optional information. Storing first type correspondence information (abnormality type data group) and second type correspondence information (abnormality type data group) used by the means;
The control means includes
Either the case where it is determined by the first abnormality determination means that the first abnormality has occurred or the case where the second abnormality determination means determines that the second abnormality has occurred, Optional response control means (function of executing step S3404 in the display CPU 102) for causing the notification means to perform the common notification using the common notification information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means )When,
When it is determined by the first abnormality determination means that the first abnormality has occurred, and after the common notification is started, it is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. The first type correspondence information is used to cause the notification unit to perform the type correspondence notification, while the second abnormality determination unit determines that the second abnormality has occurred, and the common notification is performed. After the start, a type abnormality notification control unit (display CPU 102) that causes the notification unit to perform the type correspondence notification using the second type correspondence information read from the first storage unit and stored in the second storage unit. In step S3412).
With
Further, the transfer means reads out the type correspondence information corresponding to the abnormality determined to be generated this time from the first storage means in the situation where the common notification is being executed by the notification means, and stores it in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to Feature C8, further comprising a type-corresponding transfer unit (a function of executing the process of Step S3406 in the display CPU 102) to be stored.

  According to the feature C9, since the common notification information is stored as the optional information in the second storage unit, even if the first abnormality or the second abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, the common notification is immediately executed. Thus, the game hall manager or the like can recognize that some abnormality has occurred. In addition, after the common notification is executed, the type-corresponding notification is executed for the side related to the current occurrence of the first abnormality and the second abnormality. Can do.

  In particular, since the type correspondence information corresponding to the type correspondence notification is configured to be transferred to the second storage unit in a situation where the common notification is being executed, only the common notification information is arbitrarily selected from the common notification information and the various types of correspondence information. What is necessary is just to memorize | store in a 2nd memory | storage means as business information. Therefore, the above-described effects can be achieved while reducing the storage capacity to be secured for the optional information in the second storage unit.

Feature C10. Production mode determining means (a function for executing variation start processing in the main control device 60, a function for executing variation start processing by normal symbols in the display CPU 102) for determining a series of modes for effects to be executed in the notification means,
The first storage means, apart from the optional information, produces information corresponding to a series of aspects determined by the effect aspect determination means when the notification means executes the effect information used by the control means. (Normal design data group, each background data group, each notice data group, each reach data group)
The production information includes division information (initial division data group, intermediate division data group, final division data group, etc.) corresponding to each of a plurality of continuous production ranges in the series of aspects,
The control means includes
Based on the information determined by the effect mode determining means, control for causing the notification means to execute effects in the effect range corresponding to each piece of division information using each piece of division information transferred in advance to the second storage means. Effect control means to perform (function to execute the game times control process and the jackpot control process in the display CPU 102);
Based on the fact that the abnormality determining means determines that an abnormality has occurred, control is performed to cause the notification means to execute abnormality notification using the abnormality information transferred in advance to the second storage means. Control means for abnormality to be executed (function of executing abnormality notification control processing in the display CPU 102);
If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determination means in a situation where the effect is being executed by the notification means by the notification means, the execution of the effect is interrupted or changed and the abnormality Abnormality notification priority means (function for executing processing based on the fact that the abnormality notification state is set in step S3103 in the display CPU 102) for executing abnormality notification under the control of the control means;
With
The effect control means is a case where the effect is interrupted or changed by the abnormality notification priority means and the abnormality notification is executed, and after the abnormality notification ends, the series of effects determined by the effect mode determination means. Among the aspects, the production is resumed from the timing at which the abnormality notification has continued for the time at which the interruption or change was made,
Furthermore, even if the transfer means is in a situation where the effect is interrupted or changed by the abnormality notification priority means and the abnormality notification is being executed, the transfer information is divided according to the series of modes determined by the effect mode determination means. The game machine according to Feature C8 or C9, wherein the game machine performs transfer.

  According to the feature C10, when an abnormality occurs in the situation where the effect is being executed by the notification means, the effect is interrupted or changed and the abnormality notification is executed, so the abnormality notification has priority over the execution of the effect. be able to. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can cope with the occurrence of the abnormality well. In addition, after the abnormality notification is ended, the suspended or changed effect is resumed from the timing when the abnormality notification has continued for the suspended or changed timing. It can be suppressed that the time from the start of the set effect to the end thereof fluctuates. Furthermore, even if the abnormality notification is executed and the effect is interrupted or changed, the division information about the effect is transferred according to the transfer timing, so the resumption of the effect is good after the abnormality notification ends. Can be done.

Feature C11. Production control means (symbol display device 31) is provided, and the control means uses information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means based on the occurrence of the specific event. A specific series of effects are executed by the effect execution means,
The optional information includes start effect information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the control means when starting the specific series effect. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C10.

  According to the feature C11, the start time information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means is used to start a specific series of effects, thereby reducing the time required for the control means to read the start effect information. Thus, it is possible to smoothly start a specific series of effects for the occurrence of a specific event. In particular, since the start effect information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held when a situation in which a specific event can occur continues, the specific event occurs in a configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to smoothly start a specific series of effects with respect to the occurrence of.

Feature C12. As the specific series production started based on the occurrence of the specific event, at least a first series production and a second series production are set,
Regardless of whether the control means executes the first series of effects or the second series of effects, the start effect already transferred and stored in the second storage means at the time of the start. The gaming machine according to Feature C11, wherein the production is started using information.

  According to the feature C12, it is possible to shorten the time from the occurrence of the specific event to the start of the series effect regardless of whether the first series effect or the second series effect is executed. it can.

Feature C13. As the specific series of effects, an additional effect mode is set in which an effect of the additional effect range is executed after the start effect range executed using the start effect information,
The first storage means stores additional correspondence information (each notice data group, each reach data group) used by the control means when the effect executing means executes the effect of the additional effect range. And
In the case where the effect of the additional effect mode is executed, the transfer means is in a situation where the start effect is being executed and before the start effect ends, the additional correspondence read from the first storage means The gaming machine according to Feature C11 or C12, wherein information is stored in the second storage unit.

  According to the feature C13, even when the effect of the additional effect range is executed after the effect of the start effect range is executed, the additional effect is executed using the additional correspondence information stored in the second storage unit. Therefore, the time required for reading the additional correspondence information in the control means can be shortened, and the effect in the additional effect range can be smoothly executed after the start effect. In particular, since the additional correspondence information is configured to be transferred to the second storage means in a situation where the production of the start production range is being executed, only the start production information of the start production information and the additional correspondence information is used as optional information. 2 What is necessary is just to memorize | store in a memory | storage means. Therefore, the above effects can be achieved while reducing the storage capacity to be secured for the optional information in the second storage means.

Feature C14. Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
A privilege granting unit (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit;
With
The control means starts the specific series of productions, assuming that the specific event has occurred before the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means or when the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means. Any one of the features C11 to C13 is characterized in that the effect execution means is controlled so that the specific series of effects is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. Game machines.

  With respect to the effect executed when notifying the determination result of the assignment determining means, the effect according to any one of the features C11 to C13 can be achieved.

Feature C15. Display means (design display device 31) having a display screen;
Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
A privilege granting unit (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit;
With
The control means displays a normal pattern variation display on the assumption that the specific event has occurred prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. The normal display control that starts and terminates the normal image variation display as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the application determination unit is read from the first storage unit and stored in the second storage unit. It is provided with normal display control means (a function for executing a change start process using normal symbols and a process during change using normal symbols in the display CPU 102) performed on the display means by using
The optional information includes start variation display information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the normal display control means when starting the variation display of the normal pattern. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein:

  According to the feature C15, when the variation display of the normal pattern is started by using the start variation display information transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, the variation of the normal pattern from the satisfaction of the variation start condition. The time until display is started can be shortened. In particular, the start variation display information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation in which the determination of grant can be performed. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the determination of application is generated at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to shorten the time until the display of the normal pattern change for each generation determination is started.

Feature C16. At least a first display mode and a second display mode are set as a series of display modes from the start to the end in the variation display of the normal pattern,
Regardless of whether the first display mode or the second display mode is performed, the normal display control unit is already transferred and stored in the second storage unit at the start of the normal display control unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C15, wherein the start variation display information is used to start variation display of a normal pattern.

  According to the feature C16, it is possible to shorten the time from the occurrence of the specific event to the start of the fluctuation display of the normal pattern, regardless of whether the first display mode or the second display mode is executed. Can be planned.

Feature C17. As the display mode of the normal pattern variation display, an additional rendering mode is set in which an additional rendering is executed after the start variation display displayed by using the start variation display information,
The first storage means stores additional correspondence information (each notice data group, each reach data group) used by the normal display control means when the additional effect is displayed on the display screen. ,
The transfer means includes the first storage means until the start change display is completed in a situation where the start change display is being performed when the normal pattern change display is performed in the additional effect mode. The additional correspondence information read from the second storage means is stored in the second storage means,
The normal display control unit uses the additional correspondence information stored in the second storage unit after performing the start variation display when performing the variation display of the normal pattern in the additional effect mode. The game machine according to Feature C15 or C16, wherein the additional effect is executed.

  According to the feature C17, even if the additional effect is executed after the start variation display is executed, the additional effect is executed using the additional correspondence information stored in the second storage unit. The control time required for the progress of the process can be shortened. In particular, since the additional correspondence information is transferred to the second storage means in the situation where the start variation display is being executed, only the start variation display information of the start variation display information and the additional correspondence information is used as optional information. 2 What is necessary is just to memorize | store in a memory | storage means. Therefore, the above effects can be achieved while reducing the storage capacity to be secured for the optional information in the second storage means.

Feature C18. The first storage means stores simple information (simple symbol data group) having a storage capacity set smaller than the start variation display information,
When transferring the start variation display information, the transfer unit reads the simple information from the first storage unit and stores it in the second storage unit prior to the start variation display information (write control). A function for executing the initial setting process of the common data group in the unit 121),
The control means stores in the second storage means when the specific event occurs in a situation where the start variation display information is not stored in the second storage means and the simple information is stored. By using the simple information that has been made, simple display control means for displaying on the display screen a simple display that allows the player to recognize that the execution of the grant determination has not been invalidated (depending on the simple design in the display CPU 102) The gaming machine according to any one of features C15 to C17, further including a function of executing a change start process and a process during change using a simple symbol.

  If a situation occurs in which the normal display cannot be displayed on the display means, such as when the transfer of the start variation display information is not in time until the generation of the determination, the determination condition is satisfied even though the determination condition is satisfied. There is a concern that the player may be confused that the establishment of has been invalidated. On the other hand, according to the feature C18, since the simple display is performed, the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated in a situation where it is not possible to perform the normal pattern variation display even though the determination condition is satisfied. The player will recognize this. As a result, even if a situation in which the display means cannot display the variation of the normal pattern occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused that the establishment of the determination condition has been invalidated. .

  In addition, since the simple information used for the simple display has a smaller storage capacity than the start variation display information, it is possible to shorten the time until the transfer of the simple display is completed and the start variation display. Even if the simple information is transferred before the information, it is possible to prevent the timing of completing the transfer of the start variation display information from being extremely delayed.

  Feature C19. In the situation in which the start variation display information is not stored in the second storage unit and the simple information is stored in the simple display control unit, the grant determination unit performs the grant determination. Prior to or on the basis of the fact that the application determination has been performed by the application determination unit, the display of variation of the simple pattern is started, and the display of variation of the simple image is terminated as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the application determination unit. The game machine according to Feature C18, wherein the simplified display is displayed on the display screen by using the simplified information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the feature C19, since the variation display of the simple pattern is performed as the simple display, the variation display corresponding to the grant determination is displayed on the display screen even in a situation where the player cannot perform the variation display of the normal pattern. It becomes easy to recognize that it is being performed, and it becomes possible to suppress the confusion of the player.

Feature C20. A display time determining means (a function for executing a variation start process in the main control device 60) for determining a variation display time of the variation display of the normal pattern;
The game machine according to C18 or C19, wherein the simple display control means continues the simple display until the variable display time determined by the display time determination means elapses.

  According to the feature C20, it is possible to suppress the digestion time of each game time based on the grant determination from fluctuating according to the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the normal pattern variation display cannot be performed. Also, for example, even if the control entity includes a display time determination unit and the other control entity includes a control unit, the variable display time determined by one control entity is provided. The occurrence of inconvenience that the time of the game-playing effect executed by the other control subject does not coincide with each other can be suppressed.

  Feature C21. When the transfer of the start variation display information is completed in the situation where the simple display is performed, the simple display ends after the simple display is completed without switching to the normal image variation display during the simple display. The game according to any one of features C18 to C20, further comprising switching means (a function for executing the process of step S1502 in the display CPU 102) for switching to a state in which the normal display can be changed. Machine.

  According to the feature C21, even if the transfer of the start variation display information is completed in a situation where the simple display is performed, it is not necessary to switch to the variation display based on the normal pattern, so that the process is not complicated.

Feature C22. Comprising a receiving means (production operation device 58) for receiving a specific operation, and the specific event is that the specific operation is received by the receiving means;
The optional information includes operation correspondence information (each background data group, operation system data group) used by the control means to execute operation correspondence control when the specific operation is accepted by the accepting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C21, wherein:

  According to the feature C22, the operation correspondence information corresponding to the specific operation is executed using the operation correspondence information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, so that the operation correspondence information can be read by the control means. The time required can be shortened, and the operation response control can be executed smoothly. In particular, the operation correspondence information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where the specific operation can occur even after the operation correspondence control is once executed. In the configuration that occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to shorten the time until the operation corresponding control for the occurrence of each specific operation is started.

Feature C23. The optional information may include the first optional information used by the control means for executing the first optional response control based on the occurrence of the first specific event, and the first specific event. Second optional information used by the control means to perform second optional response control based on the occurrence of a second specific event that may occur in the situation,
The transfer means transfers the first optional information and the second optional information to the second storage means in accordance with a predetermined priority when a predetermined optional information transfer condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C22, wherein:

  According to the feature C23, since the first optional information and the second optional information are transferred in advance according to the priority order, transfer of the optional information with a high priority order can be completed early.

Feature C24. Informing means (symbol display device 31) and abnormality determining means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred (function to execute reading processing for abnormality monitoring in main controller 60),
In the optional information, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determining means as information in which the transfer priority is set in advance among the first optional information and the second optional information. The gaming machine according to Feature C23, wherein abnormality information (abnormality notification data group) used by the control unit when abnormality notification is executed by the notification unit is included.

  According to the feature C24, since the priority of the abnormality information is set high, it is possible to make an early transition to a state in which abnormality notification can be performed.

  Feature C25. The second storage means stores the optional information read from the first storage means, and even after the optional correspondence control is executed by the control means using the optional information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C24, wherein the optional information is stored and held in a situation where the specific event may occur.

  According to the feature C25, since it is not necessary to read out the information for arbitrary use every time a specific event that occurs at an arbitrary timing occurs, the time until the arbitrary response control is started for the occurrence of the specific event is reduced Can be achieved.

  Feature C26. When the optional information is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, even if the specific event corresponding to the optional information does not occur, Any one of the features C1 to C25 is characterized in that it is not erased upon transfer to the second storage means and is stored and held in the second storage means until a predetermined erasure condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature C26, since the optional information is stored and held in the second storage unit without being erased even if a specific event does not occur, the frequency of repeating the optional information erasure and retransfer is repeated. Reduced.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature C group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. .

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Also, in recent years, the degree of attention to images has been increased by diversifying the presentation mode of images or using complex moving images or live-action images as images, and accordingly, attention to games has been increased. Attempts have been made.

  Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable to display the image at an early stage. As a method for displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of a memory for image data can be considered. As another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of a CPU that performs image processing is conceivable. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom of memory selection decreases at the gaming machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed increases.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to image display, and similarly occurs in configurations related to other controls.

  Further, for any one of the features C1 to C26, the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B11, the following features D1 to D19, the following features E1 to E15, the following features F1 to F18, and the following features G1. The structure limited in any one of -G19, the following features H1-H12, the following features I1-I4, and the following features J1-J19 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on the information stored in the first storage means (function for executing processing related to drawing instructions in the display CPU 102) , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105),
The first storage means stores optional information (ordinary data group) used for executing arbitrary response control in the control means when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation. And
Transfer means (in the VDP 105) for storing arbitrary information read out from the first storage means in the second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) whose speed required for reading out the information is faster than when reading out from the first storage means. A function of transferring a data group to the VDP RAM 108, a write control unit 121, and a cache buffer 123)
The second storage means stores and holds the optional information when a situation in which the specific event may occur after the optional information is transferred,
When the specific event occurs, the control means performs the arbitrary correspondence control using the optional information stored in the second storage means,
Further, specific information used when the control means executes specific control different from the arbitrary response control is read from the first storage means, and the optional information in the second storage means is stored. A gaming machine comprising overwriting means for overwriting an area including at least a part of the area (a function for executing an overwriting process in the VDP 105).

  According to the feature D1, by performing specific control using the optional information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the time required for reading the optional information in the control means can be shortened. Thus, it is possible to smoothly execute arbitrary response control with respect to the occurrence of a specific event. In particular, since the optional information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held when the situation in which the specific event can occur is continued, each specific event in the configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing It is not necessary to transfer the specific information to the second storage unit every time the occurrence of the occurrence of the error, and the time until the arbitrary response control is started for the occurrence of each specific event is shortened.

  Also, the specific information used when executing specific control different from the arbitrary response control is read from the first storage means and overwritten on the area where the optional information is stored in the second storage means. Sometimes. As a result, the specific information is stored instead of the optional information as necessary. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the optional information is always stored in the second storage unit, the area of the second storage unit can be used effectively, and the storage capacity necessary for the second storage unit is reduced as described above. An excellent effect can be achieved.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

  Feature D2. In the situation where the specific event does not occur, the overwriting means overwrites the specific information in an area including at least a part of an area in the second storage means in which optional information corresponding to the specific event is stored. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, characterized in that:

  According to the feature D2, since the optional information corresponding to the specific event is an erasure target in a situation where the specific event does not occur, the operational effect of the feature D1 can be achieved without hindering the arbitrary response control. .

Feature D3. Provided with an abnormality determination means (a function for executing a reading process for abnormality monitoring in the main controller 60) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred,
The arbitrary information includes abnormality information (for abnormality notification) that is used by the control unit when the notification unit performs abnormality notification based on the fact that the abnormality determination unit determines that an abnormality has occurred. Data group) and information different from the abnormal information,
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the abnormality information is excluded from being overwritten by the overwriting means.

  According to the feature D3, the abnormality notification control is executed using the abnormality information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, thereby reducing the time required for reading the abnormality information in the control means. Therefore, abnormality notification can be executed smoothly.

  In particular, the abnormality information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where an abnormality can occur even after the abnormality notification is once executed. Furthermore, the abnormality information is not erased even when the specific information is transferred to the second storage means. As a result, in a configuration in which an abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to smoothly execute abnormality notification for the occurrence of each abnormality.

  Feature D4. Recovery means (recovery processing in the VDP 105 is executed) that restores the optional information erased by overwriting by the overwriting means to the second storage means until a specific event corresponding to the optional information can occur. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the game machine has a function).

  According to the feature D4, since the optional information that is the target of erasure when the specific information is stored is returned to the second storage means until a specific event corresponding to the optional information can occur. The effect of the feature D1 can be achieved without hindering the arbitrary response control.

Feature D5. The optional information to be overwritten by the overwriting means includes first optional information and second optional information,
The return means restores the first optional information and the second optional information erased by overwriting by the overwrite means to the second storage means according to a predetermined priority order. The gaming machine according to Feature D4, wherein the information and the second optional information are restored.

  According to the feature D5, in a configuration in which plural types of optional information are deleted when overwriting specific information, the information is restored from optional information having a high priority. As a result, it is possible to sequentially return the optional information according to the frequency of occurrence of the corresponding specific event, the importance of execution of the optional response control, and the like.

Feature D6. The effect execution means is provided, and the control means causes the effect execution means to execute an effect using information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means.
The optional information includes start effect information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the control means when a series of effects is started by the effect execution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the start effect information is included in an overwriting target by the overwriting means.

  According to the feature D6, a series of effects is started using the start effect information transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, thereby reducing the time required for reading the start effect information in the control unit. A series of effects can be smoothly started. In particular, the start effect information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where a new series of effects can occur even after the series of effects has started. Thereby, even if it is the structure by which a series of productions are started at arbitrary timings, a series of productions can be smoothly started at each start timing.

  In addition, when the specific information is transferred to the second storage unit, the specific information is overwritten on an area including at least a part of the area where the start effect information is stored, so that the start effect information follows. The area of the second storage means can be effectively used in situations that are not used when the presentation is executed.

  The effect execution means includes display means having a display screen, and the control means uses the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means to display an image on the display screen. The configuration related to the overwriting of the feature D6 may be applied to the configuration that displays.

Feature D7. The start effect information is information used in common when starting in a series of effects of a plurality of types,
The specific information is the control means when the effect executing means executes an effect in an additional effect range that may be executed at a timing later than the start effect range executed using the start effect information. The game machine according to Feature D6, which is additional presentation correspondence information (each notice data group, each reach data group) used by the player.

  According to the feature D7, in the configuration in which the start effect information is not used when the effect of the additional effect range is executed, the start effect information is stored when the additional effect correspondence information is stored in the second storage unit in advance. The area of the second storage means can be effectively used by overwriting the additional effect corresponding information to the area including at least a part of the existing area.

Feature D8. In the series of effects including the additional effect range, the effect of the intermediate effect range is executed after the effect of the start effect range is executed, and then the effect of the additional effect range is performed.
The first storage means stores intermediate correspondence information used by the control means when executing the effect in the intermediate effect range, and the control means sends the effect in the intermediate effect range to the effect execution means. The intermediate correspondence information read from the first storage means and stored in advance in the second storage means,
The overwriting means is an area different from an area in which the intermediate correspondence information is stored in the second storage means in a situation where an effect in the intermediate effect range is executed by the effect executing means or in a situation where the effect is executed. The game machine according to Feature D7, wherein the additional effect correspondence information is overwritten in an area including at least a part of the area where the start effect information is stored.

  According to the feature D8, the area of the second storage unit can be effectively used while the start effect range effect and the intermediate effect range effect are executed satisfactorily.

  Feature D9. There is provided return means (a function for executing overwriting processing in the VDP 105) for returning the start effect information erased by the overwriting means to the second storage means until a series of effects including the additional effect range is completed. The gaming machine according to Feature D7 or D8, wherein

  According to the feature D9, the start effect information that is to be erased when the additional effect correspondence information is stored is returned to the second storage means until the end of the series of effects including the additional effect range. The area of the second storage means can be effectively used without hindering the start of the production.

Feature D10. In the additional production range, a long production range (super reach B display) and a short production range (super reach A display) in which the time required from the start to the end is relatively long are set. The long correspondence information (data group for super reach B) corresponding to is a configuration with a larger information capacity than the short correspondence information (data group for super reach A) corresponding to the short production range,
The overwriting means sets the start effect information to be overwritten when a series of effects including the long effect range is executed, and starts when a series of effects including the short effect range is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature D9, wherein the effect information is not overwritten.

  According to the feature D10, when the effect of the long effect range is executed, the second storage is performed by overwriting the long correspondence information on the area including at least a part of the area where the start effect information is stored. The effect of the long production range can be executed while suppressing the storage capacity required by the means. On the other hand, when an effect in the short effect range is executed, overwriting or returning of the start effect information is performed for a relatively short time by not overwriting the short correspondence information in the area of the start effect information. It is possible to prevent the situation to occur.

Feature D11. An effect execution means (symbol display device 31) is provided, and the control means causes the effect execution means to execute an effect using information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. Yes,
The series of effects executed by the effect execution means includes a long effect range (super reach B display) and a short effect range (super reach A display) in which the time required from the start to the end is relatively long. Is set,
The overwriting means performs overwriting on the area in which the information for arbitrary use is stored when the effect of the long effect range is executed, and when the effect of the short effect range is executed, The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, wherein the game machine does not perform overwriting to an area in which information for arbitrary use is stored.

  According to the feature D11, when the effect of the long effect range is executed, the effect of the long effect range is executed while suppressing the storage capacity necessary in the second storage unit by setting the optional information as an overwriting target. be able to. On the other hand, when the production of the short production range is executed, the situation in which the optional information is overwritten or restored in a relatively short time occurs by not making the optional information to be overwritten. Can not be.

Feature D12. Display means (design display device 31) having a display screen;
Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
A privilege granting unit (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit;
With
The control means starts the change display of the picture before the application determination is performed by the application determination means or based on the application determination performed by the application determination means, and the determination of the application determination means. By using the information read out from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, a game-playing effect that causes the variation display of the pattern to be terminated as a stop result corresponding to the result is used. Display on the display means,
The specific information is information used by the control means when displaying on the display screen a specific reach display that can be executed in the middle of the variable display of the pattern,
The overwriting means reads out the specific information from the first storage means and displays the arbitrary information in the second storage means when the display of the design for which the specific reach display is performed midway is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11, wherein the gaming machine overwrites an area including at least a part of the stored area.

  According to the feature D12, when information for executing a specific reach display is transferred to the second storage unit, the second storage unit can be used by effectively using the area of the second storage unit with the optional information as an erasure target. Reach display with a large amount of information can be performed while reducing the storage capacity required for the means.

Feature D13. An effect execution means (symbol display device 31) is provided, and the control means causes the effect execution means to execute an effect using information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. Yes,
The series of effects executed by the effect execution means includes a branching mode that proceeds to one of a plurality of branch effect ranges according to the progress of the effects until the middle,
The first storage means stores branch correspondence information (first operation system data group, second operation system data group) used by the control means when starting the production of each branch production range. The control means is read out from the first storage means and stored in advance in the second storage means when the effect execution means executes the effects in the branch effect ranges. Each branch correspondence information is used,
When the branch mode effect is executed, the overwriting unit reads the branch correspondence information from the first storage unit and branches to the second storage before branching to any of the branch effect ranges. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D12, wherein the game machine overwrites an area including at least a part of an area in which the optional information is stored.

  According to the feature D13, the production proceeds to any one of the plurality of branch production ranges according to the progress of the production until the middle, so that the production can be diversified. In this case, since the branch correspondence information is stored in the second storage unit in advance before branching to any one of the branch effect ranges, the process proceeds to any branch effect range. Even so, it is possible to smoothly proceed from the branch timing to the subsequent production range.

  Further, when each branch correspondence information is stored in advance in the second storage means, the second storage is provided by overwriting the area including at least a part of the area in which the optional information is stored. The means does not have to have a storage capacity that can store all the optional information and all the branch correspondence information at the same time. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the storage capacity necessary for the second storage means.

  Feature D14. The overwriting means includes an area including at least a part of an area in which branch correspondence information corresponding to a branch effect range not selected as a progress destination is stored among the branch correspondence information stored in the second storage means. On the other hand, the game machine according to Feature D13, wherein other information is overwritten in a situation where the effect of the branch effect range selected as the destination is being executed.

  According to the feature D14, an area in which branch correspondence information corresponding to a branch effect range not selected as a destination is stored, and an area in which information used by the control unit is stored when an effect generated after branching is executed. Can be used as Thereby, the effect which demonstrated the structure of the said characteristic D13 can be show | played, utilizing the area | region of a 2nd memory | storage means effectively.

  Feature D15. Arbitrary information erased by overwriting by the overwriting means is executed after the branch timing of the branch correspondence information in the second storage means until a specific event corresponding to the optional information can occur. A feature D13 or D14 is provided with return means (a function for executing return processing in the VDP 105) for returning by overwriting an area including at least a part of an area in which information that has not been stored is stored. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature D15, the optional information that is to be deleted when each branch correspondence information is stored in advance is stored in the second storage unit until a specific event corresponding to the optional information can occur. Since the operation is restored, the effect of the feature D13 can be achieved without hindering the arbitrary response control. Moreover, the area | region where the branch corresponding | compatible information corresponding to the branch production | presentation range which was not selected as an advance destination is memorize | stored can be used as an area | region which erase | eliminated the information for arbitrary deletions. Thereby, the effect of the said characteristic D13 can be show | played, utilizing the area | region of a 2nd memory | storage means effectively.

Feature D16. The optional information includes start effect information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the control means when the effect execution means starts the series of effects.
A series of effects corresponding to the branching mode is set so that a branch to any one of the branch effect ranges is performed after the start effect range executed using the start effect information,
The start effect information is information that is not used by the control unit when the branch effect range effect is executed using the branch correspondence information, and is included in an overwriting target by the overwriting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features D13 to D15.

  According to the feature D16, the start effect information in the series of effects is executed using the start effect information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, so that the start effect information is read out by the control means. The time required can be shortened, and a series of effects can be started smoothly. In particular, the start effect information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where a new series of effects can occur even after the series of effects has started. Thereby, even if it is the structure by which a series of productions are started at arbitrary timings, a series of productions can be smoothly started at each start timing.

  In addition, in a configuration that is not used when the start effect information causes the branch effect range effect to be executed, an area in which the start effect information is stored when each branch correspondence information is stored in the second storage unit in advance. By overwriting the area including at least a part of the area, the area of the second storage means can be used effectively.

Feature D17. The series of effects corresponding to the branching mode is set such that the intermediate effect range effect is executed after the start effect range is executed, and then branching to any of the branch effect ranges is performed. And
The first storage means stores intermediate correspondence information used by the control means when executing an effect in the intermediate effect range, and the control means is read from the first storage means and is stored in the second storage. Using the intermediate information stored in the storage means to cause the effect execution means to execute the effect in the intermediate effect range;
Further, the overwriting means is a region in which the intermediate correspondence information in the second storage means is stored in a situation where the effect of the intermediate effect range is executed by the effect executing means or is being executed. The gaming machine according to Feature D16, wherein the branch correspondence information is overwritten on a different area including at least a part of the area where the start effect information is stored.

  According to the feature D17, it is possible to effectively use the area of the second storage unit while performing the start effect range effect and the intermediate effect range effect well.

Feature D18. Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
Transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means (execution of game state transition processing in the main controller 60) Function)
With
The control means uses the information read out from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, so that in the situation where the gaming state is the special gaming state, the effect execution means performs the special gaming state. To perform the production for
The specific information is information used by the control means when causing the effect execution means to execute an effect for at least a predetermined special gaming state,
The overwriting means reads out the specific information from the first storage means when the effect for the predetermined special gaming state is performed, and at least an area in which the optional information of the second storage means is stored. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D17, wherein an area including a part is overwritten.

  According to feature D18, when information for executing a special gaming state effect is transferred to the second storage means, the optional storage area is used as an erasure target to effectively use the area of the second storage means. 2. While reducing the storage capacity required for the storage means, it is possible to produce a special gaming state with a large information capacity.

Feature D19. A variable entry means (variable) provided in a game area where a game ball flows down and which can be switched between a first state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is easy to enter and a second state in which the game ball is less likely to enter. Winning device 22),
In the special gaming state, after the variable pitching means is set to the first state, the variable pitching control for switching to the second state when the upper limit number of gaming balls enter the variable pitching means is predetermined. Variable pitch control means (a function of executing a large winning opening / closing process in the main control device 60) repeated over a plurality of times;
With
The control means uses the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, thereby providing an effect for the first state in the situation where the variable pitching means is in the first state. In addition to causing the effect execution means to execute, the effect for the first state is set according to the first state of each number of times,
The specific information is information used by the control unit when the production for the first state is executed by the production execution unit, and includes all information corresponding to the first states for the plurality of times. And
The overwriting means reads out the specific information from the first storage means and starts the second storage means before the first effect for the first state is started when the effects for the first states are performed. The game machine according to Feature D18, wherein the game machine overwrites an area including at least a part of the area in which the optional information is stored.

  According to feature D19, in the special game state, each first state is terminated when the upper limit number of game balls enter the variable entry means, so the duration is not constant and corresponds to each first state. The timing at which the performance is started is also irregular. In this case, since all of the production information corresponding to each first state for a plurality of times is transferred and stored in the second storage means until the first production for the first state is started, Even if the effects for the first states are started at irregular timings, the control means can execute the effects for the first states using the information read from the second storage means.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group D is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. .

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Also, in recent years, the degree of attention to images has been increased by diversifying the presentation mode of images or using complex moving images or live-action images as images, and accordingly, attention to games has been increased. Attempts have been made.

  Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable to display the image at an early stage. As a method for displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of a memory for image data can be considered. As another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of a CPU that performs image processing is conceivable. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom of memory selection decreases at the gaming machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed increases.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to image display, and similarly occurs in configurations related to other controls.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features D1 to D19, the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C26, the following features E1 to E15, the following features F1 to F18, and the following features G1. The structure limited in any one of -G19, the following features H1-H12, the following features I1-I4, and the following features J1-J19 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
A privilege granting unit (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit;
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game time control means (in the display CPU 102) controls a specific notification means so that the game time operation of each game time is performed, with the game result being ended as the notification result as one game time. A function of executing a variation start process by a normal symbol and a process during variation by a normal symbol), and
By executing the special notification by the specific notification means or a different notification means, the game notification operation is performed by the specific notification means even though the condition for starting the game rotation operation is satisfied. Special notification control means for allowing the player to recognize that the establishment of the determination condition has not been invalidated in a situation where the determination cannot be performed (a function of executing a change start process using a simple symbol and a process during change using a simple symbol in the display CPU 102) )When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, the player who visually recognizes the game turning operation grasps the result of the grant determination by performing the game turning operation. In this case, when a situation occurs in which the game turning operation cannot be performed, the player is confused that the determination condition is invalidated even though the determination condition is satisfied. There is a concern that On the other hand, when the special notification is performed, the player recognizes that the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated in a situation where the game turning operation cannot be performed. As a result, even if a situation where the game turning operation cannot be performed occurs, the player is prevented from being confused as to whether the establishment of the determination condition has been invalidated.

Feature E2. An operation mode determining means (a function for executing variation start processing in the main control device 60) for determining a series of operation modes of the game turning operation;
The gaming machine according to claim E1, wherein the special notification control unit is configured to continue the special notification until an operation duration time corresponding to the operation mode determined by the operation mode determination unit elapses.

  According to the feature E2, it is possible to suppress the digestion time of each game time based on the grant determination from fluctuating according to the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the game time operation cannot be performed. In addition, for example, even if the control entity includes a plurality of control entities, one control entity includes an operation mode determination unit, and the other control entity includes a game turn control unit, the operation determined by one control entity Occurrence of an inconvenience that the duration and the execution time of the game turning operation executed by the other control subject do not coincide with each other can be suppressed.

Feature E3. Continuation time determining means (function for executing variation start processing in the main controller 60) for determining the operation continuation time of the game turning operation;
The gaming machine according to claim E1, wherein the special notification control means continues the special notification until the operation duration determined by the duration determination means elapses.

  According to the feature E3, it is possible to prevent the digestion time of each game time based on the grant determination from fluctuating according to the frequency of occurrence of a situation where the game time operation cannot be performed. Also, for example, even if the control entity includes a plurality of control entities, one control entity includes duration determination means and the other control entity includes game times control means, the operation determined by one control entity Occurrence of an inconvenience that the duration and the execution time of the game turning operation executed by the other control subject do not coincide with each other can be suppressed.

  Feature E4. If the game notification operation can be performed in the situation where the special notification is being performed, the special notification is completed without switching to the game rotation operation during the special notification. Any one of features E1 to E3, further comprising switching means (a function of executing the processing of step S1502 in the display CPU 102) for switching so that the operation for game times is performed from a later game time. Game machines.

  According to the feature E4, even if it becomes a situation where the game-returning operation can be performed in a situation where the special notification is performed, it is not necessary to switch to the game-return operation in the middle of the special notification being performed. Therefore, complication of processing can be suppressed.

Feature E5. The specific notification means is a display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen, and the special notification is executed by another notification means (main display unit 212) provided separately from the display means. The configuration
The special notification control means starts special notification before the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. The special notification of each game time is performed by the separate notification means so that the special notification is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result,
Furthermore, a display for recognizing that the special notification is being performed by the separate notification means in a situation where the display means cannot perform the game turning operation despite the determination condition being satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, further comprising suggestion control means (display control device 100) to be performed by the display means.

  According to the feature E5, since the display unit and the separate notification unit are provided as the unit for notifying the result of the grant determination, the reliability in notifying the result of the grant determination is improved. In this case, in a situation where the game turning operation cannot be performed, it is only necessary to cause the display means to recognize that the special notification is being performed by the separate notification means. Control load is reduced.

Feature E6. Display means (design display device 31) having a display screen;
Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
A privilege granting unit (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit;
Prior to the application determination being performed by the application determination unit, or based on the application determination being performed by the application determination unit, the normal pattern variation display is started and corresponds to the determination result of the application determination unit. The normal display control means for controlling the display means to display the fluctuation display of the normal picture at each game time, assuming that the fluctuation display of the normal picture is terminated as one stop time as the stop result. A function of executing a change start process using the normal symbol and a process during change using the normal symbol in the display CPU 102);
By executing the special notification on the display screen or another notification means different from the display screen, the normal image variation display is performed on the display screen even though the condition for starting the normal pattern variation display is satisfied. A special notification control means (a function for executing a change start process by a simple symbol and a process during change by a simple symbol in the display CPU 102) for allowing the player to recognize that the grant determination is not invalidated in a situation where it cannot be performed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E6, the player who has visually recognized the variation display of the normal pattern grasps the result of the grant determination by performing the variation display of the normal pattern. In this case, if a situation occurs in which the normal pattern cannot be changed, the player is confused that the determination condition is invalidated even though the determination condition is satisfied. There is a concern that On the other hand, when the special notification is performed, the player recognizes that the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated in a situation in which the normal pattern variation display cannot be performed. As a result, even if a situation in which the normal pattern variation display cannot be performed occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused that the establishment of the determination condition has been invalidated.

Feature E7. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information used by the normal display control means when the normal picture is displayed in a variable manner;
Storing the information read from the first storage means, and a second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage means;
The information read from the first storage means is read so that the information used when the normal display control means performs the variable display of the normal pattern is stored in the second storage means in advance. Transfer means (function to transfer a data group to the VDP-side RAM 108 in the VDP 105, the write control unit 121);
With
The normal display control means uses the information transferred to the second storage means in the case of causing the normal picture to be changed and displayed.
The special notification control means executes the special notification on the display screen or another different notification means, so that the second memory is stored even though a condition for starting the normal picture variation display is established. A feature E6 is characterized in that the player recognizes that the assignment determination has not been invalidated in a situation in which information used when starting display of fluctuation of the normal pattern is not stored in the means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to feature E7, the information for causing the normal pattern variation display to be performed by executing the normal pattern variation display by using the information transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit. The use speed of the image can be improved, and the normal pattern variation display can be performed smoothly. However, in this configuration, it is assumed that the transfer of information to the second storage unit is not in time until the condition for starting the normal pattern variation display is satisfied. On the other hand, in the above situation, the player is confused as to whether the establishment of the judgment condition has been invalidated by the special notification even if the display of the normal pattern is not performed. Is suppressed.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

Feature E8. The first storage means stores start fluctuation display information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the normal display control means when starting the normal picture fluctuation display. ,
The second storage means stores and holds the start variation display information in a situation where a condition for starting the variation display of the normal pattern can be satisfied after the start variation display information is transferred,
The special notification control means executes the special notification on the display screen or another different notification means, so that the second memory is stored even though a condition for starting the normal picture variation display is established. The gaming machine according to the feature E7, characterized in that the player recognizes that the grant determination is not invalidated in a situation where the start variation display information is not stored in the means.

  According to the feature E8, by using the start variation display information transferred in advance from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, the normal pattern variation display is started, so that the control unit displays the start variation display information. The time required for reading can be shortened, and the normal pattern variation display can be started smoothly. In particular, the start variation display information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where the condition for starting the variation display can be satisfied, so that the condition for starting the normal pattern variation display should be started. However, the start variation display information does not need to be transferred to the second storage means each time the conditions are satisfied, and the normal pattern variation display is started when the conditions are satisfied. The time until is shortened.

  However, in this configuration, it is assumed that the transfer of the start variation display information to the second storage unit is not in time until the condition for starting the normal pattern variation display is satisfied. On the other hand, in the above situation, the player is confused as to whether the establishment of the judgment condition has been invalidated by the special notification even if the display of the normal pattern is not performed. Is suppressed.

  In the feature E8, the transfer unit may be configured to read the start variation display information from the first storage unit and store it in the second storage unit after power supply is started. In this case, the effect that “the time from when the condition for starting the fluctuation display of the normal pattern to be met to when the fluctuation display of the normal pattern is started can be shortened” can be achieved after the start of power supply. it can.

Feature E9. The first storage means stores simple information (simple symbol data group) in which the capacity of information is set smaller than the information used by the normal display control means when starting the variable display of the normal pattern. And
The transfer means reads the simple information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means,
The special notification control unit is configured so that the normal information is not stored in the second storage unit when the information used by the normal display control unit is stored in the second storage unit. When the condition for starting the variable display of the pattern is satisfied, the player recognizes that the execution of the assignment determination is not invalidated by using the simple information stored in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to feature E7 or E8, wherein the simple display is displayed on the display screen.

  According to feature E9, the player can confirm that the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated in a situation where the display of the normal pattern cannot be performed even though the determination condition is satisfied by the simple display. Will be recognized. As a result, even if a situation in which the display means cannot display the variation of the normal pattern occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused that the establishment of the determination condition has been invalidated. . In particular, when the above simple display is performed by the display means that normally displays the variation of the pattern, the player can easily recognize that the determination condition is not invalidated.

  In addition, the simple information used when performing simple display has a smaller amount of information than the information used when starting variable image display, so it takes a short time to complete the transfer of simple information. Even if the simple information is transferred before the information used for starting the display of the normal pattern, the timing for completing the transfer of the former information is extremely late. It is suppressed that it becomes.

Feature E10. The first storage means includes start fluctuation display information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the normal display control means when starting the normal picture fluctuation display, and the start fluctuation. Simple information (simple symbol data group) in which the capacity of information is set smaller than the display information is stored,
The transfer means reads the start fluctuation display information from the first storage means after the power supply is started and stores it in the second storage means, and also transfers the start fluctuation display information when transferring the start fluctuation display information. It includes a destination transfer means (a function for executing the initial setting process of the common data group in the write control unit 121) for reading the simple information from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means before the information. ,
The second storage means should start the fluctuation display of the normal pattern even after the normal display control means performs display control so that the start fluctuation display is performed using the start fluctuation display information. The start variation display information is stored and held in a situation where a condition can be satisfied,
The special notification control means displays the normal picture fluctuation display in a situation where the start fluctuation display information is not stored in the second storage means and the simple information is stored in the second storage means. The feature E7 or E8 is characterized in that when a condition to be started is satisfied, a simple display is displayed on the display screen by using the simple information stored in the second storage means. Game machines.

  According to the feature E10, by using the start variation display information transferred in advance from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, the normal pattern variation display is started. The time required for reading can be shortened, and the normal pattern variation display can be started smoothly. In particular, the start variation display information transferred to the second storage means is the first variation in a situation where the condition for starting the variation display of the normal pattern can be satisfied even after the display control is performed so that the start variation display is performed. 2 is stored and held in the storage means. As a result, even if the conditions for starting the normal pattern variation display occur at an arbitrary timing, it is not necessary to transfer the start variation display information to the second storage means each time the conditions are satisfied. It is possible to shorten the time until the normal picture variation display is started with respect to the establishment.

  However, in this configuration, it is assumed that the transfer of the start variation display information to the second storage unit is not in time until the condition for starting the normal pattern variation display is satisfied. On the other hand, the simple display is performed in the above situation, and the fact that the determination condition is not invalidated in the situation where the variation display of the normal pattern cannot be performed even though the determination condition is satisfied. The player will recognize. As a result, even if a situation in which the display means cannot display the variation of the normal pattern occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused that the establishment of the determination condition has been invalidated. . In particular, when the above simple display is performed by the display means that normally displays the variation of the pattern, the player can easily recognize that the determination condition is not invalidated.

  In addition, the simple information used for simple display has a smaller information capacity than the start variation display information, so that it is possible to shorten the time until the transfer of the simple information is completed, and the start variation Even if the simple information is transferred prior to the display information, it is possible to prevent the timing of completing the transfer of the start variation display information from being extremely delayed.

  Feature E11. The forward transfer unit reads the start variation display information from the first storage unit and stores it in the second storage unit in a situation where the simple display is performed. Game machines.

  According to the feature E11, the transfer of the start variation display information is performed in a situation where the simple display is performed, so that the variation display of the normal pattern can be performed at least from the subsequent game times.

  Feature E12. The special notification control means is a situation in which the information used by the normal display control means when the normal picture variation display is started is not stored in the second storage means, and the simple information is the second information. When the condition for starting the normal pattern variation display is satisfied in the situation stored in the storage unit, the simple pattern variation display is started and the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the addition determination unit is set as the stop result. Any one of the features E9 to E11 is characterized in that the simple display for ending the variable display is displayed on the display screen by using the simple information stored in the second storage means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature E12, since the variation display of the simple pattern is performed as the simple display, the variation display corresponding to the assignment determination is displayed on the display screen even in a situation where the variation display of the normal pattern cannot be performed for the player. It becomes easy to recognize that it is being performed, and it becomes possible to suppress the confusion of the player.

Feature E13. A display time determining means (a function for executing a variation start process in the main control device 60) for determining a variation display time of the variation display of the normal pattern;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E6 to E12, wherein the special notification control unit continues the special notification until the variable display time determined by the display time determination unit elapses.

  According to the feature E13, it is possible to suppress the digestion time of each game time based on the grant determination from fluctuating according to the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the normal pattern variation display cannot be performed. Also, for example, even if the control entity includes a display time determination unit and the other control entity includes a control unit, the variable display time determined by one control entity is provided. The occurrence of inconvenience that the time of the game-playing effect executed by the other control subject does not coincide with each other can be suppressed.

  Feature E14. The normal display control means switches to the variable display by the normal pattern during the special notification when the special image is in a state where the normal pattern can be displayed in a variable state. And a switching means (a function for executing the processing of step S1502 in the display CPU 102) for switching the display so that the normal display is changed from the game time after the special notification is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E6 to E13.

  According to the feature E14, even if the normal picture change display can be performed in the situation where the special notification is performed, it is necessary to switch to the normal pattern change display while the special notification is being performed. Therefore, complication of processing can be suppressed.

Feature E15. The special notification is performed by another notification means (main display unit 212) provided separately from the display means,
The special notification control means starts special notification before the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. The special notification of each game time is performed by the separate notification means so that the special notification is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result,
Further, a display for recognizing that the special notification is being performed by the separate notification unit in a situation where the display unit cannot display the fluctuation of the normal pattern despite the determination condition being satisfied. The game machine according to any one of features E6 to E14, further comprising suggestion control means (display control device 100) for causing the display means to perform the operation.

  According to the feature E15, since the display unit and the separate notification unit are provided as the unit for notifying the result of the grant determination, the reliability in notifying the result of the grant determination is improved. In this case, in a situation in which the normal pattern variation display cannot be performed, it is only necessary to cause the display means to recognize that the special notification is being performed by the separate notification means. The processing load is reduced.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group E is effective for the following problems.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a big hit gaming state is triggered by the fact that a gaming ball has entered the start ball entering section provided in the gaming area. Done. In addition, in a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device provided in a game area, for example, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is performed as described above. A display effect for one game is displayed in which a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is a so-called jackpot gaming state transition winning, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in a gaming area, for example, is executed after a display effect for one game is executed, Payout of game balls is executed according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  Here, the display content of the display device has a function of clearly indicating to the player the lottery result of whether or not to give a privilege to the player, so that the player plays the game. This is the place to focus on. Under such circumstances, the player will be confused if a situation in which the display of the lottery result is not properly performed despite the fact that the gaming machine is in a state where the game can be played. .

  For example, the lottery result due to the fact that the display control of the display device is not performed well despite the occurrence of the game ball entering the start ball entering part in a situation where the game ball can be launched If the display that clearly indicates is not performed, the player will be confused.

  The above problem also occurs in a gaming machine in which a lottery result is clearly indicated by a notification device different from a display device having a display screen.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features E1 to E15, the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C26, the features D1 to D19, the following features F1 to F18, and the following features G1. The structure limited in any one of -G19, the following features H1-H12, the following features I1-I4, and the following features J1-J19 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. An accepting unit that accepts a specific operation (production operation device 58), and an operation corresponding to the operation corresponding information stored in the first storage unit (character ROM 106) when the accepting unit accepts the specific operation. In a gaming machine provided with control means for executing control (a function for executing processing related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102, a function for executing processing for displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105),
Storing the operation correspondence information read from the first storage means, and a second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) having a speed required for reading the information faster than the case of reading from the first storage means;
Transfer means for reading the operation correspondence information from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means until the control means performs the operation correspondence control for the specific operation (on the VDP side in the VDP 105) A function of transferring a data group to the RAM 108, a write control unit 121),
With
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means executes the operation correspondence control using the operation correspondence information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the feature F1, the operation correspondence control is executed using the operation correspondence information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, thereby shortening the time required for reading the operation correspondence information in the control means. As a result, the operation correspondence control can be performed smoothly. In addition, since the operation correspondence information is transferred in advance until the control unit performs the operation correspondence control with respect to the specific operation, the time corresponding to the execution of the operation correspondence control after the specific operation is performed is determined. Shortening can be achieved.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

Feature F2. An operation corresponding period in which the specific operation can be received by the receiving unit and the operation corresponding control is executed according to the specific operation is set,
The transfer means reads the operation correspondence information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means until the operation correspondence period is started,
The second storage means, when storing the operation correspondence information, stores and holds the operation correspondence information (each data group for background, operation system data group) at least in the operation correspondence period. The gaming machine according to Feature F1.

  According to the feature F2, even if the specific operation occurs at an arbitrary timing in the operation corresponding period, it is possible to shorten the time from when the specific operation is received until the operation corresponding control is executed.

Feature F3. The control means executes one of a plurality of types of operation corresponding control based on the fact that the specific operation is accepted,
The first storage means stores operation correspondence information necessary to start each operation correspondence control in association with each operation correspondence control,
The transfer means sends each operation correspondence information necessary to start each operation correspondence control until the control means executes any operation correspondence control for the specific operation. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the gaming machine is read out from storage means and stored in the second storage means.

  According to the feature F3, since each operation correspondence information necessary for starting each operation correspondence control is collectively stored in the second storage unit, any operation correspondence control is executed according to the specific operation. Even if the necessity arises, it is possible to shorten the time from when the specific operation is received until the operation corresponding control is executed.

  Feature F4. An effect execution means (symbol display device 31) is provided, and the control means executes the effect corresponding to the specific operation using the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the gaming machine is executed by a means.

  In the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to achieve the operational effects according to any one of the features F1 to F3.

  As a more specific configuration of the feature F4, a display means having a display screen is provided as an effect execution means, and the control means is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. A configuration in which an image is displayed on the display screen by using information can be considered.

Feature F5. A plurality of types of effect modes are set, in which the effect modes executed by the effect executing means are different from each other.
The control means performs mode-corresponding control corresponding to each rendering mode as the operation-corresponding control, and switches the mode-corresponding control to be executed based on the reception of the specific operation.
The first storage means stores, as the operation correspondence information, mode correspondence information necessary for starting each mode correspondence control in association with each mode correspondence control,
The transfer means reads out each mode correspondence information necessary for starting each mode correspondence control from the first storage means until the effect mode is switched to the specific operation. The gaming machine according to Feature F4, which is stored in a storage unit.

  According to the feature F5, diversification of effects is achieved by setting a plurality of types of effect modes. In this case, since each mode corresponding information necessary for starting each mode corresponding control is stored in the second storage means in advance, it is necessary to start any production mode according to the specific operation. Even so, it is possible to reduce the time from when the specific operation is received until the selected production mode is started.

  Note that, based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, an assignment determination unit that determines whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and a result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit is an assignment correspondence result. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the control has been performed, the control means prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or by the grant determination means Based on the determination being made, the game turning operation is started, and the game turning operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means, and the game turning operation is ended as the first game time. In the configuration in which the effect executing means is controlled so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed using the information read from one storage means and stored in the second storage means, each effect mode The operation mode of operation for the game times may be a mode in which different from each other.

Feature F6. The effect execution means is a display means that has a display screen and is display-controlled by the control means,
The display screen has a configuration in which a picture is displayed on a background image, and as the plurality of presentation modes, a plurality of types of display modes are set depending on a combination of the background image and the picture,
The control means executes mode-corresponding control for displaying an image corresponding to each display mode on the display screen as the operation-corresponding control, and performs mode-corresponding control to be executed based on reception of the specific operation. Is to switch,
The first storage means stores, as the operation correspondence information, mode correspondence information necessary for starting each mode correspondence control in association with each mode correspondence control,
The transfer means reads the mode correspondence information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means until the display mode is switched to the specific operation. The gaming machine according to Feature F5, which is characterized.

  According to the feature F6, the display can be diversified by setting a plurality of display modes. In this case, each mode correspondence information necessary for starting each mode correspondence control is stored in advance in the second storage means, so that it is necessary to start any display mode according to a specific operation. Even so, it is possible to shorten the time from when the specific operation is received until the selected display mode is started.

  Note that, based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, an assignment determination unit that determines whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and a result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit is an assignment correspondence result. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the control has been performed, the control means prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or by the grant determination means Based on the determination being made, the display of the variation of the pattern is started, and the display of the variation of the pattern is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. In the configuration in which the display means is controlled so that the display of the pattern is changed in each game time using the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, the display modes are set. Is the variable display of the display mode of the picture may be a mode in which different from each other.

Feature F7. The first storage means stores background information used by the control means when displaying the background image and design information used by the control means when displaying the design,
The transfer means is based on information used by the control means when displaying other display modes with background information and pattern information that enable display of an image in the reference display mode among the plurality of types of display modes. The gaming machine according to F6, wherein the game machine is also transferred with priority to the second storage means.

  According to the feature F7, the background information and the pattern information that enable the display of the image in the reference display mode among the plurality of types of display modes are transferred with priority over the information used when displaying other display modes. Is done. As a result, for example, an image in one of the display modes can be displayed compared to a configuration in which transfer of all of one of background information and design information that has been set for multiple types is completed and then transfer of the other is started. It is possible to shorten the time until it becomes.

Feature F8. The series of effects executed by the effect execution means includes a branch mode that proceeds to one of a plurality of branch effect ranges according to the mode of the specific operation received by the reception means. (Effect range of completed mode, range of unfinished mode)
The first storage means stores branch correspondence information (first operation system data group, second operation system data group) used by the control means when starting the production of each branch production range. The control means is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means when the effect execution means executes the effects of each branch effect range. It is a configuration using each branch correspondence information,
When the branch mode effect is executed, the transfer unit reads the branch correspondence information from the first storage unit and branches to the second memory before branching to any of the branch effect ranges. The gaming machine according to any one of features F4 to F7, wherein the gaming machine is stored in a means.

  According to the feature F8, the production proceeds to any one of the plurality of branch production ranges according to the mode of the specific operation, so that the production can be diversified. In this case, since the branch correspondence information is stored in the second storage unit in advance before branching to any one of the branch effect ranges, any branch effect according to the mode of the specific operation is stored. Even if it proceeds to the range, it is possible to smoothly proceed from the branch timing to the subsequent production range.

Feature F9. The effect of the branch mode includes an operation reception period in which an operation generation effect occurs every time the specific operation is received by the reception unit as a stage before branching to each of the branch effect ranges.
The first storage means stores operation generation information used by the control means to execute the operation generation effect when the specific operation is received in the operation reception period.
The transfer means reads out the operation occurrence information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means until the operation acceptance period when the effect of the branch mode is executed,
When the operation occurrence information is transferred, the second storage means stores and holds the operation occurrence information until at least the operation acceptance period elapses.
When the specific operation is received during the operation reception period, the control unit causes the effect execution unit to execute the operation generation effect using the operation generation information stored in the second storage unit. The gaming machine according to Feature F8, wherein:

  According to the feature F9, the operation reception period in which the operation generation effect is generated every time a specific operation is received is included as a stage before branching to each branch effect range, thereby diversifying the effects. Further, the operation occurrence information is transferred to the second storage means until the operation acceptance period, and the transferred operation occurrence information is stored and held until the operation acceptance period elapses. Thereby, even if the specific operation occurs at an arbitrary timing, the time until the operation generation effect is started can be shortened.

  Note that the configuration limited in the feature F9 may be applied to the feature F4. In this case, instead of the configuration of the first paragraph, “in the series of effects executed by the effect execution unit, an operation reception period in which an operation generation effect occurs every time the specific operation is received by the reception unit” It is preferable to apply the configuration “

  Feature F10. In the branch mode, progress destination determination means for determining a branch effect range to be advanced among the plurality of branch effect ranges in accordance with the specific operation mode in the operation reception period (function for executing the operation corresponding process in the display CPU 102). The gaming machine according to Feature F9, comprising:

  According to the feature F10, in the branch mode effect, after execution of the operation reception period, it proceeds to the branch effect range corresponding to the number of specific operations in the operation reception period. Therefore, the player's attention to the specific operation Can be increased. Moreover, even if it is the structure which performs the production | presentation corresponding to specific operation in this way, production can be smoothly advanced by providing the structure of the said characteristics F8 and F9.

  Feature F11. For the area including at least a part of the area in which the branch correspondence information corresponding to the branch effect range not selected as the destination of the branch correspondence information stored in the second storage unit is stored Overwriting means (a function for executing the process of step S2319 in the display CPU 102 and a function for executing a return process in the VDP 105) overwriting other information in the situation where the effect of the branch effect range selected as is executed is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features F8 to F10, wherein:

  According to the feature F11, an area in which branch correspondence information corresponding to a branch effect range not selected as a destination is stored, and an area in which information used by the control unit is stored when an effect that occurs after branching is executed. Can be used as Thereby, the effects described for the configuration of the feature F8 can be achieved while effectively using the area of the second storage unit.

Feature F12. The first storage means stores optional information (common data group) used by the control means to execute arbitrary response control when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation. And
The second storage means stores the optional information read from the first storage means, and stores and holds the optional information when a situation in which the specific event can occur continues. And
When the specific event occurs, the control means performs the arbitrary correspondence control using the optional information stored in the second storage means,
When the transfer unit stores the branch correspondence information in the second storage unit, the transfer unit overwrites an area including at least a part of the area in which the arbitrary information is stored (overwrite processing in the VDP 105). The gaming machine according to any one of features F8 to F11, characterized in that

  According to the feature F12, by performing arbitrary correspondence control using the arbitrary information transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, the time required for reading the arbitrary information in the control unit can be shortened. As a result, arbitrary response control can be performed smoothly. In particular, since the optional information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held when the situation in which the specific event can occur is continued, each specific event in the configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing It is possible to smoothly perform voluntary response control for the occurrence of.

  In this case, when the branch correspondence information is stored in the second storage unit in advance, the second storage unit overwrites the area including at least a part of the area in which the optional information is stored. The storage means may not have a storage capacity that can store all the optional information and each branch correspondence information at the same time. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the storage capacity necessary for the second storage means.

Feature F13. The optional information is set in a plurality of types corresponding to a plurality of types of specific events,
When the branch transfer means overwrites each of the branch correspondence information, information for arbitrary use corresponding to a specific event that does not occur at least halfway of the effect that is executed after the branch timing from the overwrite timing is stored. The gaming machine according to Feature F12, wherein the overwriting is performed on an area.

  According to the feature F13, when the branch correspondence information is preliminarily collected and stored in the second storage unit, in the configuration in which the area including at least a part of the area in which the optional information is stored is overwritten, This optional information is optional information that can be erased at that time. Therefore, the function and effect of the feature F12 can be achieved without hindering the arbitrary response control.

  Feature F14. Returning means (step S2319 in the display CPU 102) for returning the optional information erased by overwriting of the branching transfer means to the second storage means until a specific event corresponding to the optional information can occur. The game machine according to F13, wherein the game machine has a function of executing the process (2) and a function of executing a return process in the VDP 105.

  According to the feature F14, the arbitrary information that has been deleted when the branch correspondence information is stored in advance is stored in the second storage unit until a specific event corresponding to the arbitrary information can occur. Since the operation is restored, the effect of the feature F12 can be achieved without hindering the arbitrary response control.

  Feature F15. The return means adds the erased arbitrary information to an area including at least a part of an area where information that has not been executed after the branch timing is stored in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to Feature F14, wherein the gaming machine is written.

  According to the feature F15, an area in which branch correspondence information corresponding to a branch effect range that is not selected as a destination can be used as an area for restoring the deleted arbitrary information. Thereby, the effect of the said characteristic F12 can be show | played, effectively utilizing the area | region of a 2nd memory | storage means.

Feature F16. Provided with an abnormality determination means (a function for executing a reading process for abnormality monitoring in the main controller 60) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred,
The optional information is used by the control means when an abnormality notification is executed by the effect execution means or a different notification means based on the fact that the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred. Information for abnormality (data group for abnormality notification) and information different from the information for abnormality are included,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F12 to F15, wherein the abnormality information is excluded from being overwritten by the branch transfer means.

  According to the feature F16, the abnormality notification control is executed using the abnormality information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, so that the time required for reading the abnormality information in the control means is shortened. Therefore, abnormality notification can be executed smoothly.

  In particular, the abnormality information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where an abnormality can occur even after the abnormality notification is once executed. Furthermore, the abnormality information is not deleted even when each branch correspondence information is transferred to the second storage means. As a result, in a configuration in which an abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to smoothly execute abnormality notification for the occurrence of each abnormality.

Feature F17. The optional information includes start effect information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the control means when the effect execution means starts the series of effects.
A series of effects corresponding to the branching mode is set so that a branch to any of the branch effect ranges is performed after the start effect range executed using the start effect information,
The start effect information is information that is not used by the control unit when the branch effect range effect is executed using the branch correspondence information, and is included in the overwriting target by the branch transfer unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features F12 to F16, characterized by:

  According to the feature F17, the start effect information in the series of effects is executed using the start effect information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, so that the start effect information can be read by the control means. The time required can be shortened, and a series of effects can be started smoothly. In particular, the start effect information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where a new series of effects can occur even after the series of effects has started. Thereby, even if it is the structure by which a series of productions are started at arbitrary timings, a series of productions can be smoothly started at each start timing.

  In addition, in a configuration that is not used when the start effect information causes the branch effect range effect to be executed, an area in which the start effect information is stored when each branch correspondence information is stored in the second storage unit in advance. By overwriting the area including at least a part of the area, the area of the second storage means can be used effectively.

Feature F18. The series of effects corresponding to the branching mode is set such that the intermediate effect range effect is executed after the start effect range is executed, and then branching to any of the branch effect ranges is performed. And
The first storage means stores intermediate correspondence information that is used by the control means when performing an effect in the intermediate effect range;
The transfer means reads the intermediate correspondence information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means until the intermediate production range is executed,
The control means causes the effect execution means to execute an effect in the intermediate effect range using the intermediate correspondence information stored in the second storage means.
Further, the branching transfer means is an area in which the intermediate correspondence information in the second storage means is stored in a situation where the effect in the intermediate effect range is executed by the effect executing means or in a situation where the effect is executed. The gaming machine according to feature F17, wherein the branch correspondence information is overwritten on an area different from the area including at least a part of the area where the start effect information is stored.

  According to the feature F18, it is possible to effectively use the area of the second storage unit while performing the start effect range effect and the intermediate effect range effect well.

  Each invention of the said characteristic F group is effective with respect to the following subjects.

  In this type of gaming machine, pachinko machines and slot machines are provided with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device as an effect execution means, and with an operating device operated by a player, A configuration is known in which the display content on the display screen is changed according to the above.

  For example, in a conventional pachinko gaming machine, an operating device is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and in order to make the player expect a big hit state, an effect corresponding to the operation of the operating device by the player is performed on a screen display etc. It is configured.

  Also, for example, in other conventional pachinko gaming machines, a plurality of presentation modes are set so that the presentation contents, BGM, etc. of the liquid crystal display device are different from each other, and an operation operated when selecting the presentation mode. A device is provided. In addition, there is known a slot machine that can select an effect mode in a display device by an operation device, as in the other conventional pachinko gaming machines.

  Here, if the processing speed of the image processing is slow, even if the display content on the display screen is changed according to the operation on the operation device as described above, the responsiveness of the display screen to the operation on the operation device Will get worse. If it does so, we are anxious about the effect which provided the composition which changes the display contents on a display screen according to operation to an operating device will not fully be exhibited.

  Note that the above problem also occurs in a gaming machine in which an effect execution unit different from a display device having a display screen is provided, and the content of the effect in the effect execution unit is changed according to an operation on the operation device.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features F1 to F18, the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C26, the features D1 to D19, the features E1 to E15, the following features A configuration limited by any one of G1 to G19, the following features H1 to H12, the following features I1 to I4, and the following features J1 to J19 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on the information stored in the first storage means (function for executing processing related to drawing instructions in the display CPU 102) , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105),
The first storage means executes first specific information used by the control means when executing the first specific control and second specific control that can be executed after the first specific control. And the second specific information used by the control means.
Second storage means that stores the first specific information and the second specific information read from the first storage means, and that the speed required for reading the information is faster than when reading from the first storage means ( Bridge side RAM 107),
The control means executes the first specific control using the first specific information stored in the second storage means, and stores the second specific information stored in the second storage means. To execute the second specific control using,
Further, the first specific information stored in the second storage means is used to read out from the first storage means in a situation where the first specific control is executed or executed by the control means. Transfer means for storing the second specific information in an area different from the area where the first specific information is stored in the second storage means (function for transferring a data group to the VDP-side RAM 108 in the VDP 105, write control section 121).

  According to the feature G1, the first specific control is executed using the first specific information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, and the first transfer is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means. By executing the second specific control using the two specific information, the time required for reading the first specific information and the second specific information in the control means is shortened, and the first specific control and the second specific control are performed. Specific control can be executed smoothly. In addition, since the unit of information is divided between the first specific information and the second specific information, it is used in both specific controls when the second specific control is executed in succession to the first specific control. Compared to a configuration in which information is transferred together, the time until the first specific control can be executed is shortened.

  Furthermore, in a situation where the first specific control is executed using the first specific information stored in the second storage means or in a situation where it is executed, the second specific information read from the first storage means is the second In this configuration, the storage unit is transferred to an area different from the area where the first specific information is stored. Thereby, compared with the structure which starts transfer of the 2nd specific information to a 2nd memory | storage means after execution of 1st specific control, time until 2nd specific control is started following 1st specific control Can be shortened.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

Feature G2. The first storage means further stores third specific information used by the control means when executing third specific control that can be executed after the second specific control,
The control means performs the third specific control using the third specific information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means,
The transfer unit causes the second storage unit to store the third specific information in a situation where the second specific control is executed by the control unit or in a situation where the control unit executes the second specific control. In this case, the third identification is performed in an area that is different from the area in which the second identification information is stored in the second storage unit and includes at least a part of the area in which the first identification information is stored. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, which is for overwriting information.

  According to the feature G2, when the second specific control and the third specific control are executed subsequent to the first specific control, it is possible to shorten the time until the third specific control is started. it can. Moreover, since the 3rd specific information is overwritten on the area | region containing at least one part of the area | region where 1st specific information is memorize | stored, there can exist the said effect, suppressing the memory capacity of a 2nd memory | storage means.

Feature G3. An effect execution means (symbol display device 31), a first storage means (character ROM 106) storing information in advance, and an execution of the effect in the effect execution means based on the information stored in the first storage means In a gaming machine provided with control means (a function for executing processing related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102 and a function for executing processing for displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105)
The first storage means includes division information (normal symbol data group, background data group, notice data group, reach data group, corresponding to each of a plurality of individual effect ranges that are continuous in a series of effects. Each jackpot data group)
The division information read from the first storage means is stored, and the second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that is faster than the case of reading information from the first storage means is provided,
The control means causes the effect execution means to execute an effect of an individual effect range corresponding to each piece of division information using the division information stored in the second storage means,
Furthermore, the situation where the effect execution means is controlled by the control means or the situation is controlled so that the effect of the predetermined individual effect range is executed using the predetermined division information stored in the second storage means The rear division information corresponding to the rear individual production range executed after the predetermined individual production range is read from the first storage unit, and the predetermined division information in the second storage unit is stored. A gaming machine comprising transfer means (a function of transferring a data group to the VDP-side RAM 108 in the VDP 105, a write control unit 121) for storing the data in a different area from the current area.

  According to the feature G3, the control for executing the effects of the individual effect ranges is performed using the division information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, thereby executing the effects of each individual effect range. The time required is shortened. In addition, a series of effects is divided into individual effect ranges, and division information is set corresponding to the individual effect ranges, so that information used in both specific controls is transferred when executing a series of effects. Compared to the configuration to be performed, it is possible to shorten the time until a series of effects can be started.

  Furthermore, in the situation where the effect execution means is controlled or controlled so that the effect of the predetermined individual effect range is executed using the predetermined division information stored in the second storage means, the first memory The rear division information read from the means is transferred to an area different from the area where the predetermined division information is stored in the second storage means. Thereby, compared with the structure which starts transfer of the back side division information to the 2nd storage means after execution of a predetermined individual production range, when a back individual production range is performed following a predetermined individual production range In addition, it is possible to shorten the time until the rear individual production range is started.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

  Feature G4. In the case where the rear division information is stored in the second storage means, the transfer means is an area different from an area where the predetermined division information is stored, and before the predetermined individual effect range. The feature G3 is characterized in that the rear division information is overwritten in an area including at least a part of an area in which the front division information corresponding to the front individual effect range executed in the above is stored. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature G4, when a predetermined individual production range and a rear individual production range are executed following the front individual production range, the time until the rear individual production range is started is shortened. be able to. Further, since the rear division information is overwritten on an area including at least a part of the area in which the front division information is stored, the above-described effect can be achieved while suppressing the storage capacity of the second storage unit.

Feature G5. Start production range that is executed in common over at least a specific period from the start timing in a plurality of types of productions, and whether or not execution is performed during or after the start production range depending on the type of production Or an additional production range with different types is set,
The gaming machine according to feature G3 or G4, wherein the division information is set in correspondence with each of the start effect range and the additional effect range.

  According to the feature G5, since the division information is set corresponding to each of the start effect range and the additional effect range, when the effect of the start effect range is executed, the division information corresponding to the start information range is transferred. In the case where an effect in the additional effect range is executed during the start effect range or after the start effect range, the division information corresponding to the added effect range may be transferred. Therefore, when the division information is transferred, it is only necessary to read and transfer the one corresponding to the production range to be executed, and it is not necessary to perform processing such as adjusting the division information after the reading to correspond to the production range to be executed. Therefore, the processing load during transfer can be reduced.

  Feature G6. The predetermined additional production range is composed of a plurality of individual production ranges, and the information used by the control means when executing the production of the predetermined additional production range is a plurality of pieces of divided information (initial division data group, intermediate The gaming machine according to Feature G5, wherein the gaming machine is configured by a division data group and a final division data group.

  According to the feature G6, even if the execution time when the effect in the predetermined additional effect range is executed is set to be long, the second storage means is set for the predetermined additional effect range. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the second storage unit can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which information that enables execution of a predetermined additional production range is collectively transferred.

Feature G7. In the additional production range, a long production range (super reach A display, super reach B display) and a short production range (normal reach display) in which the duration when executed is relatively long are set. ,
The short production range is configured by a single individual production range, and the information used by the control means when performing the production of the short production range is configured by a single division information.
The long effect range is composed of a plurality of individual effect ranges, and the information used by the control means when executing the effect of the long effect range is composed of a plurality of pieces of division information. The gaming machine described in the feature G5 or G6.

  According to the feature G7, since the short production range is configured by a single division information, it is possible to prevent the division information from being complicatedly transferred, and the long production range is configured by a plurality of division information. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which information that enables execution of the long effect range is collectively transferred, the capacity of information to be transferred in advance before the start of the long effect range can be reduced. That is, the division information can be transferred according to the type of the additional effect range.

Feature G8. Information of the transfer start timing of each of the division information is stored in advance,
The transfer means starts the transfer of each piece of division information in accordance with the transfer start timing, so that the division information corresponding to each individual effect range is stored in the second storage means until the execution timing of each individual effect range is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G7, wherein the gaming machine is stored.

  According to the characteristic G8, when the division information is transferred, it is only necessary to refer to the transfer start timing stored in advance, so that the processing related to transfer can be simplified.

Feature G9. Aspect information determining means (main control device 60) for determining a series of effect aspect information (display table) including the contents of control by the control means from the start to the end of the effect based on the establishment of the effect start condition. And a function for executing the fluctuation start process in the display CPU 102, and a function for executing the fluctuation start process using the normal symbol in the display CPU 102).
The transfer start timing information is set in correspondence with the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit,
The transfer means specifies the transfer start timing of the division information by referring to the elapsed time of the effect being executed and the aspect information determined by the aspect information determination means. A gaming machine according to G8.

  According to the feature G9, the transfer start timing information is set in association with the mode information used when a series of effects are advanced, so that the division information can be transferred in accordance with the progress of the effects. .

Feature G10. A plurality of modes are set in the above-described series of effects depending on whether or not there is an additional effect range that is executed during or after the common effect range.
Common control content information group (base table group) that defines the control content of the control means in the common effect range, and additional control content information group that defines the control content of the control means in the additional effect range Information group storage means (variable display table storage area 103d, jackpot presentation table storage area 103e) that stores in advance (notice table group, normal reach table group, super reach table group, jackpot presentation table group);
Based on the establishment of the production start condition, a mode determining unit (display table setting process in the display CPU 102) that determines a series of production modes by acquiring a necessary control content information group from the information group storage unit. Function to execute)
With
Information about each said transfer start timing is matched and memorize | stored in the control content information group in which the individual production | presentation range of the division | segmentation information respectively corresponding is stored, The game machine as described in the characteristics G8 or G9 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Assuming a configuration in which a series of control content information groups are prepared for each series of effects, it is necessary to prepare control content information groups for the number of aspects of the series of effects, and store control content information groups. There is a concern that the storage capacity required for storage will be large. If the information on the transfer start timing is individually set corresponding to each of these control content information groups, the required storage capacity increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the feature G10, since the control content information group is selected or combined according to a series of effects to be set, some control contents in a plurality of effects are provided. The information group is commonly used. Furthermore, the information of each transfer start timing is stored in association with a control content information group including the individual effect range of the corresponding division information. Thereby, a required storage capacity can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a series of control content information groups including information on transfer start timing is prepared for each series of effects.

Feature G11. In the additional effect range, a first front additional effect range (notice A display) that can be executed at the front effect timing and a second that can be executed when the first front additional effect range is not executed at the front effect timing. The first additional production range (super reach A display) that can be executed at the rear production timing and the first production timing at the rear production timing are included. A second rear additional production range (super reach B display) that can be executed when the rear additional production range is not executed,
The gaming machine according to Feature G10, wherein the control group information group for addition is stored in the information group storage means in a one-to-one correspondence with each additional effect range.

  According to the feature G11, diversification of effects is achieved by setting a plurality of combinations of additional effect ranges that are alternatively selected. In this case, an additional control content information group is stored in association with each additional effect range. Thereby, several control content information groups are used in common in a plurality of effects. Furthermore, the information of each transfer start timing is stored in association with a control content information group including the individual effect range of the corresponding division information. Thereby, the required storage capacity can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a series of control content information groups including information of transfer start timing is prepared for each series of effects.

Feature G12. The control means controls the production to be executed by the production execution means based on the occurrence of a specific event that can occur at any timing in a specific situation.
Each production of the plurality of aspects is configured to start from the common production range,
When the division information corresponding to the common effect range is transferred, the second storage means is controlled by the control means using the division information, and the effect of the common effect range is executed. Even if it exists, the said division | segmentation information is memorize | stored and hold | maintained in the condition where the said specific event may generate | occur | produce.

  According to the feature G12, the division information corresponding to the common effect range is stored and held in the second storage unit in a situation where a specific event can occur even after the common effect range is executed. Thereby, in the structure where the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to shorten the time until the production of the common effect range for the occurrence of each specific event.

Feature G13. At least a part of the division information has different information capacity according to the corresponding individual production range,
The size of the area distributed to each piece of divided information as a writing area is changed within the entire area of the second storage unit according to the combination of the divided information stored and held simultaneously in the second storage unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G12.

  According to the feature G13, the size of the area distributed to each piece of divided information as a writing area within the entire area of the second storage unit is determined in accordance with the combination of division information stored and held simultaneously in the second storage unit. By being changed, the degree of freedom in selecting the combination of information to be stored at the same time is increased.

  Feature G14. Adjustment means (cache buffer 123, write control unit) for adjusting the read timing of information from the second storage means by the control means and the transfer timing of information to the second storage means by the transfer means so as not to overlap. 121. The gaming machine according to Feature G13, which includes a function of executing data transfer processing in 121).

  According to the feature G14, since the read timing by the control means and the transfer timing by the transfer means are adjusted so as not to overlap, for example, the transfer means overwrites predetermined information on the area being read by the control means. The occurrence of inconvenience such as this is suppressed.

Feature G15. The adjusting means includes
When the speed required for reading information is higher than that when reading from the first storage means, and when the division information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the first storage means Intermediate storage means (cache buffer 123) for storing at least a part of the read division information at a stage before writing to the second storage means;
Based on transferring the information stored in the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, a storage execution means for storing the division information in the second storage means (executes data transfer processing in the write control unit 121) Function)
The gaming machine according to Feature G14, comprising:

  According to the feature G15, when the division information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, at least a part of the division information read from the first storage means is temporarily stored in the intermediate storage means, and then temporarily The division information can be stored in the second storage unit based on transferring the stored information to the second storage unit. According to this configuration, in the situation where information cannot be transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, such as when the control means is accessing the second storage means, the intermediate storage means At least a part of the division information can be read out. Then, when it becomes possible to transfer the information to the second storage means, the information stored in the intermediate storage means is transferred to the second storage means so that the division information is stored in the second storage means. be able to. In this case, compared to the configuration in which the division information is read from the first storage unit and stored in the second storage unit after the situation where the information can be transferred to the second storage unit, the transfer of the division information is completed. The time required is shortened.

Feature G16. The effect execution means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen,
The control means includes
Drawing information creating means (function for executing drawing data setting processing in the VDP 105) for creating drawing information using the division information stored in the second storage means;
Drawing signal output means for displaying a specific image on the display screen by outputting a drawing signal to the display means based on the drawing information created by the drawing information creation means (execution of the drawing signal output processing in the VDP 105 is executed) Function)
With
The adjusting unit prevents the transfer unit from transferring information to the second storage unit in a situation where the drawing information is generated by the drawing information generating unit, while the drawing signal output In a situation where the drawing signal is being output by the means, a means for permitting transfer of information to the second storage means by the transfer means (function to execute the process of step S1005 in the write control unit 121) is provided. A gaming machine according to Feature G14 or G15.

  According to the characteristic G16, it is possible to transfer the information to the second storage unit without interfering with the control for creating the drawing information in the control unit, and the period during which the control unit performs the control for outputting the drawing signal. It is possible to transfer the information to the second storage means by effectively using.

Feature G17. Production execution means (symbol display device 31) whose execution is controlled by the control means;
Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
A privilege granting unit (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit;
With
The control means starts the game turning operation before the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. Using the information that is read from the first storage means, transferred to the second storage means, and stored in the game turn control so that the game turn operation is terminated as an operation result corresponding to the result. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, wherein the gaming machine is performed on the performance executing means.

  With respect to the game turning operation, the effects as described above can be achieved.

Feature G18. Production execution means (symbol display device 31) whose execution is controlled by the control means;
Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
A transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result;
With
The control means uses the information read out from the first storage means, transferred to the second storage means and stored therein, so that the effect execution means can perform the special in the situation where the gaming state is the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G17, wherein an effect for a gaming state is executed.

  The effects described above can be achieved with respect to the effects for the gaming state.

Feature G19. Production execution means (symbol display device 31) whose execution is controlled by the control means;
Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
Prior to the determination of the grant by the grant determination means or based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game determining operation is started and the grant determination means The game turn control that causes the game turn operation to be ended as an operation result corresponding to the determination result is read from the first storage means, transferred to the second storage means, and stored information Game time control means (function for executing game time control processing in the display CPU 102) performed on the effect execution means by using;
Transition means (main control) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state when the result of the granting determination by the granting determining means is the granting correspondence result and the game turning operation corresponding to the granting correspondence result is completed. A function of executing a game state transition process in the device 60);
The control means has a special game state control which is read from the first storage means and causes the effect execution means to execute an effect for the special game state in a situation where the game state is the special game state. Special gaming state control means (function for executing a big hit control process in the display CPU 102) performed on the effect execution means by using the information transferred and stored in the second storage means;
With
The transfer means is information for special game state used by the control means when the special game state effect is executed when the special game state effect is executed after the game turning operation is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics G1 to G18, wherein the game memory is read out from the first storage unit and stored in the second storage unit in a situation where the game turning operation is being performed. .

  According to the characteristic G19, when the special gaming state effect is executed after the game turning operation is completed, the special gaming state information is transferred to the second storage unit in the situation where the game turning operation is being performed. Since the game has been completed, the transition to the special gaming state effect can be smoothly performed after the game turning operation is completed.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group G is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. .

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Also, in recent years, the degree of attention to images has been increased by diversifying the presentation mode of images or using complex moving images or live-action images as images, and accordingly, attention to games has been increased. Attempts have been made.

  Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable to display the image at an early stage. As a method for displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of a memory for image data can be considered. As another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of a CPU that performs image processing is conceivable. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom of memory selection decreases at the gaming machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed increases.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to image display, and similarly occurs in configurations related to other controls.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features G1 to G19, the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C26, the features D1 to D19, the features E1 to E15, and the features F1. A configuration limited by any one of F18, the following features H1 to H12, the following features I1 to I4, and the following features J1 to J19 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on the information stored in the first storage means (function for executing processing related to drawing instructions in the display CPU 102) , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105),
Storing the information read from the first storage means, a second storage means faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage means;
Transfer means for reading out the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means ( A function of transferring a data group to the VDP RAM 108 in the VDP 105, a write control unit 121),
With
The control means executes the specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means,
The transfer means reads a plurality of types of specific information from the first storage means when the power supply is started, stores the specific information in the second storage means, and stores the plurality of specific information in the second storage means. In this case, the plurality of specific information is transferred to the second storage means in accordance with a predetermined priority order.

  According to the feature H1, by performing the specific control using the specific information transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, the time required for reading the specific information in the control unit can be shortened, Specific control can be executed smoothly. Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of specific information is transferred to the second storage means when the power supply is started, the plurality of transfer information is transferred according to a predetermined priority order. As a result, it is possible to quickly shift to a state in which specific control with a high priority can be smoothly executed.

  Note that “power supply starts” refers to the start of supply of operating power from the supply unit in a configuration including a supply unit that receives operating power from a commercial power source and supplies operating power to the electrical equipment of the gaming machine. Including the configuration. The same applies to the following.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

Feature H2. A display unit having a display screen and controlled by the control unit (the symbol display device 31);
In the plurality of specific information, predetermined information used by the control means when displaying a predetermined image on the display screen, and a capacity of information smaller than the predetermined information are set, and an initial value is displayed on the display screen. And initial correspondence information used by the control means when displaying a correspondence image,
When the power supply is started, the transfer means transfers the initial correspondence information prior to the transfer of the predetermined information, and the predetermined correspondence image is displayed on the display screen in a situation where the initial correspondence image is displayed on the display screen. The game machine according to Feature H1, wherein the game machine transfers information.

  According to the feature H2, even if the transfer of the predetermined information to the second storage unit is not completed and the predetermined image using the predetermined information cannot be displayed on the display screen, An initial corresponding image is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that it is impossible to inspect whether or not the display means is normal until the predetermined image is displayed after the supply of operating power to the control means is started. .

  Further, since the initial correspondence information for displaying the initial correspondence image has a smaller capacity than the predetermined information, the transfer of the predetermined information is completed even if the initial correspondence information is transferred prior to the transfer of the predetermined information. Time will not be extremely slow.

  Feature H3. The predetermined image is a standby image that is displayed in a situation where an effect image is not displayed on the display screen, and the predetermined information is standby information that is used by the control means when the standby image is displayed. The gaming machine according to Feature H2, characterized in that:

  With the configuration of the feature H2, the initial correspondence image is displayed until the standby image is displayed after the start of power supply. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that it is impossible to inspect whether the display means is normal until the standby image is displayed after the supply of operating power to the control means is started. it can.

Feature H4. The standby image is an image in which a pattern is displayed on a background image, and a plurality of types of display modes are set depending on the combination of the background image and the pattern,
The first storage means includes, as the standby information, background information used by the control means when displaying the background image and design information used by the control means when displaying the design. Remember,
The transfer means is used by the control means when displaying other display modes of background information and pattern information that enable display of a standby image in the reference display mode among the plurality of types of display modes. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the gaming machine is transferred to the second storage means in preference to information.

  According to the feature H4, since a plurality of types of display modes are set, the display modes can be diversified. In this case, the background information and the pattern information that enable display of the standby image in the reference display mode among the plural types of display modes are transferred in preference to the information used when displaying other display modes. Is done. As a result, for example, after all of one of the background information and the pattern information that has been set for a plurality of types has been transferred, the standby image can be displayed compared to the configuration in which the other transfer is started. Time can be shortened.

Feature H5. A display unit having a display screen and controlled by the control unit (the symbol display device 31);
The specific information includes standby information used by the control means when displaying a standby image in a situation where an effect image is not displayed on the display screen.
The standby image is an image in which a pattern is displayed on a background image, and a plurality of types of display modes are set depending on the combination of the background image and the pattern,
The standby information includes background information used by the control unit when displaying the background image, and design information used by the control unit when displaying the design,
The transfer means is used by the control means when displaying other display modes of background information and pattern information that enable display of a standby image in the reference display mode among the plurality of types of display modes. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the gaming machine is transferred to the second storage means in preference to information.

  According to the feature H5, the display mode can be diversified by setting a plurality of types of display modes. In this case, the background information and design information that enable normal display variation display in the standard display mode among the multiple types of display modes are transferred in preference to the information used when displaying other display modes. Is done. As a result, for example, after the transfer of all of one of the background information and the pattern information that has been set for a plurality of types, it is possible to display the normal pattern in comparison with the configuration in which the other transfer is started. Time can be shortened.

Feature H6. Notification means controlled by the control means;
An abnormality determining means for determining whether an abnormality has occurred (a function of executing reading processing for abnormality monitoring in the main control device 60);
With
In the plurality of specific information, abnormality information used by the control unit when the abnormality notification is executed by the notification unit based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determination unit; Different from the abnormality information and different specific information used when executing predetermined control in the control means,
The transfer unit according to any one of the features H1 to H5, wherein, when the power supply is started, the transfer unit transfers the abnormality information before the transfer of the different specific information. Game machines.

  According to the feature H6, since the priority of the abnormality information is set high, it is possible to quickly shift to a state in which abnormality notification can be performed.

Feature H7. Display means (design display device 31) having a display screen;
Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
A privilege granting unit (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit;
With
The control means starts normal image variation display prior to the application determination being performed by the application determination means or based on the application determination being performed by the application determination means, and the application determination means The display control for game times that ends the variation display of the normal pattern as a stop result corresponding to the determination result is read from the first storage means, transferred to the second storage means, and stored in the information. To the display means,
Furthermore, the plurality of specific information includes
Start variation display information used by the control means when starting the variation display of the normal pattern,
Simple information with a capacity of information set smaller than the start variation display information,
Is included,
The transfer means, when the power supply is started, transfers the simple information prior to the transfer of the start variation display information,
When the start variation display information is not stored in the second storage means and the simple information is stored in the situation, the start condition for the game times is satisfied. By using the simple information, there is provided a simple display control means (a function for executing a variation start process by a simple symbol and a process during variation by a simple symbol in the display CPU 102) for performing simple display on the display screen. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6.

  According to the feature H7, by using the start variation display information transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, the normal pattern variation display is started, so that the normal pattern variation display is smoothly started. Can be made. Moreover, when the power supply is started, the start variation display information is transferred, so that a transition to a state in which the normal pattern variation display can be performed can be performed at an early stage.

  In this case, if the situation that the display means cannot display the variation of the normal pattern such as the transfer of the start variation display information is not in time until the start condition of the game times is established, the determination condition is satisfied. Nevertheless, there is a concern that the player may be confused that the establishment of the determination condition has been invalidated. In contrast, the simple display allows the player to recognize that the determination condition has not been invalidated in a situation where the normal pattern variation display cannot be performed despite the determination condition being satisfied. Will be. As a result, even if a situation in which the display means cannot display the variation of the normal pattern occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused that the establishment of the determination condition has been invalidated. .

  In addition, since the simple information used for the simple display has a smaller storage capacity than the start variation display information, it is possible to shorten the time until the transfer of the simple display is completed and the start variation display. Even if the simple information is transferred before the information, it is possible to prevent the timing of completing the transfer of the start variation display information from being extremely delayed.

Feature H8. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on the information stored in the first storage means (function for executing processing related to drawing instructions in the display CPU 102) , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105),
Storing the information read from the first storage means, and a second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage means;
Based on the fact that a predetermined special condition is established, the transfer unit (the data group stored in the VDP-side RAM 108 in the VDP 105) reads the specific information from the first storage unit and stores the read specific information in the second storage unit. A write control unit 121),
With
The control means executes specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means,
Furthermore, the control means (in step S804 in the display CPU 102) prevents the control means from executing the specific control until the specific information is stored in the second storage means after the special condition is satisfied. A game machine having a function of executing a process, a process of step S807, a change start process using a simple symbol, and a process during change using a simple symbol.

  According to the feature H8, the specific control is executed using the specific information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, thereby shortening the time required for the control means to read the specific information. Therefore, the specific control can be executed smoothly. In this case, in the configuration in which the specific control is executed after the special condition is satisfied, it is not necessary to execute the specific control in the control unit until the specific information is stored in the second storage unit after the special condition is satisfied. By doing so, the effect of shortening the time required for the specific control can be surely exhibited.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

Feature H9. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information in advance, and control means (in the display CPU 102) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means after power supply is started In a gaming machine provided with a function for executing processing related to a drawing instruction and a function for executing processing for displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105)
Storing the information read from the first storage means, and a second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage means;
Based on the start of power supply, the specific information is read from the first storage means, and the read specific information is stored in the second storage means (a data group is transferred to the VDP RAM 108 in the VDP 105) Function, write controller 121),
With
The control means executes the specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means,
Further, the control means (display) prevents the control means from executing the specific control until the specific information is stored in the second storage means after the supply of operating power to the control means is started. A gaming machine comprising a function of executing a process in step S804, a process in step S807, a change start process by a simple symbol, and a process during change by a simple symbol in the CPU 102).

  According to the feature H9, the specific control is executed using the specific information transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, thereby shortening the time required for the control unit to read the specific information. Therefore, the specific control can be executed smoothly. In this case, in the configuration in which the specific control is executed after the power supply is started, it is necessary to execute the specific control in the control unit until the specific information is stored in the second storage unit after the power supply is started. By avoiding this, the effect of shortening the time required for the specific control can be surely exhibited.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

Feature H10. The regulating means prevents the specific control from being executed in the control means until a start time period elapses after the power supply is started,
The transfer means reads the specific information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means until the start period elapses after the power supply is started. The gaming machine according to Feature H9.

  According to the feature H10, since the specific information is transferred to the second storage unit from the start of power supply until the start time period elapses, the effect of shortening the time required for the specific control is surely exhibited. be able to.

Feature H11. A display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen is provided, and the control means uses the specific information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means as the specific control. To control the display of the specific image on the display screen,
The restricting means is an initial correspondence control means (main processing in the display CPU 102) that displays an initial correspondence image (inspection image, initial display image) on a display screen until at least the start time period has elapsed since the start of power supply. The gaming machine according to Feature H10, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of

  According to the feature H11, even if the transfer of the specific information to the second storage unit is not completed and the specific image using the specific information cannot be displayed on the display screen, An initial corresponding image is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that it is impossible to inspect whether or not the display means is normal until the specific image is displayed after the start of power supply.

Feature H12. Display means (design display device 31) having a display screen;
Grant determination means (a function for executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
A privilege granting unit (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit;
With
The control means is read from the first storage means before the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. By using the information transferred and stored in the means, a normal variation display is started to start the normal pattern variation display and stop the normal pattern variation display as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the addition determination unit. Normal display control means for controlling the display of the display means (function to execute the change start process by the normal symbol and the process during change by the normal symbol in the display CPU 102),
The specific information includes start variation display information (usually used by the normal display control means when the start variation display in the range from the start timing to at least a specific period in the normal image variation display is displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine according to any one of features H9 to H11, wherein a design data group and each background data group) are included.

  According to the feature H12, by using the start variation display information transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, the control for the start variation display in the normal pattern variation display is executed, so that the variation display is performed. It is possible to shorten the time from when the condition for starting the image is established until the display of the variation of the normal pattern is started. In addition, since the configuration of the feature D2 is provided, it is not necessary to execute specific control in the control unit until the start variation display information is stored in the second storage unit after the supply of the operating power is started. By doing so, it is possible to reliably exhibit the effect of shortening the time from when the condition for starting the variable display is established to when the normal pattern variable display is started.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group H is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. .

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Also, in recent years, the degree of attention to images has been increased by diversifying the presentation mode of images or using complex moving images or live-action images as images, and accordingly, attention to games has been increased. Attempts have been made.

  Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable to display the image at an early stage. As a method for displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of a memory for image data can be considered. As another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of a CPU that performs image processing is conceivable. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom of memory selection decreases at the gaming machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed increases.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to image display, and similarly occurs in configurations related to other controls.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features H1 to H12, the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C26, the features D1 to D19, the features E1 to E15, and the features F1. A configuration limited by any one of F18, the above-described features G1 to G19, the following features I1 to I4, and the following features J1 to J19 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on the information stored in the first storage means (function for executing processing related to drawing instructions in the display CPU 102) , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105),
Storing the information read from the first storage means, and a second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage means;
Transfer means for reading out the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means ( A function of transferring a data group to the VDP RAM 108 in the VDP 105, a write control unit 121),
With
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means executes the specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the feature I1, the specific information is stored at the timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit in the second storage unit that is faster than the speed required for reading out the information from the first storage unit. The control means is configured to execute specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be performed smoothly.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included.

Feature I2. Command means (display CPU 102) for giving an instruction to execute the specific control to the control means;
The second storage means has a plurality of areas for storing information,
When the command means gives an instruction to execute the specific control to the control means, in which area in the second storage means the specific information used for executing the specific control is stored The gaming machine according to the feature I1, wherein the information is provided to the control means.

  According to the feature I2, the control unit can grasp in which area of the second storage unit the specific information is stored based on the information provided by the command unit. Thereby, it is not necessary for the control means to know in which area the second specific information is stored in advance with respect to the timing of receiving the execution instruction of the specific control, and the processing load of the control means is reduced. Is planned.

  Feature I3. The command means stores information indicating in which area of the second storage means the specific information is stored when the specific information is transferred to the second storage means by the transfer means. The gaming machine according to Feature I2, characterized by:

  According to the feature I3, the command unit can grasp which area of the second storage unit stores the specific information.

  Feature I4. The command means gives an instruction to execute the specific control to the control means, and also gives an instruction to transfer the specific information to the transfer means. Further, the command means further sends the specific information to the transfer means. The gaming machine according to I2 or I3, characterized in that when a transfer instruction is given, information on a transfer destination area of the specific information in a plurality of areas of the second storage unit is provided to the transfer unit. .

  According to the characteristic I4, the command unit controls the transfer unit and the control unit, whereby the transfer unit transfers information to the second storage unit and the control unit reads information from the second storage unit. Can be adjusted satisfactorily. Further, the command means for giving the transfer instruction and the execution instruction provides the transfer means with information on the transfer destination area of the specific information, and information on which area the specific information is stored to the control means. provide. Thereby, simplification of the structure of a control means and a transfer means is achieved. On the other hand, since the command means controls the transfer timing of specific information and the execution timing of specific control, the command means provides the transfer means with information on the transfer destination of the specific information and sends the specific information to the control means. Even if the read source information is provided, it is possible to prevent the command means from being extremely complicated.

  The invention of the above characteristic group I is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. .

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Also, in recent years, the degree of attention to images has been increased by diversifying the presentation mode of images or using complex moving images or live-action images as images, and accordingly, attention to games has been increased. Attempts have been made.

  Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable to display the image at an early stage. As a method for displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of a memory for image data can be considered. As another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of a CPU that performs image processing is conceivable. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom of memory selection decreases at the gaming machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed increases.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to image display, and similarly occurs in configurations related to other controls.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features I1 to I4, the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C26, the features D1 to D19, the features E1 to E15, and the features F1. The structure limited in any one of -F18, the said characteristics G1-G19, the said characteristics H1-H12, and the following characteristics J1-J19 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  Further, in each of the features of the above-described feature group A to feature group I, the “predetermined determination condition” is reserved based on the occurrence of a game ball entering a start ball entering section provided in the game area. A configuration in which information is acquired is included. Further, a configuration in which the start operation means is operated in a state where a predetermined number of game media are received is included.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on the information stored in the first storage means (function for executing processing related to drawing instructions in the display CPU 102) , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the display device 346 in the VDP 105),
A second storage unit that stores information read from the first storage unit and has a shorter period of time required to read information than the case of reading from the first storage unit when compared by reading information of the same capacity. Bridge RAM 107),
Specific information used when the specific control is executed at a timing prior to the execution of the specific control (function for executing the teaching effect, special effect, and bonus game effect by the display CPU 102) by the control means. Is transferred from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means (function for transferring a data group to the VDP RAM 108 in the VDP 105, write control unit 121),
With
The control means executes the specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means, and further performs a first control (set of a display-side bonus winning flag by the display CPU 102, a bonus After executing step S4704 in the hour control process), the specific control is executed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the specific control is not executed if the condition is not satisfied. ,
The transfer unit stores the specific information in the second storage unit when the first control is executed or started.

  According to the feature J1, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit that is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage unit at the timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. The control means is configured to execute specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when the storage means having a relatively low reading speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a large capacity of the first storage unit.

  The specific control is executed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied after the first control is executed. For this reason, when the first control is executed or started, the specific information is read, so that at least a part of the specific information is obtained before a predetermined condition is satisfied or until the specific control is executed. Can be read out in advance. In other words, when the first control that can trigger the execution of the specific control is executed, the specific information is read to sufficiently ensure the period for reading the specific information.

Feature J2. When the first control is executed or started, it is provided with limiting means (a function for invalidating the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324) for limiting the occurrence of an event that triggers the specific control,
The game machine according to claim J1, wherein the transfer means stores at least a part of the specific information in the second storage means during a period restricted by the restriction means.

  According to the feature J2, the occurrence of an event that triggers the specific control is restricted during the period restricted by the restriction means. For this reason, it can suppress that specific control is performed at least in a limit period. By storing at least a part of the specific information in the second storage unit during the period limited by the limiting unit, at least a part of the specific information is stored in the second storage unit before the specific control is executed. Is possible.

Feature J3. The control means executes the specific control based on a predetermined operation performed by a player,
The limiting means disables or disables the predetermined operation that triggers the specific control over a predetermined limit period when the first control is executed or started. The gaming machine according to Feature J2, wherein there is a gaming machine.

  According to the feature J3, when the first control is executed or started, a time limit for disabling or invalidating the predetermined operation of the player is set. For this reason, it can suppress performing predetermined operation used as execution opportunity of specific control in a limit period. Thereby, it can suppress that the execution opportunity of specific control generate | occur | produces in a restriction | limiting period. In addition, it is possible to set a limited period as a period for storing the specific information, and it can be expected that the period for storing the specific information can be easily secured.

Feature J4. It is provided with display means (reels 317L, 317M, 317R) for variably displaying a plurality of kinds of patterns, the variability display on the display means is started, and the variability display is terminated after the predetermined operation is performed. One game time,
Both of the first control and the specific control are controls for executing the effect of game times,
The game machine according to feature J3, wherein the transfer means stores the specific information in the second storage means in the limit period of game times related to the first control.

  According to feature J4, it is possible to store the specific information during a period in which the predetermined operation by the player is disabled or invalid by storing the specific information in the limited period of game times related to the first control. It becomes. Since the predetermined operation by the player is performed at an arbitrary timing of the player, the pace at which the game times progress is irregular. For this reason, if the specific information is stored after the end of the limit period, it may be inconvenient that the game times end before the storage of the specific information is completed. By storing the specific information in the limited period, it is possible to guarantee a period for storing the specific information regardless of the timing of the predetermined operation of the player.

Feature J5. Display means (reels 317L, 317M, 317R) on which a plurality of kinds of patterns are variably displayed;
Start control means (a function of executing the process of step S4301 of the reel control process by the MPU 352 of the main control device 350) to start the variable display of the picture on the display means so that the picture is variably displayed at a constant speed after the picture is accelerated. )When,
Based on the stop operation performed by the player, the stop control means for stopping the picture on the display means corresponding to the stop operation (the processing of steps S4302 to S4307 in the reel control processing by the MPU 352 of the main control device 350) Function to execute)
With
The limited period includes an acceleration period of the pattern variation display on the display means, a stop period until the pattern variation display when the stop operation is performed, and a next stop after the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to Feature J3 or J4, characterized in that it includes at least one of a period until enabling.

  According to the characteristic J5, the acceleration period of the variable display of the pattern, the stop period from when the stop operation is performed until the variable display of the pattern is stopped, and until the next stop operation after the stop period becomes effective One of the periods is set as the limited period. During each period, the change display of the pattern is not performed at a constant speed, and the control for changing the display of the pattern can be favorably performed by disabling or disabling the stop operation. Disabling or invalidating a predetermined operation of the player in displaying the pattern in a variable manner is a well-known configuration in performing the variable display of the pattern. In this feature, since the specific information is stored in the limited period set for performing the variable display of the pattern, it is not necessary to newly set the limited period in order to store the specific information.

Feature J6. A display means (reels 317L, 317M, and 317R) for displaying a plurality of types of patterns in a variable manner is provided, and the display of the change in the display means is started and the change display is ended as one game time. Yes,
The first control is a special gaming state control that shifts according to the result of the game times,
The specific control is a control executed in a game round after the special gaming state is ended,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J5, wherein the transfer unit stores the specific information in the second storage unit in the special gaming state.

  According to the feature J6, the specific control is executed in the game times after the special game state advantageous to the player is ended. By storing the specific information in the special gaming state, at least a part of the specific information can be stored before the specific control is executed. Thereby, specific control can be performed smoothly.

Feature J7. The specific control is performed over a predetermined period,
The specific information includes a plurality of types of division information divided into a plurality of ranges according to the passage of time (first data to third data in special effects, start data in effects for bonus games, first to first data 3rd data, data for termination)
The transfer means causes the second storage means to store a part of the division information on the front side in the restriction period restricted by the restriction means, according to any one of features J2 to J6 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature J7, the specific information is divided into a plurality of pieces of information as division information. Further, a part of the division information on the front side is stored in the second storage means during the limited period. Since specific control is performed over a predetermined period, it is conceivable that the amount of specific information increases. In this respect, in this feature, a part of the division information is stored in the second storage unit, whereby the specific information can be stored favorably. That is, it is not necessary to store all of the specific information in the second storage unit in the limited period, and it is only necessary to store the amount of information that can be stored in the limited period in the second storage unit.

Feature J8. Display means (reels 317L, 317M, 317R) on which a plurality of kinds of patterns are variably displayed;
A role lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the MPU 352 of the main controller 350) for performing a lottery of a predetermined role;
When the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the display of the variable display of the pattern on the display means is started, and when the end condition is satisfied, the variable display is ended as one game time. Game time control means (function to execute reel control processing by the MPU 352 of the main control device 350) for controlling the display of variation of the pattern in the game time;
With
As a winning combination of the lottery means, a special combination that is established when a special pattern or a combination of special patterns stops at the effective position of the display unit is set,
Depending on the timing at which the stop of the display of the variation of the pattern is started, the arrangement of the plurality of types of patterns is set so as not to stop at the effective position even if the special role is won.
When the special role is won, the special picture or the combination of the special picture is reserved until the special picture or the combination of special pictures stops at the effective position,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, wherein the specific control is executed based on the fact that the first control is executed and the special role is won. .

  If the special control is executed when the special role is won and the first control is executed, the first control is executed in a state where the win is retained even if the special role is won. Otherwise, the specific control is not executed. Accordingly, if the special information is stored when the special role is won, at least the period for storing the specific information can be secured until the first control is executed.

  Further, if the specific control is executed when the first control is executed and the special combination is won, the specific control is not executed unless the special combination is won even if the first control is executed. Thereby, if specific information is memorize | stored when 1st control is performed, the period which memorize | stores specific information until it becomes a special role winning can be ensured.

  Feature J9. The first control is the control of the game times that have been won by the special role, and the specific control is related to the control of the game times related to the special role winning or the special role winning after the game times. The gaming machine according to Feature J8, which is control of performance.

  According to the feature J9, the specific control is executed after the game times in which the special role is won. Thereby, at least the game times that are won by the special role can be secured as game times for storing the specific information.

Feature J10. In the game times that have been selected as the special combination, there are provided restriction means for restricting the occurrence of an event that triggers the specific control over a predetermined restriction period (period in which the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 is invalidated). ,
The game machine according to Feature J9, wherein the transfer means stores at least a part of the specific information in the second storage means during the restriction period in the game times that is won by the special role.

  According to the feature J10, the specific information is stored in the limited period in the game times that was won the special role. Further, the specific control is executed after the game times when the special role is won. That is, according to this feature, since the specific information is stored in the game times before the execution of the specific control, it can be suppressed that the specific information is not stored at the timing when the specific control is executed.

Feature J11. The specific control is performed over a predetermined period,
The specific information includes a plurality of types of division information (start data, first to third data, and end data in a bonus game effect) divided into a plurality of ranges according to the passage of time. And
The game machine according to Feature J10, wherein the transfer means stores the part of the division information on the front side in the second storage means during a period restricted by the restriction means.

  According to the feature J11, the specific information is divided into a plurality of pieces of information as division information. Further, a part of the division information on the front side is stored in the second storage means during the limited period. Since specific control is performed over a predetermined period, it is conceivable that the amount of specific information increases. In this regard, in this feature, the specific information can be favorably stored by storing a part of the division information in the second storage unit. That is, it is not necessary to store all of the specific information in the second storage unit in the limited period, and it is only necessary to store the amount of information that can be stored in the limited period in the second storage unit.

Feature J12. As the specific control, a first specific control (a process of outputting a drawing list for teaching effects by the display CPU 102) executed at a first timing, and a second timing that is a timing after the first timing. And the second specific control (processing for outputting a drawing list for starting bonus) is set,
The transfer means stores the first specific information used for the first specific control in the second storage means in preference to the second specific information used for the second specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of J1 to J11.

  According to the feature J12, the first specific information is stored with priority over the second specific information. The second specific control is executed at a second timing after the first timing. If the second specific information is stored with priority over the first specific information, it may be considered that the storage of the first specific information is not completed at the first timing. In this regard, according to the present feature, by storing the first specific information with priority, it is possible to prevent the storage of the first specific information from being completed when the first specific control is executed. Thereby, even if a plurality of pieces of specific information are stored in succession, problems are unlikely to occur when executing specific control.

Feature J13. First storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information related to the execution of the effect in advance, and effect execution means that executes the effect based on the information stored in the first storage means (related to the drawing instruction in the display CPU 102) In a gaming machine provided with a function for executing processing and a function for executing processing for displaying an image on the display device 346 in the VDP 105)
A second storage unit that stores information read from the first storage unit and has a shorter period of time required to read information than the case of reading from the first storage unit when compared by reading information of the same capacity. Bridge RAM 107),
The specification used when the specific effect is executed at a timing before the specific effect (the function of executing the teaching effect, special effect, and bonus game effect by the display CPU 102) is executed by the effect executing means. Transfer means for reading information from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means (function for transferring a data group to the VDP-side RAM 108 in the VDP 105, the write control unit 121);
With
The effect execution means executes a predetermined first effect (a display for ending a bonus in the effect for a bonus game), and when the first effect is executed, a predetermined condition is satisfied. The specific effect is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means based on the establishment, and the specific effect is not executed when the condition is not satisfied. Yes,
The transfer means stores the specific information in the second storage means when the first effect is executed or started.

  According to the feature J13, the specific information is stored at the timing before the specific effect is executed by the effect execution unit in the second storage unit, which is faster than the speed required for reading out the information from the first storage unit. The effect execution means is configured to execute the specific effect using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when the storage means having a relatively slow reading speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for reading the specific information in the effect execution means can be shortened, and the specific effect can be smoothly performed. . Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a large capacity of the first storage unit.

  The specific effect is executed when the first effect is executed and a predetermined condition is satisfied. For this reason, when the first effect is executed or started, the specific information is read, so that at least one of the specific information is obtained before a predetermined condition is satisfied or until the specific effect is executed. Can be read out in advance. That is, by reading the specific information when the first effect that can trigger the execution of the specific effect is being executed, the period for reading the specific information can be sufficiently secured.

Feature J14. First storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on the information stored in the first storage means (function for executing processing related to drawing instructions in the display CPU 102) , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the display device 346 in the VDP 105),
A second storage unit that stores information read from the first storage unit and has a shorter period of time required to read information than the case of reading from the first storage unit when compared by reading information of the same capacity. Bridge RAM 107),
Specific information used when the specific control is executed at a timing prior to the execution of the specific control (function for executing the teaching effect, special effect, and bonus game effect by the display CPU 102) by the control means. Is transferred from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means (function for transferring a data group to the VDP RAM 108 in the VDP 105, write control unit 121),
With
The control means executes the specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means, and further, a specific event (in a game process that proceeds based on a game operation by the player) And the specific control is executed based on the occurrence of a bonus role winning, a bonus game being ended, etc.,
The game machine characterized in that the transfer means stores the specific information in the second storage means when the specific event occurs.

  According to the feature J14, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit whose speed required for reading the information is higher than that in the case of reading from the first storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. The control means is configured to execute specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when the storage means having a relatively low reading speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a large capacity of the first storage unit.

  The specific control is executed based on the occurrence of a specific event. For this reason, it is possible to read out at least a part of the specific information until the specific control is executed by reading out the specific information when a specific event occurs. That is, when a specific event that can trigger the execution of the specific control occurs, the specific information is read to sufficiently ensure the period for reading the specific information.

Feature J15. A display means (reels 317L, 317M, and 317R) for displaying a plurality of types of patterns in a variable manner is provided, and the display of the change in the display means is started and the change display is ended as one game time. Yes,
The specific event occurs in one game time,
When the specific event occurs, the control means executes the specific control in a game number after the game number in which the specific event has occurred,
When the specific event occurs or occurs, the transfer unit stores the specific information in the second storage unit before the game event in which the specific event occurs or occurs. A gaming machine according to J14.

  According to the feature J15, when a specific event occurs or occurs, the specific information is stored before the game round in which the specific event occurs or occurs. Since the specific control is executed at the game time after the occurrence of the specific event, if the specific information is stored at the game time at which the specific event occurs or occurs, the specific control can be executed well. .

Feature J16. The control means executes control using information different from the specific information in the game times in which the specific event occurs or occurs (function to execute a normal effect by the display CPU 102),
The game machine according to Feature J15, wherein the transfer unit stores the specific information in the second storage unit when the control unit is executing control using the different information.

  According to the feature J16, control using information different from the specific information is executed in the game times in which the specific event occurs or occurs. By storing the specific information when the control is being executed, it is easy to ensure the period for storing the specific information.

Feature J17. The control means executes the specific control based on a predetermined operation performed by a player when the specific event occurs,
Limiting means that disables or disables the predetermined operation that triggers the specific control over a predetermined limit period when the specific event occurs or occurs (invalidates the operation of the stop switches 322 to 324 Function)
The game machine according to any one of features J14 to J16, wherein the transfer unit stores the specific information in the second storage unit during the restriction period.

  According to the feature J17, when a specific event occurs or occurs, a time limit for disabling or invalidating a predetermined operation by the player is set. For this reason, it can suppress performing predetermined operation used as execution opportunity of specific control in a limit period. Thereby, it can suppress that the execution opportunity of specific control generate | occur | produces in a restriction | limiting period. In addition, it is possible to set a limited period as a period for storing the specific information, and it can be expected that the period for storing the specific information can be easily secured.

Feature J18. A display means (reels 317L, 317M, and 317R) for displaying a plurality of types of patterns in a variable manner is provided, and the display of the change in the display means is started and the change display is ended as one game time. Yes,
Both of the first control and the specific control are controls for executing the effect of game times,
The game machine according to Feature J17, wherein the transfer means stores the specific information in the second storage means in the limit period of game times in which the specific event occurs or occurs.

  According to the feature J18, by storing the specific information during the game time limit period in which the specific event occurs or occurs, the specific information can be stored in a period in which the predetermined operation by the player is disabled or invalid. It becomes possible. Since the predetermined operation by the player is performed at an arbitrary timing of the player, the pace at which the game times progress is irregular. For this reason, if the specific information is stored after the end of the limit period, it may be inconvenient that the game times end before the storage of the specific information is completed. By storing the specific information in the limited period, it is possible to guarantee a period for storing the specific information regardless of the timing of the predetermined operation of the player.

Feature J19. The specific control is performed over a predetermined period,
The specific information includes a plurality of types of division information divided into a plurality of ranges according to the passage of time (first data to third data in special effects, start data in effects for bonus games, first to first data 3rd data, data for termination)
The game machine according to the feature J17 or J18, wherein the transfer means stores the part of the division information on the front side in the second storage means during a period restricted by the restriction means.

  According to the feature J19, the specific information is divided into a plurality of pieces of information as division information. Further, a part of the division information on the front side is stored in the second storage means during the limited period. Since specific control is performed over a predetermined period, it is conceivable that the amount of specific information increases. In this respect, in this feature, a part of the division information is stored in the second storage unit, whereby the specific information can be stored favorably. That is, it is not necessary to store all of the specific information in the second storage unit in the limited period, and it is possible to suppress the storage of the specific information from being terminated in the limited period.

  Further, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J19, the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C26, the features D1 to D19, the features E1 to E15, the features F1 to F18, the above A configuration limited by any one of the characteristics G1 to G19, the characteristics H1 to H12, and the characteristics I1 to I4 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means Then, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and the gaming machine gives a privilege to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Symbol display device, 58 ... Operation device for production, 60 ... Main control device, 100 ... Display control device, 102 ... Display CPU, 105 ... VDP, 106 ... Character ROM as 1st memory | storage means, 107: Bridge-side RAM as second storage means, 108: VDP-side RAM as separate storage means, 109: Bridge LSI as relay section, 121: Write control section, 123 ... Cache buffer as intermediate storage means, 171 ... first bridge RAM, 172 ... second bridge RAM, 173 ... input / output driver circuit as switching means, 212 ... main display unit, 314L to 314R ... display window, 317L to 317R ... left, middle, right reel, 322 to 324 ... Left, middle, right stop switch, 346 ... Display device, 350 ... Main control device, 352 ... M U.

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine comprising first storage means for storing information in advance, and control means for executing control based on information stored in the first storage means,
Second storage means that can store information read from the first storage means and has a shorter period of time required for reading information than when read from the first storage means when compared by reading information of the same capacity When,
Transfer means for reading out the specific information used in executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means; ,
With
The control means executes the specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means, and further, a predetermined condition is satisfied after executing the first control. The specific control is executed in the case, and the specific control is not executed when the condition is not satisfied,
The transfer means stores the specific information in the second storage means when the first control is executed or started .
When the first control is executed or started, it comprises a limiting means for limiting the occurrence of a predetermined event before the execution of the specific control,
The transfer means stores at least a part of the specific information in the second storage means during a period restricted by the restriction means .

Images